Ricoh 5310

MP 501/601
SP 5300/5310
Machine Code:
D255/D256/M281/M282
Field Service Manual
Important Safety Notices
Warnings, Cautions, Notes
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
• A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could result in
death or serious injury.
• A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.
• Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of valuable
data and to prevent damage to the machine.
• This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
General Safety Instructions
For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this manual handy
for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
[A]: ON
[B]: OFF
[C]: Push ON/Push OFF
[D]: Standby
Switches and Symbols

Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas, the meaning of
each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
1
Safety
Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure that the
machine and peripheral power cords are unplugged.
2. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical
voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. Always unplug the power cord from the power source before you move the product. Before you
move the machine, arrange the power cord so it will not fall under the machine.
5. Disconnect all peripheral units (finisher, LCT, etc.) from the mainframe before you move the
machine.
6. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the
main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.
7. The machine drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up period. Be careful to
keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components as the machine starts operation.
8. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine is
operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
9. To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and
aerosols.
10. Do not use flammable sprays or solvent in the vicinity of the machine. Also, avoid placing these
items in the vicinity of the machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
11. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any part that generates heat.
12. Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials to prevent
slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg injuries.
13. Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace safety devices
immediately.
14. Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device.
15. Modification or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal
injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is operating normally and safely
after removal and replacement of any safety device.
16. For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with the machine. Using
replacement devices not designed for use with the machine could lead to a fire and personal
injuries.
17. For machines installed with the ADF/ARDF:
2
When a thick book or three-dimensional original is placed on the exposure glass and the ARDF
cover is lowered, the back side of the ARDF rises up to accommodate the original. Therefore, when
closing the ARDF, please be sure to keep your hands away from the hinges at the back of the
ARDF.
18. When using a vacuum cleaner around the machine, keep others away from the cleaner, especially
small children.
19. For machines installed with the anti-tip components:
The anti-tip components are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the
international standard for safety. The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are
heavy in weight, from toppling as a result of people running into or leaning onto the products,
which can lead to serious accidents such as persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.:
UL60950-1, Europe: EN60950-1) Therefore, removal of such components must always be with
the consent of the customer. Do not remove them at your own judgment.
Health Safety Conditions
1. For the machines installed with the ozone filters:

• Never operate the machine without the ozone filters installed.
• Always replace the ozone filters with the specified types at the proper intervals.
2. The machine, which use high voltage power source, can generate ozone gas. High ozone density
is harmful to human health. Therefore, locate the machine in a large well ventilated room that has
an air turnover rate of more than 50m3/hr/person.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may
cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If
unsuccessful, get medical attention.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
1. The machine and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service
representative who has completed the training course on those models with exceptions on some
machines where the installation can be handled by the user.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an
open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, organic photoconductors, and AIO unit in accordance with
local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
3
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100
batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical
reactions and heat build-up.
5. The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the
same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Handling Toner
• Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to avoid spilling
toner on clothing or the hands.
• If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to a well-
ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
• If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water.
• If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye wash. If there are signs of
irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
• If toner is swallowed, drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested toner. If there are
signs of any problem, seek medical attention.
• If toner spills on clothing, wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold water. Never use
hot water! Hot water can cause toner to set and permanently stain fabric.
• Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer packages, cartridges,
bottles (including used toner and empty bottles and cartridges), and AIO unit out of the reach of
children.
• Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges in a cool, dry location that is not
exposed to direct sunlight.
• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Vacuumed toner may
cause a fire or explosion due to sparks or electrical contact inside the cleaner. However, it is
possible to use a cleaner designed to be dust explosion-proof. If toner is spilled over the floor,
sweep up spilled toner slowly and clean up any remaining toner with a wet cloth.
Handling the development unit cooling system
For the machines installed the development cooling system:

1. The development unit cooling system circulates propylene glycol from a sealed tank through hoses
that pass behind cooling plates on the sides of each development unit.
2. The coolant tank is located at the bottom of the cooling box on the back of the main machine.
3. Always obey local laws and regulations if you need to dispose of a tank or the propylene glycol
coolant.
4. The tank must never be emptied directly into a local drainage system, river, pond, or lake.
4
5. Contact a professional industrial waste disposal organization and ask them to dispose of the tank.
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and
laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
• Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this
manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING FOR LASER UNIT
WARNING:
Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams
can seriously damage your eyes.
Safety Instructions for the Color Controller
Fuse
The color controller uses a double pole fuse. If this fuse blows, be sure to replace it with an identical
fuse.
Batteries
1. Always replace a battery with the same type of battery prescribed for use with the color controller
unit. Replacing a battery with any type other than the one prescribed for use could cause an
explosion.
2. Never discard used batteries by mixing them with other batteries or other refuse.
5
3. Always remove used batteries from the work site and dispose of them in accordance with local
laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
6
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of the symbols and abbreviations are
as follows:
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Spring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed [A]
LEF Long Edge Feed [B]
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
1
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other countries.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows®10 Home
Microsoft® Windows®10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows®10 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows®10 Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
2
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks.........................................................................................................1
Trademarks..................................................................................................................................................... 1
1. Product Information
Product Overview.............................................................................................................................................17
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration............................................................................................18
Main Machine............................................................................................................................................. 18
Options......................................................................................................................................................... 19
Specifications....................................................................................................................................................22
2. Installation
Installation Requirements................................................................................................................................. 23
Environment.................................................................................................................................................. 23
Machine Level.............................................................................................................................................. 24
Minimum Space Requirements................................................................................................................... 24
Machine Dimensions................................................................................................................................... 25
Power Requirements.................................................................................................................................... 26
Main Machine Installation...............................................................................................................................27
Installation Flowchart...................................................................................................................................27
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................27
MP 501/601......................................................................................................................................27
SP 5300/5310.................................................................................................................................. 28
Installation Procedure.................................................................................................................................. 29
SMC Storage............................................................................................................................................... 30
Important Notice on Security Issues (MP 501/601 Only)......................................................................31
Settings According to the Service Contract............................................................................................... 36
Meter Click Charge............................................................................................................................ 36
Moving the Machine................................................................................................................................... 38
Transporting the Machine........................................................................................................................... 38
Caster Table Type M24 (D3C7-01)..............................................................................................................41
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................41
When installing with the paper feed unit...........................................................................................43
Paper Feed Unit PB1100 (D3C2-01, 02).....................................................................................................44
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................44
4
When installing with the caster table.................................................................................................44
Installing the optional paper feed unit on the caster table...............................................................45
When installing two or more optional paper feed units...................................................................51
Installing the main machine on the optional paper feed unit...........................................................56
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) (MP 501/601 Only)......................................... 62
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................62
NFC Card Reader Type M24 (D3CP-08) (MP 501/601 Only)............................................................... 71
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................71
Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09)..............................................................................89
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................89
Installation Procedure (MP 501/601)...................................................................................................... 90
After Installing the HDD....................................................................................................................109
Installation Procedure (SP 5300/5310)................................................................................................ 110
Hard Disk Drive Option Type P8 (M500-05) (SP 5300/5310 Only)....................................................128
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 128
Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................128
Internal Options............................................................................................................................................. 145
List of Slots..................................................................................................................................................145
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 (D3C0-17)................................................................................... 146
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 146
IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24 (M500-08)...................................................................................147
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 147
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D (D566-01) (MP 501/601 Only).......................................................... 148
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 148
USB Device Server Option Type M19 (D3BC-28, 29).............................................................................149
5
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 149
Interface Board................................................................................................................................. 150
What Do the LED Indicators Mean?............................................................................................... 153
Notes for Energy Save Mode Setting............................................................................................. 154
IP Address Setting............................................................................................................................. 154
Check All Connections..................................................................................................................... 156
File Format Converter Type M19 (D3BR-04) (MP 501/601 Only)........................................................157
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 157
Extended USB Board Type M19 (D3BS-01)..............................................................................................158
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 158
SD Card Options........................................................................................................................................... 159
SD Card Slots............................................................................................................................................ 159
SD Card Appli Move.................................................................................................................................... 160
Overview....................................................................................................................................................160
SD Card Appli Move................................................................................................................................ 160
Move Exec................................................................................................................................................. 160
Undo Exec..................................................................................................................................................161
OCR Unit Type M13 (D3AC-23, 24, 25) (MP 501/601 Only).............................................................163
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 163
Recovery Procedure.................................................................................................................................. 167
XPS Direct Print Option Type M24 (D3CP-12)...........................................................................................169
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 169
IPDS Unit Type M24 (M500-02, 03, 04).................................................................................................. 170
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 170
VM CARD Type P8 (M500-09, 10, 11) (SP 5300/5310 Only)............................................................171
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 171
6
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03) (MP 501/601 Only)..............................................172
Overview....................................................................................................................................................172
Accessory Check....................................................................................................................................... 172
Before You Begin the Procedure.............................................................................................................. 173
Seal Check and Removal.................................................................................................................173
Configuring "Auto Erase Memory" (Performed by the Customer).........................................................178
Security Setting.............................................................................................................................................. 180
Security Function Installation.................................................................................................................... 180
Data Overwrite Security (MP 501/601)............................................................................................... 181
Before You Begin the Procedure..................................................................................................... 181
Using Auto Erase Memory...............................................................................................................181
Data Overwrite Security (SP 5300/5310)............................................................................................ 183
Before You Begin the Procedure..................................................................................................... 183
Using Auto Erase Memory...............................................................................................................184
Checking the Auto Erase Memory Status....................................................................................... 184
HDD Encryption (MP 501/601).............................................................................................................184
Before You Begin the Procedure:.................................................................................................... 184
Enable Encryption Setting................................................................................................................ 185
Backing Up the Encryption Key....................................................................................................... 187
Encryption Key Restoration.............................................................................................................. 188
HDD Encryption (SP 5300/5310)......................................................................................................... 190
Before You Begin the Procedure:.................................................................................................... 190
Enable Encryption Setting................................................................................................................ 191
Backing Up the Encryption Key....................................................................................................... 192
Encryption Key Restoration.............................................................................................................. 192
@Remote Settings...........................................................................................................................................195
Operation Guidance for Users.....................................................................................................................199
3. Preventive Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Tables....................................................................................................................201
Yield Parts Settings.........................................................................................................................................202
Yield Parts Replacement Procedure......................................................................................................... 202
After installing the new yield parts.................................................................................................. 202
7
Operation check...............................................................................................................................203
4. Replacement and Adjustment
Notes on the Main Power Switch.................................................................................................................205
Push Switch................................................................................................................................................ 205
Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch).............................................................................. 205
Shutdown Method............................................................................................................................ 206
Forced Shutdown..............................................................................................................................207
Beforehand.....................................................................................................................................................208
Special Tools..................................................................................................................................................209
Image Adjustment.......................................................................................................................................... 210
Printing........................................................................................................................................................210
Registration: Leading Edge/Side-to-Side.......................................................................................210
Blank Margin.................................................................................................................................... 211
Main Scan Magnification................................................................................................................ 212
Scanning (MP 501/601 Only)...............................................................................................................213
Registration: Platen Mode................................................................................................................213
ARDF Image Adjustment (MP 501/601 Only)......................................................................................214
Registration........................................................................................................................................214
Factory SP Settings........................................................................................................................................ 215
MP 501/601............................................................................................................................................215
SP 5300/5310........................................................................................................................................ 217
Exterior Covers (MP 501/601)...................................................................................................................219
Scanner Front Cover................................................................................................................................. 219
Front Cover................................................................................................................................................ 220
Right Upper Cover.................................................................................................................................... 226
Right Lower Cover..................................................................................................................................... 227
Left Upper Cover....................................................................................................................................... 232
Left Middle Cover......................................................................................................................................234
Left Lower Cover........................................................................................................................................235
Left Rear Cover.......................................................................................................................................... 237
Rear Upper Cover..................................................................................................................................... 238
Rear Middle Cover....................................................................................................................................241
Rear Lower Cover......................................................................................................................................243
8
Rear Center Stay....................................................................................................................................... 244
Rear Left Stay............................................................................................................................................. 245
Paper Exit Cover........................................................................................................................................246
Paper Exit Tray...........................................................................................................................................248
Controller Cover........................................................................................................................................254
Exterior Covers (SP 5300/5310)............................................................................................................... 256
Upper Cover.............................................................................................................................................. 256
Front Cover................................................................................................................................................ 260
Right Cover................................................................................................................................................ 264
Left Upper Cover....................................................................................................................................... 268
Left Lower Cover........................................................................................................................................270
Left Rear Cover.......................................................................................................................................... 272
Rear Upper Cover..................................................................................................................................... 273
Rear Middle Cover....................................................................................................................................276
Rear Lower Cover......................................................................................................................................278
Controller Cover........................................................................................................................................279
Operation Panel (MP 501/601).................................................................................................................281
Operation Panel........................................................................................................................................ 281
Before Installing the New Operation Panel....................................................................................286
Internal Parts.............................................................................................................................................. 287
Operation Panel (SP 5300/5310)............................................................................................................. 288
Operation Panel........................................................................................................................................ 288
OPU Board................................................................................................................................................ 289
Scanner Unit (MP 501/601 Only)............................................................................................................. 290
Scanner Unit.............................................................................................................................................. 290
Scanner Carriage......................................................................................................................................292
Laser Unit (MP 501/601)............................................................................................................................ 297
Caution Decal Location............................................................................................................................ 297
Laser Unit....................................................................................................................................................297
Laser Unit (SP 5300/5310).........................................................................................................................300
Caution Decal Location............................................................................................................................ 300
Laser Unit....................................................................................................................................................300
Development Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 303
9
Development Unit...................................................................................................................................... 303
Drum Unit........................................................................................................................................................306
Drum Unit................................................................................................................................................... 306
Charge Roller.............................................................................................................................................307
Transfer Unit................................................................................................................................................... 310
Transfer Roller............................................................................................................................................310
Discharge Plate Unit..................................................................................................................................312
Fusing Unit...................................................................................................................................................... 314
Fusing Unit..................................................................................................................................................314
Paper Exit Unit (MP 501/601)....................................................................................................................319
Paper Exit Unit........................................................................................................................................... 319
Paper Exit Unit (SP 5300/5310)................................................................................................................ 324
Paper Exit Unit........................................................................................................................................... 324
Paper Feed Unit............................................................................................................................................. 329
Paper Feed Roller, Pickup Roller.............................................................................................................. 329
Separation Roller.......................................................................................................................................331
Bypass Tray Unit............................................................................................................................................ 333
Bypass Paper Feed Roller.........................................................................................................................333
Duplex Unit.....................................................................................................................................................335
Duplex unit................................................................................................................................................. 335
Drive Unit........................................................................................................................................................344
Paper Feed Motor..................................................................................................................................... 344
Main Drive Unit......................................................................................................................................... 346
Main Motor.......................................................................................................................................348
Drum Motor.......................................................................................................................................349
Electrical Components...................................................................................................................................350
Controller Box............................................................................................................................................350
Controller Box (MP 501/601)....................................................................................................... 350
Controller Box (SP 5300/5310)....................................................................................................354
Controller Board........................................................................................................................................357
Controller Board (MP 501/601)................................................................................................... 357
Controller Board (SP 5300/5310)................................................................................................361
NVRAM on the controller board.....................................................................................................364
10
BiCU........................................................................................................................................................... 367
Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BiCU............................................................................ 369
IOB............................................................................................................................................................. 370
IOB (MP 501/601).........................................................................................................................370
IOB (SP 5300/5310)..................................................................................................................... 371
Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the IOB.............................................................................. 373
Connect-Left PCB.......................................................................................................................................374
Fusing Thermistor Connection PCB.......................................................................................................... 376
Power Pack................................................................................................................................................ 377
PSU............................................................................................................................................................. 378
HDD (MP 501/601 Only)...................................................................................................................... 381
Adjustment after Replacement......................................................................................................... 382
Fans.................................................................................................................................................................383
PSU Fan......................................................................................................................................................383
Direction of Installing the Fans..................................................................................................................384
ARDF (MP 501/601 Only)..........................................................................................................................385
ARDF Unit...................................................................................................................................................385
ARDF Paper Feed Roller, ARDF Pickup Roller.........................................................................................387
ARDF Friction Pad......................................................................................................................................388
ARDF Inverter Motor................................................................................................................................. 389
ARDF Paper Feed Motor, ARDF Paper Transport Motor....................................................................... 390
Paper Feed Unit (Paper Feed Unit PB1100)............................................................................................... 395
Paper Feed Roller, Pickup Roller.............................................................................................................. 395
Separation Roller.......................................................................................................................................396
Main Board................................................................................................................................................398
Drive Unit................................................................................................................................................... 399
5. System Maintenance
Service Program Mode................................................................................................................................. 403
SP Tables....................................................................................................................................................403
Firmware Update...........................................................................................................................................404
Overview....................................................................................................................................................404
Firmware Type........................................................................................................................................... 404
Procedure...................................................................................................................................................406
11
Update procedure (MP 501/601)................................................................................................ 406
Update procedure (SP 5300/5310).............................................................................................410
Error Screens During Updating................................................................................................................ 412
RFU Updating the Firmware..........................................................................................................................418
RFU Performable Condition......................................................................................................................418
Package Firmware Update (MP 501/601 Only)......................................................................................419
Overview....................................................................................................................................................419
Immediate Update.....................................................................................................................................420
Update at the Next Visit (Reserve)........................................................................................................... 423
How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (RESERVE).............................................. 423
How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE..........................................................426
How to Install Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE....................................................................427
Update via SD card.................................................................................................................................. 430
Updating JavaVM..........................................................................................................................................433
MP 501/601............................................................................................................................................433
Creating an SD Card for Updating.................................................................................................433
Updating Procedure......................................................................................................................... 433
List of Error Messages.......................................................................................................................434
SP 5300/5310........................................................................................................................................ 436
Deactivating SDK Applications....................................................................................................... 436
Updating JavaVM............................................................................................................................ 437
Activating SDK Applications............................................................................................................438
Capturing the Debug Logs............................................................................................................................ 439
Overview....................................................................................................................................................439
Security of the Operation Log..........................................................................................................441
Retrieving the Debug Logs........................................................................................................................ 441
Procedure for Retrieving the Debug Log.........................................................................................441
NVRAM Data Upload/Download.............................................................................................................. 444
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card....................................................................................... 444
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM.................................................................................................... 445
UP/SP Data Import/Export.......................................................................................................................... 447
Overview....................................................................................................................................................447
Import/export conditions.................................................................................................................447
12
UP Data Import/Export (MP 501/601).................................................................................................447
Data that can be imported and exported.......................................................................................447
Data that cannot be imported or exported.....................................................................................447
Exporting Device Information.......................................................................................................... 448
Importing Device Information.......................................................................................................... 449
UP Data Import/Export (SP 5300/5310)............................................................................................. 450
Data that cannot be imported or exported.....................................................................................451
SP Data Import/Export (MP 501/601)................................................................................................. 453
SP Data Import/Export (SP 5300/5310)..............................................................................................456
Possible solutions for import/export problems....................................................................................... 457
Address Book Upload/Download.............................................................................................................. 460
Information List...........................................................................................................................................460
Download.................................................................................................................................................. 461
Upload....................................................................................................................................................... 462
SMC List Card Save Function....................................................................................................................... 464
Overview....................................................................................................................................................464
SMC List Card Save......................................................................................................................... 464
Procedure...................................................................................................................................................464
MP 501/601................................................................................................................................... 464
SP 5300/5310................................................................................................................................466
File Names of the Saved SMC Lists......................................................................................................... 468
Error Messages..........................................................................................................................................469
Test Pattern Printing........................................................................................................................................470
MP 501/601............................................................................................................................................470
13
SP 5300/5310........................................................................................................................................ 471
6. Troubleshooting
Self-Diagnostic Mode................................................................................................................................... 473
Service Call Codes....................................................................................................................................473
Service Call Conditions ...................................................................................................................473
SC Logging................................................................................................................................................ 474
SC Automatic Reboot (MP 501/601)....................................................................................................474
Service Call 101-195...................................................................................................................................477
SC100 (Engine: Scanning) (MP 501/601 Only)................................................................................. 477
SC100 (Engine: Others)........................................................................................................................... 486
Service Call 202-270...................................................................................................................................487
SC200 (Engine: Image Writing).............................................................................................................. 487
Service Call 303-396...................................................................................................................................489
SC300 (Engine: Imaging 1: Charge, Development)............................................................................. 489
SC300 (Engine: Imaging 2: Around the Drum)......................................................................................491
Service Call 490-491...................................................................................................................................493
SC400 (Engine: Imaging 3: Around the Drum)......................................................................................493
Service Call 501-582...................................................................................................................................497
SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport 1: Paper Feed, Duplex, Transport).................................................. 497
SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport 2: Fusing, Others)..............................................................................507
SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport 3: Paper Feed, Duplex, Transport, Fusing)..................................... 521
Service Call 622-691...................................................................................................................................522
SC600 (Engine: Communication and Others)........................................................................................522
SC600 (Controller)................................................................................................................................... 531
Service Call 700............................................................................................................................................536
SC700 (Engine: Peripherals) (MP 501/601 Only).............................................................................. 536
Service Call 816-899...................................................................................................................................538
SC800 (Controller)................................................................................................................................... 538
Service Call 900-998...................................................................................................................................566
SC900 (Engine: Others)........................................................................................................................... 566
SC900 (Controller)................................................................................................................................... 568
Jam Detection.................................................................................................................................................572
Paper Jam Display.....................................................................................................................................572
14
Jam Codes and Display Codes................................................................................................................572
Sensor Layout............................................................................................................................................ 580
MP 501/601................................................................................................................................... 580
SP 5300/5310................................................................................................................................582
Paper Size Codes......................................................................................................................................583
Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................................................................................585
Image Quality............................................................................................................................................585
Skewed image.................................................................................................................................. 585
Toner sticking to the right side area on the second side of the paper.......................................... 585
Image quality failure due to the fixing failure.................................................................................587
Toner scattered................................................................................................................................. 588
Paper Transport......................................................................................................................................... 592
Paper jam occurred in the paper path between Tray 1 and around the registration roller....... 592
Paper jam (J001) occurred after removing the jammed paper from the registration section.... 594
Non-feed jam in ARDF (MP 501/601 Only)................................................................................596
Others.........................................................................................................................................................596
Troubles that can be improved by executing drum refresh mode................................................ 596
Problem at regular intervals............................................................................................................. 597
SC670 (engine start up error) is displayed....................................................................................598
7. Detailed Descriptions
Product Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 601
Component Layout / Paper Path............................................................................................................. 601
Parts Layout................................................................................................................................................604
Switches and sensors........................................................................................................................604
Drive unit, Fans..................................................................................................................................607
Electrical Components......................................................................................................................609
Others................................................................................................................................................ 612
Scanner Unit (MP 501/601 Only)............................................................................................................. 615
Laser Unit........................................................................................................................................................ 617
Development Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 619
Drum Unit........................................................................................................................................................621
Drum........................................................................................................................................................... 621
Cleaning Unit............................................................................................................................................. 622
15
Transfer Unit................................................................................................................................................... 624
Fusing Unit...................................................................................................................................................... 626
Paper Exit Unit................................................................................................................................................628
Duplex Unit.....................................................................................................................................................630
Paper Feed Unit............................................................................................................................................. 632
Bypass Tray Unit............................................................................................................................................ 634
ARDF (MP 501/601 Only)..........................................................................................................................636
Original Feed Section............................................................................................................................... 636
Original Transport Section and Exit Section........................................................................................... 637
Energy Save................................................................................................................................................... 639
Energy Saver Modes................................................................................................................................ 639
Timer Settings.................................................................................................................................... 639
Return to Stand-by Mode.................................................................................................................639
Recommendation.............................................................................................................................. 640
Energy Save Effectiveness................................................................................................................640
16
Product Overview
See page 601 "Detailed Descriptions" for the following information:
• Component Layout/Paper Path
• Parts Layout
17
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

Main Machine
No. Item Machine Code
D255-17 (NA)
MP 501SPF D255-27 (EU)
D255-29 (AP)
1
D256-17 (NA)
MP 601SPF D256-27 (EU)
D256-29 (AP)
M281-17 (NA)
M281-27 (EU)
SP 5300DN
M281-29 (AP)
M281-21 (CHN)
2
M282-17 (NA)
M282-27 (EU)
SP 5310DN
M282-29 (AP)
M282-21 (CHN)
18
Options
No. Item Machine Code MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310
D3C2-01
1 Paper Feed Unit PB1100 *1 (NA/EU/AP) Yes Yes
D3C2-02 (CH)
2 Caster Table Type M24 D3C7-01 Yes Yes
D3AC-23 (NA)
- OCR Unit Type M13 D3AC-24 (EU) Yes No
D3AC-25 (AP)
M500-02 (NA)
M500-03 (EU)
- IPDS Unit Type M24 Yes Yes
M500-04 (AP/
CHN)
XPS Direct Print Option Type

- D3CP-12 Yes Yes
M24
19
No. Item Machine Code MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310
M500-09 (NA)
M500-10 (EU)
- VM CARD Type P8 No Yes
M500-11 (AP/
CHN)
D3BC-28 (NA)
USB Device Server Option Type
- D3BC-29 Yes Yes
M19
(EU/AP)
- Extended USB Board Type M19 D3BS-01 Yes Yes
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type

- D3C0-17 Yes Yes
M19
IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type

- M500-08 Yes Yes
M24
- Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D D566-01 Yes No
- File Format Converter Type M19 D3BR-04 Yes No
Enhanced Security HDD Option

- D792-09 Yes Yes
Type M10
- Hard Disk Drive Option Type P8 M500-05 No Yes
- NFC Card Reader Type M24 D3CP-08 Yes No
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type

- D3BS-03 Yes No
M19
Optional Counter Interface Unit

- B870-21 Yes No
Type M12
D3CP-05 (NA)
- Fax Connection Unit Type M24 D3CP-06 (EU) Yes No
D3CP-07 (AP)
*1 You can attach up to four paper feed units.
20
• The following options are installed by the end user. For instructions on installing these options,
please refer to the operating instructions "About This Machine" for MP 501/601, "Operating
Instruction" for SP 5300/5310.
• Paper Feed Unit PB1100
• Caster Table Type M24
• IPDS Unit Type M24
• XPS Direct Print Option Type M24
• VM CARD Type P8
• USB Device Server Option Type M19
• Extended USB Board Type M19
• IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19
• IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24
• Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D
• File Format Converter Type M19
• Service installation is required for installing Paper Feed Unit PB1100 with Caster Table Type M24
depending on the machine configuration. For details, please refer to page 44 "Paper Feed Unit
PB1100 (D3C2-01, 02)".
21
Specifications
See "Appendices" for the following information:
• General Specifications
• Supported Paper Sizes
• Software Accessories
• Optional Equipment
22
2. Installation
Installation Requirements
Environment
Optimum Environmental Conditions

Permissible and recommended temperature and humidity ranges are as follows:
• White area: permissible range

• Blue area: recommended range
Service Environmental Conditions
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
• Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)
(But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
• Humidity: 15 to 80%
(But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5 °F (32.5 °C).)
Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the
machine at a temperature around 59 to 77 °F or less (15 to 25 °C), and humidity around 30 to
70%.
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
• Avoid locations with vibrations.
• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
23
2. Installation
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.

• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor material is delicate, when the machine is moved after installation, the casters may
damage the floor.
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's
health. If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or
when making an extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain
the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
Machine Level
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Minimum Space Requirements
Place the machine near the power source, and provide clearance as shown:
1. Rear: Over 300 mm (11.9")

2. Right: Over 200 mm (7.9")
3. Front: Over 500 mm (19.7")
4. Left: Over 300 mm (11.9")
• The 500 mm clearance for the front is only for pulling out the paper tray. If an operator stands in
front of the machine, more space is required.
24
Installation Requirements
Machine Dimensions
MP 501/601
W×D×H (including ARDF and operation panel): 475 × 504 × 645 mm (18.8" × 19.9" × 25.4")
• [A]: 475 mm (18.8")

• [B]: 645 mm (25.4")
SP 5300/5310
W×D×H: 420 × 410 × 345 mm (16.6" × 16.2" × 13.6")
• [A]: 420 mm (16.6")

• [B]: 345 mm (13.6")
25
2. Installation
Power Requirements
• Make sure that the wall outlet is near the machine and easily accessible.
• Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Be sure to ground the machine.
Input voltage
• NA: 120 to 127 V, 6A, 60 Hz ± 2%
• EU/AP/CHN: 220 to 240 V, 6A, 50 Hz ± 2%/60 Hz ± 2%
For users in Norway, this product is also designed for an IT power distribution system with phase-
to-phase voltage of 230V.
26
Main Machine Installation

Installation Flowchart
Accessory Check
MP 501/601
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Q’ty
No. Description
NA EU AP
1 NFC tag 1 1 1
2 BLE decal 1 1 1
27
2. Installation
Q’ty
No. Description
NA EU AP
3 Power cord 1 1 1
4 Starter toner 1 1 1
5 Telephone cable with ferrite core 1 - -
6 Ferrite core - 1 1
7 CD-ROM: Drivers 1 1 1
8 CD-ROM: OI - 1 -
9 Manual: Read This First 1 1 -
10 Sheet: Quick Installation Guide 1 1 -
11 Manual: Initial Guide for FAX 1 1 -
12 Guarantee sheet 1 - -
13 Manual: Start Guide 1 - 1
14 Caution Sheet: Operation panel 1 1 1
15 Caution Sheet: NFC tag 2 2 2
16 Sheet: Security 1 1 1
17 Sheet: EULA (End User License Agreement) 1 1 1
18 Seal: Caution 1 1 1
19 Sheet: Safety Information - - 1
20 Sheet: User Registration 1 - -
21 Sheet: Help Desk Card 1 - -
22 Sheet: TRCU - - 1
SP 5300/5310
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
28
Q’ty
No. Description
NA EU AP CHN
1 Decal: Paper grade 1 - - -
2 Sheet: Safety Information - 1 - -
3 Power cord 1 1 1 1
4 Starter toner 1 1 1 1
5 CD-ROM: Drivers 1 1 1 1
6 CD-ROM: OI - - 1 -
7 Manual: Read This First 1 1 1 1
8 Sheet: Quick Installation Guide 1 2 1 1
9 Sheet: Eco Night 1 1 1 1
10 Guarantee sheet 1 - - -
11 Sheet: Control panel 1 1 1 -
12 Sheet: Security 1 1 1 1
13 Guarantee sheet (Chinese) - - - 1
14 Sheet: User Registration 1 - - -
15 Sheet: Help Desk Card 1 - - -
16 Sheet: EULA (End User License Agreement) 1 1 1 1
17 Seal: Caution 1 1 1 1
18 Sheet: TRCU - 1 - -
Installation Procedure
This machine is installed by the end user.

For instructions on unpacking and installing the machine, please refer to the operating instructions
"Quick Installation Guide".
RTB 25
Important note about installation
29
2. Installation
SMC Storage
The SMC report provided with the machine needs to be stored with the machine.
The factory SP settings are recorded in the SMC report. This report may be required after replacing the
NVRAMs to set the SP settings to factory default.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray [A].

2. Take out the SMC report [B].
3. Fold the SMC report into a small size as shown below.
30
4. Store the SMC report in the storage space [A] inside the paper feed tray.
Important Notice on Security Issues (MP 501/601 Only)
In order to increase the security of the MFP, and to ensure that the customer sets the administrator
password, an administrator set/change prompt display appears at the first power-up.
Overview
The following Program/Change Administrator screen appears at the first power-up.
31
2. Installation
When the customers sets the administrator/supervisor login password, the screen disappears and the
home display appears. The customer, however, can make this screen disappear with the following
procedure if there is no need to set the password.
1. On the Program/Change Administrator screen, press [Change] next to Supervisor and

then press [OK] without entering any password.
2. Press [OK] again when the Confirm password display appears.
3. For Administrator 1, perform the same procedure as steps 1 and 2.
4. Press [OK].
The home display appears.
5. Turn OFF/ON the main power.
SP5-755-002 hides the administrator password input screen temporarily and continue the installation
procedure without setting an administrator password. However, the Program/Change Administrator
screen will appear every time you turn OFF/ON the main power, if the password is not set.
Password Setting Procedure
• For more details about this security issue, see "Notes on Using Multi-Function Printers Safely"
supplied with the MFP.
• When Supervisor / Administrator 1-4 passwords are configured via network, the "Change
Supervisor login password" window will not be displayed.
• The passwords for Supervisor or Administrator 1 to 4 can be set via "System Settings". However,
the Program/Change Administrator screen will appear every time the main power is turned ON if
the passwords are set this way. We recommend that customers set the passwords via network or
the Program/Change Administrator screen.
1. Install the MFP.

2. Turn ON the main power.
32
3. Change the Supervisor login password.
4. Enter a password.
5. Press [OK].
33
2. Installation
6. Confirm the password.
7. Press [OK].
34
8. Change the Administrator 1 login password.
9. Enter the password.
10. Press [OK].
35
2. Installation
11. Confirm the password.
12. Press [OK].
Settings According to the Service Contract
Change the necessary settings depending on the customer's service contract.
Meter Click Charge
There are two ways to set up this function.
36
• Meter click charge enabled (SP5-930-001 set to "1 (enabled)"; this is the default setting): The
counter can be displayed and printed by the customer. The service representative can then call the
customer and ask for the counter.
• Meter click charge disabled (SP5-930-001 set to "0 (disabled)"): The counter cannot be displayed
or printed by the customer. To check the counter, the service representative must print the SMC
report (SP 5-990).
Item SP No. Function Default
Enables or disables Meter Click Charge.

When enabled:
• The counter menu shows immediately
after you push the "Menu" key.
In MP 501/601, "Counter Method"
SP5-930-00
Meter Click Charge (SP5-045-001) sets the type of the 1: ON
1
counter.
• You can print the counter from the
counter menu.
When disabled:
• The counter menu does not show.
Enables or disables the PM alert for the

maintenance kit.
Meter Click Charge: SP5-931-00 1: No
1 * This setting is unnecessary with this alert
Maintenance Kit
machine since this machine does not have
the maintenance kit.
Specifies the counter display method.

• 1: 1 counter mode
Counter Method 1: 1
SP5-045-00 Displays only the total counter.
counter
(MP 501/601 Only) 1 • 2: 2 counter mode mode
Displays the total counter and the print
counter.
-001: shows or sets the telephone number

of the service representative.
Service Tel: Telephone/ SP5-812-00 -002: shows or sets the fax number of the
-
Facsimile 1, -002 service station. This number is displayed on
the error message screen when an SC
occurs.
37
2. Installation
Moving the Machine
This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the
section "Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer distance.
• Turn OFF the main power and pull out the power plug.
• Close all the covers and trays.
• Remove peripherals physically attached to the main machine: paper feed unit.
• Keep the machine horizontal and move it slowly. Tipping or excessive vibrations may damage the
machine.
Transporting the Machine
1. Open the front cover.

MP 501/601: Push the button [A] and open the front cover [B].
SP 5300/5310: Open the upper cover [A], and then open the front cover [B].
38
2. Release the lock lever [A] by rotating it towards you, and then remove the toner cartridge
[B].
This prevents toner leakage caused by vibration during transport.
3. Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with
a sheet of paper and tape.
4. If Caster Table Type M24 is installed, remove the four stands [A].
Front/left side
39
2. Installation
Rear/right side
5. Lift the machine, and then move it horizontally to the new location.
6. If you have removed the stands for Caster Table Type M24, reattach them.
40
Caster Table Type M24 (D3C7-01)

Accessory Check
No. Description Q’ty
1 Stands 4
2 Caster table 1
- Manual: Installation Guide 1
- RoHS sheet 1
- RoHS decal 1
• The joint brackets and screws [A] for installation are stored in the accessory box [B] on the
underside of the caster table.
41
2. Installation
• The following items are stored in the accessory box.
1 Joint bracket A 2
2 Joint bracket B 1
3 Joint bracket C 4
4 Joint bracket D 4
5 Joint bracket E 4
6 Screws: polished round/spring (M4×10) 8
7 Hexagon flange screws (M4×8) 3
8 Tapping bind screws (3×8) 4
9 Screws (M3×6) 8
42
For instructions on unpacking and installing the Caster Table Type M24, please refer to the operating
instructions "About This Machine" for MP 501/601, or "Operating Instructions" for SP 5300/5310.
When installing with the paper feed unit
Installation by service representative may be required when installing Caster Table Type M24 with
Paper Feed Unit PB1100, depending on the machine configuration.
MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310
Machine Printer only, or
Configuration With 1 to 4 PFU With 2 to 4 PFU
Printer only with 1 PFU
PB1100 PB1100
PB1100
Who can install Service Service

End user End user
the caster table representative*1 representative*1
*1 The attaching stands and connecting parts need to be installed to prevent the machine from falling
over. If it falls or topples over, an injury might occur. For instructions on installing Paper Feed Unit
PB1100 and Caster Table Type M24, please refer to page 44 "Installation Procedure".
43
2. Installation
Paper Feed Unit PB1100 (D3C2-01, 02)

Accessory Check
1 Paper feed unit 1
- Manual: Installation Guide 1
- EMC address decal (NA/EU/AP only) 1
For instructions on unpacking and installing Paper Feed Unit PB1100, please refer to the operating
instructions "About This Machine" for MP 501/601, or "Operating Instructions" for SP 5300/5310.
When installing with the caster table
Installation by service representative may be required when installing Paper Feed Unit PB1100 with
Caster Table Type M24, depending on the machine configuration.
44
MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310
Machine Printer only, or
Configuration With 1 to 4 PFU With 2 to 4 PFU
Printer only with 1 PFU
PB1100 PB1100
PB1100
Who can install Service Service

End user End user
the caster table representative*1 representative*1
*1 The attaching stands and connecting parts need to be installed to prevent the machine from falling
over. If it falls or topples over, an injury might occur. For instructions on installing Paper Feed Unit
PB1100 and Caster Table Type M24, please refer to the procedure described in this section.
Installing the optional paper feed unit on the caster table
• Turn OFF the main power, and unplug the machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
• You need two or more persons to lift the main machine. The main machine is highly unstable when
it is lifted by one person, and may cause injury or property damage.
• Be sure to hold the specified positions when lifting the machine.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray [A] of the optional paper feed unit.
2. Remove all tape and retainers.
45
2. Installation
3. Turn over the caster table, and then remove the accessory bracket [A].
4. Remove the package [A] (which contains joints, brackets, and screws) from the accessory
bracket.
5. Check the following items in the package.
46
1 Joint bracket A 2
2 Joint bracket B 1
3 Joint bracket C 4
4 Joint bracket D 4
5 Joint bracket E 4
6 Screws: polished round/spring (M4×10) 8
7 Hexagon flange screws (M4×8) 3
8 Tapping bind screws (3×8) 4
9 Screws (M3×6) 8
6. Install the accessory bracket on the caster table.

Use the screws removed in Step 3.
47
2. Installation
7. Install the optional paper feed unit [A] on the caster table [B].
• There are two upright pins [A] on the caster table. Align them with the holes in the underside of
the optional paper feed unit.
• The hole [A] in the caster table indicates the front side of the caster table.
48
8. Open the rear cover [A] of the optional paper feed unit.
9. Install the joint bracket A [A] on the rear side with the hexagon flange screw (M4×8).
49
2. Installation
10. Install the joint bracket A [A] on the rear side with the hexagon flange screw (M4×8).
11. Close the rear cover of the optional paper feed unit.
12. Remove the paper feed tray [A] by pulling it out.
50
13. Install the joint bracket B [A] on the front side with the hexagon flange screw (M4×8).
• When you install two or more optional paper feed units, please refer to page 51 "When
installing two or more optional paper feed units".
• When you install only one optional paper feed unit, please refer to page 56.
When installing two or more optional paper feed units
1. Install the optional paper feed unit [A] on the lower paper feed unit [B].
51
2. Installation
• There are two upright pins [A] on the optional paper feed unit. Align the upright pins of the
lower paper feed unit with the holes in the underside of the upper paper feed unit. Then
carefully lower the upper paper feed unit.
2. Open the rear cover [A] of the optional paper feed unit.
52
3. Install the joint bracket E [A] on the rear right side to secure the optional paper feed unit
and lower paper feed unit.
4. Open the rear cover [A] of the lower paper feed unit, and then secure the joint bracket
installed in the previous step with the screw (M3×6).
53
2. Installation
5. Install the joint bracket D [A] on the rear left side to secure the optional paper feed unit
and lower paper feed unit.
6. Open the rear cover [A] of the lower paper feed unit, and then secure the joint bracket
installed in the previous step with the screw (M3×6).
54
8. Install the joint bracket C [A] on the front side to secure the upper paper feed unit and
lower paper feed unit with the tapping bind screw (3×8).
9. If you install more optional paper feed units, repeat Steps 1 to 8.
55
2. Installation
Installing the main machine on the optional paper feed unit
1. Install the main machine [A] on the optional paper feed unit [B].
• There are two upright pins [A] on the optional paper feed unit. Align them with the holes in the
underside of the main machine, and then carefully lower the machine.
56
2. Open the rear lower cover [A] of the main machine.
3. Install the joint bracket E [A] on the rear right side to secure the main machine and paper
feed unit.
57
2. Installation
4. Open the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit, and then secure the joint bracket installed
in the previous step with the screw (M3×6).
5. Install the joint bracket D [A] on the rear left side to secure the main machine and paper
feed unit.
58
6. Open the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit, and then secure the joint bracket installed
in the previous step with the screw (M3×6).
7. Remove the paper feed tray [A] of the main machine by pulling it out.
59
2. Installation
8. Install the joint bracket C [A] on the front side to secure the main machine and optional
paper feed unit with the tapping bind screw (3×8).
9. Put back the paper feed trays.

10. Attach the two stands [A] provided with the caster table on the front and left sides with
the screws (polished round/spring (M4×10)).
60
11. Attach the two stands [A] provided with the caster table on the rear and right sides with
the screws (polished round/spring (M4×10)).
61
2. Installation
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12

(B870-21) (MP 501/601 Only)
Accessory Check
1 MKB board 1
2 Tapping screw: M3x6 4
3 Harness band 1
4 Stud 4
5 Harness clamp: LWS-0711 1
6 Harness 1
- EMC address decal 1
procedure.
62
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) (MP 501/601 Only)
1. Open the rear upper cover [A].
2. Insert a flathead screwdriver into [A] to release the hook on the inside of the controller
cover [B].
63
2. Installation
3. Release the hook by opening the right side of the cover, and then remove the cover [A]
by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow.
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the controller cover when you remove or
install the controller cover.
4. Insert a flathead screwdriver in the order of , , and to release the three hooks of
the rear left stay [A].
64
5. Remove the rear left stay [A].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear left stay when you remove or
install the rear left stay.
65
2. Installation
6. Push the button [A] and open the front cover [B].
7. Release the hook [A] of the right upper cover [B] by opening the cover in the direction of
the arrow.
66
8. Remove the right upper cover [A] by inserting a flathead screwdriver into [B].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right upper cover when you remove
or install the right upper cover.
9. Remove the bracket [A].
67
2. Installation
10. Install the four stud stays as shown below.
11. Install the optional counter interface board [A] on the four stud stays.
68
12. Connect the harness (13 pins) to CN3 [A] on the optional counter interface board and
CN112 [B] on the BiCU.
13. Fasten the harness with the clamp [A].

14. Bind the harness with the harness bind [B] as shown below.
69
2. Installation
15. Connect the harness from the optional counter device to CN4 [A] on the optional counter
interface board.
16. Remove the knockout [A] of the rear left stay [B] with a pair of nippers. Then pass the
harness which is connected to the optional counter interface in the previous step.
17. Reassemble the machine.
70
NFC Card Reader Type M24 (D3CP-08) (MP 501/601 Only)
NFC Card Reader Type M24 (D3CP-08) (MP

501/601 Only)
Accessory Check
1 NFC card reader 1
2 Upper cover 1
3 Base cover 1
4 Hoop and loop fastener 1
5 USB cable 1
6 Ferrite core 1
7 FG clamp 1
8 Tapping screw: 3×8 1
- EMC address decal 1
- Caution Sheet 1
- Caution Chart 1
71
2. Installation
procedure.
cover [B].
72
73
2. Installation
74
the arrow.
75
2. Installation
9. Insert a flathead screwdriver at [A] to release the hook of the scanner front cover [B].
76
10. Release the two hooks of the scanner front cover [A].
11. Insert a flathead screwdriver at [A] to release the hook, and then remove the scanner
front cover [B].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the scanner front cover when you remove
or install the scanner front cover.
77
2. Installation
12. Release the two hooks of the operation panel arm upper cover [A].
13. Insert a flathead screwdriver into [A] to release the hook, and then remove the operation
panel arm upper cover [B].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the operation panel arm upper cover
when you remove or install the operation panel arm upper cover.
78
14. Remove the hinge cover [A] from the operation panel. (hook×2)
15. Make a loop at the end of the USB cable [A], and then attach the ferrite core [B], as
shown below.
• Attach the ferrite core at a distance of 4.0 cm (1.6 inch) [A] from the end of USB cable.
79
2. Installation
16. Peel off the conductive tape [A] from the USB cable [B].
80
17. Insert the USB cable [A] into the media slot of the operation panel.
• Insert the end [A] of the USB cable, where the ferrite core is not attached, into the media slot
of the operation panel.
81
2. Installation
18. Route the USB cable [A] to the right side of the machine. (hook×2)
19. Secure the USB cable [A] with the clamp.
82
20. Remove the screw [A] from the operation panel arm.
21. Install the FG clamp [A] to the operation panel arm.
• When installing the FG clamp, bind the USB cable [B] with the FG clamp [A]. Make sure to
bind the part where the coating is stripped partially.
83
2. Installation
• When installing the FG clamp [A], use the screw provided with NFC Card Reader Type M24.
22. Attach the hook and loop fastener [A] to the base cover [B] at the position shown below.
23. Peel off the mount from the hook and loop fastener, and then attach the NFC card reader
[A] to the base cover [B] at the position shown below.
• Attach the NFC card reader with the USB port [A] of the NFC card reader set to face right.
84
24. Peel off the mount [A] of the seal from the back side [B] of the base cover.
85
2. Installation
25. Fit the notch part [A] of the base cover [B] into the right upper cover [C] of the main
machine, and then attach it.
26. Reattach the right upper cover [A] to the main machine.
• When attaching the right upper cover, pull out the USB cable [A] through the notch [B] in the
right upper cover.
86
27. Connect the USB cable [A] to the NFC card reader [B].
87
2. Installation
28. Attach the upper cover [A] to the base cover [B].
88
Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09)
Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10

(D792-09)
Accessory Check
1 Enhanced security HDD 1
- EMC address sheet 1
• The following parts are separately required when installing Enhanced Security HDD Option Type
M10 on SP 5300/5310 in which Hard Disk Drive Option Type P8 is not installed.
1 HDD bracket 1
2 Power source cable 1
3 Data cable 1
89
2. Installation
4 Stepped screw 4
5 Tapping screw 2
Installation Procedure (MP 501/601)
procedure.
90
cover [B].
91
2. Installation
92
the arrow.
93
2. Installation
94
10. Remove the power connector cover [A].
• When removing the power connector cover, pull it in the direction of the arrow.
• Be careful not to damage the hook on the power connector cover when you remove or install
the power connector cover.
95
2. Installation
11. Remove the four screws from the right lower cover [A].
12. Close the rear upper cover [A].
96
13. Open the rear lower cover [A], and then release the hook of the right lower cover [B] by
rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow.
14. Release the hooks [A] and [B].
97
2. Installation
15. Remove the right lower cover [A] by rotating it in the direction of the arrow.
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right lower cover when you remove or
install the right lower cover.
• Do not remove the screw [A] when removing the right lower cover [B].
98
17. Disconnect the USB connector [A] of the operation panel.
99
2. Installation
18. Disconnect the two flat cables and two connectors.
• Make sure to open the flap before disconnecting the flat cable [A], as shown in the following
pictures. Otherwise, the connector may be damaged.
• When disconnecting the flat cable [A], pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
100
19. Release the flat cable and harness from the harness guides.
20. Remove the seven screws from the controller box [A].
• The screw [B] is a tapping screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the
controller box.
101
2. Installation
21. Release the hook [A], and then remove the controller box [B] by rotating it counter-
clockwise.
22. Disconnect the connector on the controller box [A].
102
23. Remove the fax unit [A].
24. Remove the cap [A].
103
2. Installation
25. Remove the slot cover [A].
26. Remove the controller box cover [A].
• The screw [B] is a small screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the
controller box cover.
104
27. Remove the controller board [A] with the BiCU [B].
• Be careful not to damage the backside of the controller board [A] and the BiCU [B].
28. Remove the HDD with the bracket [A] from the controller box [B]. (hook×2)
105
2. Installation
29. Remove the HDD [A] from the HDD bracket [B].
30. Disconnect the two cables [A] from the HDD [B].
31. Remove the enhanced security HDD from its protective pack.
106
32. Connect the two cables [A] to the enhanced security HDD [B].
33. Install the enhanced security HDD [A] on the HDD bracket [B].
• When installing the enhanced security HDD on the bracket, make sure to pass the cables
through the hole [A] of the HDD bracket.
107
2. Installation
34. Install the HDD with the bracket [A] on the controller box [B]. (hook×2)
• When reattaching the controller box [A], make sure to secure the harness and flat cable to the
harness guides, as shown below.
• When reattaching the bracket [A] of the controller box [B], do not interpose the harness and
the flat cable between the bracket and the controller box.
108
After Installing the HDD
1. Connect the power cord and turn ON the main power. A message prompts you to format
the hard disk.
2. Press [Format].
3. Wait for the machine to finish formatting the hard disk.
• Do not touch the power switch while the hard disk format is in progress. Wait for the machine
to tell you that the formatting is finished.
109
2. Installation
4. Turn the main power OFF/ON after a message tells you formatting is finished.
5. Enter the SP mode.
6. Execute SP5-853-001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk.
Follow the instructions on the screen. This will require three or four minutes.
7. Execute SP5-846-040 to copy the address book to the hard disk from the controller
RTB 31
board.
8. Execute SP5-846-041 to let the user have access to the address book.
9. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
Installation Procedure (SP 5300/5310)
procedure.
1. Open the upper cover [A].
110
2. Remove the two screws from the upper cover [A].
• The screw [B] is a sems screw. The screw [C] is a tapping screw. Be careful not use the wrong
screws when installing the upper cover.
3. Remove the screw from the rear side of the upper cover [A].
111
2. Installation
4. Lift the upper cover [A] by releasing the two hooks, and then put it on the mainframe so
that you can access the bracket [B] on the right side of the machine.
112
6. Disconnect the flat cable from the BiCU [A].
113
2. Installation
7. Remove the plastic sheet [A] from the mainframe (hook×2), and then remove the upper
cover [B].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the upper cover when you remove or
install the upper cover.
114
9. Open the front cover [A].
115
2. Installation
11. Remove the five screws from the right cover [A].
• The screw [B] is a tapping screw. The screw [C] is a long screw. Be careful not to use the
wrong screws when installing the right cover.
116
13. Open the rear lower cover [A], and then release the hook of the right cover [B] by
117
2. Installation
14. Release the four hooks, and then remove the right cover [A].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right cover when you remove or install
the right cover.
118
15. Disconnect the flat cable and two connectors.
119
2. Installation
• The screw [B] is a tapping screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing the
controller box.
120
18. Release the hook [A], and then remove the controller box [B].
19. Remove the cap [A] from the controller box [B].
121
2. Installation
122
23. Remove the enhanced security HDD from its protective pack.
123
2. Installation
24. Connect the power source cable [A] and data cable [B] to the enhanced security HDD [C].
25. Install the enhanced security HDD [A] on the HDD bracket [B] with the stepped screws.
• When installing the enhanced security HDD on the bracket, make sure to pass the cables
through the hole [A] of the HDD bracket.
124
26. Install the HDD with the bracket [A] on the controller box [B] with the tapping screws.
(hook×2)
• When reattaching the controller board [A] with the BiCU [B] on the controller box [C],
connect the two cables of the HDD to the controller board [A].
125
2. Installation
• When reattaching the bracket [A] of the controller box [B], do not interpose the harness and
the flat cable between the bracket and the controller box.
1. Connect the power cord and turn ON the main power.

The message "Hard Disk is replaced. Format Hard Disk." is displayed.
2. Select [Format]. The message "Formatting Hard Disk…Please wait, also make sure the
main power switch is not turned off." is displayed.
to tell you that the formatting is finished. When the formatting is finished, the message "Hard
Disk is formatted. Turn main power switch off then on" is displayed.
4. Turn the main power OFF/ON after the message tells you formatting is finished.
RTB 31
126
RTB 31 7. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
127
2. Installation
Hard Disk Drive Option Type P8 (M500-05)

(SP 5300/5310 Only)
Accessory Check
1 HDD 1
2 Power source cable 1
3 Data cable 1
4 Tapping screw: round point: 3×6 2
procedure.
• You need two or more persons to lift the main machine. The main machine is highly unstable when
it is lifted by one person, and may cause injury or property damage.
• Be sure to hold the specified positions when lifting the machine.
128
Hard Disk Drive Option Type P8 (M500-05) (SP 5300/5310 Only)
129
2. Installation
130
131
2. Installation
7. Remove the plastic sheet [A] from the mainframe (hook×2), and then remove the upper
cover [B].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the upper cover when you remove or
install the upper cover.
132
133
2. Installation
11. Remove the five screws from the right cover [A].
134
135
2. Installation
the right cover.
136
• Make sure to open the flap before disconnecting the flat cable [A] as shown in the following
137
2. Installation
controller box.
138
139
2. Installation
140
23. Connect the two cables [A] to the HDD [B].
• Make sure to pass the cables through the hole [A] of the HDD bracket.
141
2. Installation
24. Install the HDD [A] on the controller box [B] with the tapping screws. (hook×2)
• When reattaching the controller board [A] with the BiCU [B] on the controller box [C],
connect the two cables of the HDD to the controller board [A].
142
• When reattaching the bracket [A] of the controller box [B], do not interpose harness and flat
cable between bracket and controller box.
1. Connect the power cord and turn ON the main power.

The message "Hard Disk is replaced. Format Hard Disk." is displayed.
2. Select [Format]. The message "Formatting Hard Disk…Please wait, also make sure the
main power switch is not turned off." is displayed.
to tell you that the formatting is finished. When the formatting is finished, the message "Hard
Disk is formatted. Turn main power switch off then on" is displayed.
4. Turn the main power OFF/ON after the message tells you formatting is finished.
RTB 31
143
2. Installation
RTB 31 7. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
144
Internal Options
Internal Options
List of Slots
Slot Option
USB Device Server Option Type M19
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19
[A] I/F slot IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24
Extended USB Board Type M19
File Format Converter Type M19*2
[B] USB ports*1 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D*2
*1 There is no difference between the left and right USB ports.

*2 MP 501/601 only
145
2. Installation
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19

(D3C0-17)
Accessory Check
1 IEEE 1284 interface board 1
- FCC sheet 1
- RoHS sheet 1
- RoHS decal 1
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing, please
refer to the operating instructions "About This Machine" for MP 501/601, or "Operating Instructions"
for SP 5300/5310.
146
IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24 (M500-08)
IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24

(M500-08)
Accessory Check
1 IEEE 802.11 interface board 1
IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing, please
refer to the operating instructions "About This Machine" for MP 501/601, or "Operating Instructions"
for SP 5300/5310.
147
2. Installation
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D (D566-01) (MP

501/601 Only)
Accessory Check
1 Bluetooth interface unit 1
- CD-ROM 1
- Caution sheet 1
- Caution chart 1
- FCC sheet 1
- FCC DOC sheet 1
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing, please refer to
the operating instructions "About This Machine".
148
USB Device Server Option Type M19 (D3BC-28, 29)
USB Device Server Option Type M19

(D3BC-28, 29)
Accessory Check
1 USB cable 1
2 Interface board 1
3 Ferrite core 2
4 Cable ties 2
149
2. Installation
Interface Board
No. Item Description
1 Switch Use to reset to the factory settings.
2 Ethernet port Use to connect the Ethernet cable.
Use to connect this option to the main machine.

3 USB port
Do not use this port with other options.
• When you install this option to the main machine for the first time, the interface board must be
connected directly to your PC to set up the IP address and other network settings.
procedure.
1. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover [A] from the rear side of the machine.
150
2. Fully insert the interface board [A].
3. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.
4. Using the supplied USB cable [A], connect the USB device server to the machine.
151
2. Installation
5. Mount the ferrite cores on the Ethernet cable, while looping the cable at 3 cm (approx.
1.2 inch) [A] from the each end of the cable.
6. Only when installing this option in NA, fix each ferrite core with the cable tie [A].
152
7. Insert the Ethernet cable [A] into the Ethernet board on this option.
8. Insert the other end of the Ethernet cable to a PC for network setting.
9. Plug the power cord into the wall socket and turn ON the main power.
• Do not unplug the USB connector while the machine is recognizing this option. It may take
between 30 seconds to 1 minute to finish recognizing it (the LEDs by the connector light up
when finished; see below). If unplugged, connect the cable again.
What Do the LED Indicators Mean?
When this option is properly installed and recognized by the main machine, the LED indicators light up
under the following conditions.
No. LED Color Lights Up When:
1 Green and Yellow 1000BASE-T operates.
2 Green 10BASE-T operates.
153
2. Installation
No. LED Color Lights Up When:
3 Yellow 100BASE-TX operates.
Notes for Energy Save Mode Setting
If the machine which has this option enters the energy save mode, you cannot print because there will be
a communication error. Follow the instructions below to disable the energy save mode.
MP 501/601
1. Press the [User Tools] icon on the operation panel. RTB 22: Deleted
2. Press [Machine Features].

3. Press [Administrator Tools] in [System Settings].
4. Press [Energy Saver Mode to Disable Print Server].
5. Press [Disable Mode].
6. Press [OK].
SP 5300/5310
1. Select [System] -> Press [OK] on the controller panel.

2. Select [Engy Sv Md to Dsbl Prt Srv] -> Press [OK].
3. Select [Disable Mode] -> Press [OK].
IP Address Setting
This section describes how to set an IP address on this option manually. You can set an IP address which
is not only on the same network segment but also on a different network segment to share a single
machine with devices in multiple networks.
• You cannot change the IP address from the operation panel of the main machine. The setting must
be done from a web browser on your PC.
• The network setting of this option is initially assigned as follows: IP address: 192.168.100.100 /
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• The network setting of your PC must be in the same network segment in order to change the
network setting of this option.
1. Make a note of the current network settings of your PC.

2. Change the IP address on your PC to [192.168.100.xxx (*0 - 255)].
3. Change the subnet mask on your PC to [255.255.255.0].
154
4. Open a web browser.

5. Type [http://192.168.100.100/] in the address bar.
6. Press the "Enter" key.
• The setting screen for this option appears.

7. Click [Network Setting].
8. Enter "root" in the user name textbox and click [OK].

9. Input [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Default Gateway].
10. Set other items if necessary.

11. Click [Set].
12. Close the web browser.
13. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the PC.
14. Connect the Ethernet cable to a network device (for example, switching hub).
155
2. Installation
15. Set the IP address of this option in the printer driver that you are using.
Check All Connections
1. Plug in the power cord. Turn ON the main power.

2. Print the configuration page.
• MP 501/601
1. Press the [User Tools] icon on the operation panel.
3. Press [List/Test Print] in [Printer Features].
4. Press [Configuration Page].
• SP 5300/5310
1. Select [List/Test Print] -> Press [OK] on the controller panel.
2. Select [Config. Page] -> Press [OK].
156
File Format Converter Type M19 (D3BR-04) (MP 501/601 Only)
File Format Converter Type M19 (D3BR-04)

(MP 501/601 Only)
Accessory Check
1 File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) 1
- FCC sheet 1
- RoHS decal 1
- RoHS label 1
File Format Converter Type M19 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing, please refer to
the operating instructions "About This Machine".
157
2. Installation
Extended USB Board Type M19 (D3BS-01)

Accessory Check
1 Extended USB board 1
- Connector cap 1
- FCC sheet 1
- RoHS decal 1
- RoHS label 1
Extended USB Board Type M19 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing, please refer to
the operating instructions "About This Machine" for MP 501/601, or "Operating Instructions" for SP
5300/5310.
158
SD Card Options
SD Card Options
SD Card Slots
Slots Description
Use for the following SD card options.

• OCR Unit Type M13*1
• IPDS Unit Type M24
[A] SD Card Slot 1 (option slot)
• XPS Direct Print Option Type M24
• VM Card Type P8*2
• Fax Connection Unit Type M24*1
[B] SD Card Slot 2 (service slot) Use for service only (for example, updating the firmware).
*1 MP 501/601 only
*2 SP 5300/5310 only
• Optional SD cards can be set in either Slot 1 or Slot 2. However, Slot 2 is the service slot, so it is
recommended that Slot 1 to be used to install the SD card options.
159
2. Installation
SD Card Appli Move

Overview
The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you copy application programs from one
SD card to another SD card.
You cannot run application programs from Slot 2. However you can move application programs from
Slot 2 to Slot 1 with the following procedure.
When merging SD cards, the target SD card should have the largest memory size of all the application
SD cards.
Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
• The necessary data for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD card
to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you copy the application
program from one card to another card.
• Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal operation is not
guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
• Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from one card to another
card. This is for the following reasons:
1) The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program.
2) You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
SD Card Appli Move
1. Choose an SD card with enough space.

2. Enter SP5-873 "SD Card Appli Move". This SP copies the application programs from the
original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 to the SD card in SD Card Slot 1. Move the application
from the SD card in Slot 2 to the card in Slot 1.
3. Exit the SP mode.
Move Exec
The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original SD card to
another SD card.
160
SD Card Appli Move
• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of any application SD card. If the write protect switch is
ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application
merge.
1. Turn OFF the main power.

2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is copied to this
SD card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) in SD Card Slot 2. The
application program is copied from this SD card.
6. Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec".
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
Undo Exec
The menu "Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to
the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some
programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of any application SD card. If the write protect switch is
ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application
merge.

2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is copied back into
this card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) in SD Card Slot 1. The
application program is copied back from this SD card.
6. Select SP5-873-002 "Undo Exec".
161
2. Installation
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.

9. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
• This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the machine.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
162
OCR Unit Type M13 (D3AC-23, 24, 25) (MP 501/601 Only)
OCR Unit Type M13 (D3AC-23, 24, 25) (MP

501/601 Only)
Accessory Check
1 OCR unit SD card 1
- Caution sheet (EU only) 1
- RoHS sheet (AP/CHN only) 1
- RoHS decal (AP/CHN only) 1
163
2. Installation
cover [B].
164
165
2. Installation
5. Insert the OCR Unit Type M13 SD card in SD Card Slot 1 [A] (upper slot).

7. Press [Enter] in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary).
The SD card ID is saved in the NVRAM, and the ID of the MFP is saved on the SD card. The MFP
and SD card are thereby linked.
8. When "operation complete" is displayed, press [Close].
• If installation fails, "Failed" is displayed.

• If installation fails, perform the following steps.
1. Check whether it is a used SD card.
2. Turn OFF the main power, and repeat steps 1-5.
10. Press [Enter] in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary).
Dictionary data is copied to the HDD.
• On the first run, SP5-878-004 links the SD card, and on the second run, copies dictionary
data.
11. Turn OFF the main power, and remove the SD card from the SD card slot.
• Keep the SD card in a safe place. The original SD card is needed in the event of a HDD
malfunction.
12. Reattach the controller cover.
166
14. Press [Send File Type / Name] on the scanner screen.
15. Check if [OCR Settings] is displayed on the Send File Type / Name screen.
• After installation, the OCR setting can be changed on the "OCR setting" screen.
• When setting OCR, set [OCR setting] to [Yes]. (Default setting: [No])
Recovery Procedure
When this option is installed, a function is saved on the HDD, and ID information on the SD card is
saved in the NVRAM. Therefore, when replacing the HDD and/or NVRAM, this option must be
reinstalled.
When storing the original SD card
• When only the HDD is replaced
Reinstall using the original SD card.
• When only the NVRAM is replaced
When uploading or downloading the NVRAM data, reinstall using the original SD card.
167
2. Installation
When not uploading or downloading the NVRAM data, order and reinstall a new SD card
(service part).
• When the HDD and NVRAM are replaced simultaneously
Reinstall using the original SD card.
If the original SD card is lost
Order and reinstall a new SD card (service part).
• Perform reinstallation in the same way as installation.
168
XPS Direct Print Option Type M24 (D3CP-12)
XPS Direct Print Option Type M24 (D3CP-12)

Accessory Check
1 XPS Direct Print SD card 1
- RoHS sheet 1
- RoHS decal 1
XPS Direct Print Option Type M24 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing, please refer
to the operating instructions "About This Machine".
169
2. Installation
IPDS Unit Type M24 (M500-02, 03, 04)

Accessory Check
1 IPDS Emulation SD card 1
- Decal 1
- EULA sheet (NA only) 1
- Caution sheet 1
- CD-ROM 1
- RoHS sheet (AP/CHN only) 1
- RoHS decal (AP/CHN only) 1
IPDS Unit Type M24 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing, please refer to the
operating instructions "About This Machine" for MP 501/601, or "Operating Instructions" for SP
5300/5310.
170
VM CARD Type P8 (M500-09, 10, 11) (SP 5300/5310 Only)
VM CARD Type P8 (M500-09, 10, 11) (SP

5300/5310 Only)
Accessory Check
1 VM SD card 1
- Caution sheet (EU only) 1
VM CARD Type P8 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing, please refer to the
operating instructions "Operating Instructions".
171
2. Installation
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19

(D3BS-03) (MP 501/601 Only)
Overview
The machine’s hard disk stores all document data from the Copier, Printer, and Scanner functions. It also
stores the data of users’ Document Server and code counters, and the Address Book. To prevent data
on the hard disk being leaked before disposing the machine, you can overwrite all data stored on the
hard disk (Erase All Memory). You can also automatically overwrite temporarily-stored data (Auto Erase
Memory).
The function of this option is exactly the same as the Data Overwrite Security in Security Functions, which
is standard on this machine. (page 181 "Data Overwrite Security (MP 501/601)")
This option should be installed only for the customer who requires the CC certified Data Overwrite
Security function.
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
1 SD card 1
- Comments sheet 1
- Operating Instructions CD-ROM 1
172
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03) (MP 501/601 Only)
Before You Begin the Procedure
1. Confirm that the DataOverwriteSecurity unit SD card is the correct type for the machine.
The correct type for this machine is "Type M19".
• If you install any version other than "Type M19" for this machine, you will have to replace the
NVRAM and do this installation procedure again.
2. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
• Supervisor login password
• Administrator login name
• Administrator login password
If any of these settings are at their factory default values, tell the customer that these settings must be
changed before you do the installation procedure.
3. Make sure that "Admin. Authentication" is ON.
[User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator
Authentication Management] -> [Admin. Authentication]
If this setting is OFF, tell the customer that this setting must be ON before you do the installation
procedure.
4. Make sure that "Administrator Tools" is enabled (selected).
Authentication Management] -> [Available Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer that this setting must be enabled (selected)
before you do the installation procedure.
• See the operating instructions "Security Guide" for the factory default values.
Seal Check and Removal
Before opening the box, make sure that the seal has not been broken or peeled off. If the seal has been
broken or peeled off (even partially), this is considered an arrival defect. Note that once the seal is
peeled off, this will leave a mark on the bag.
173
2. Installation
• You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed
in the box at the factory before you do the installation.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.

• Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
• The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see "VOID" on the tapes, do not install the
components in the box.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show "VOID", remove them from the corners of the box.
3. You can see the "VOID" marks [B] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they
cannot be attached to the box again.
1. Turn OFF the main power, and then remove the power plug and cables that are
connected.
174
cover [B].
175
2. Installation
176
5. Insert the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19 SD card in SD Card Slot 1 [A] (upper
slot).
6. Reattach the controller cover.

7. Insert the power cord into the outlet and turn ON the main power.
• When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation.
9. Do this step only if you are installing the option on a machine that is already in use (not a
new machine):
• If the customer wishes to continue using the same hard disk, execute all three SP modes
below.
• SP5-801-014 (Clear DCS Setting)
• SP5-832-001 (HDD Formatting (ALL))
• SP5-832-002 (HDD Formatting (IMH))
• If customer wishes to replace the hard disk with a new one, execute SP5-801-014 only.
• If the customer continues using the same hard disk, the overwriting of the data stored on the
disk before the option is installed cannot be guaranteed. It is highly recommended to replace
the hard disk with a new one.
10. Set SP5-836-001 (Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)) to a value of 0 (Disable).
11. Execute SP5-878-001 (Option Setup: Data Overwrite Security).
If the installation fails, "Installation failed" is displayed when this SP is executed.
12. Print out the System Settings List and make sure that the option was installed successfully.
13. Reconnect the network cable.
14. Execute SP5-990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
177
2. Installation
15. Make sure that ROM number "D3BC5757A" and firmware version "1.02" appear in both
of the following areas on the report (they must match):
• "ROM Number / Firmware Version" – "HDD Format Option"
• "Loading Program"
Configuring "Auto Erase Memory" (Performed by the Customer)
1. Press the [User Tools] icon.

3. Press [System Settings].
4. Press [Administrator Tools].
5. Press [Next] twice.
6. Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting].
7. Press [On].
8. Select the method of overwriting.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to Step 11.
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to Step 9.
9. Press [Change].
10. Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the ten keys, and then press
[#].
The Random Numbers method overwrites the data using random numbers. You can set the
overwrite to be performed anywhere from 1-9 times, with a default of 3 times.
11. Press [OK].
12. Log out.
178
13. Check the display and make sure that the Data Overwrite icon appears.
When Auto Erase Memory is enabled, the Data Overwrite icon will be indicated in the bottom left
of the panel display.
14. Take a test copy, and then make sure that the Data Overwrite icon changes from "Dirty"
(solid) to "Dirty" (blinking), and then to "Clear".
• If the Data Overwrite icon does not change to Clear, check to see if there are any active
Sample Print or Locked Print jobs. A Sample Print or Locked Print job can only be overwritten
after it has been executed.
• The Dirty icon blinks while the overwrite is in progress.
• If you use your machine for a while with Auto Erase Memory disabled, and then suddenly
enable it, the overwrite process may take 10 or more hours depending on HDD usage.
Data Overwrite icon:
Icon Icon name Explanation
This icon is displayed when there is temporary

Dirty data to be overwritten, and flashes during
overwriting.
This icon is displayed when there is no temporary

Clear
data to be overwritten.
179
2. Installation
Security Setting
Security Function Installation
The machine contains the Security functions (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit) in the
controller board.
If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended that you activate Data Overwrite Security and
HDD Encryption by selecting the following on the operation panel.
• MP 501/601: [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] ->
[Machine Data Encryption Settings] -> [Encrypt] -> [All Data]
• SP 5300/5310: [Security Options] -> [Machine Data Encryption] -> [Encrypt] -> [Carry Over All
Data]
• This method is recommended because there is no user data on the HDD yet (Address Book data,
image data, etc.).
If the customer wishes to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit on a machine
that is already running, it is recommended that you activate the unit by selecting the following on the
operation panel.
• MP 501/601: [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] ->
[Machine Data Encryption Settings] -> [Encrypt] -> [All Data]
• SP 5300/5310: [Security Options] -> [Machine Data Encryption] -> [Encrypt] -> [Carry Over All
Data]
• Selecting the setting above will preserve the data that has already been saved to the HDD. (If
"Format All Data" is selected, all user data saved to the HDD up to that point will be erased).
Immediately after encryption is enabled, the encryption setting process will take several minutes to
complete before you can begin using the machine.
• If encryption is enabled after data has been stored on the HDD, or of the encryption key is
changed, this process can take up to three and a half hours or more.
The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.
Once the encryption process begins, it cannot be stopped.
Make sure that the machine's main power is not turned OFF while the encryption process is in progress.
If the machine's main power is turned OFF while the encryption process is in progress, the HDD will be
damaged and all data on it will be unusable.
180
Security Setting
Print the encryption key and keep the encryption key (paper sheet) in a safe place. If the encryption key
is lost when you need it, the controller board, HDD and NVRAM must all be replaced at the same time.
• "NVRAM" mentioned here means the NVRAM on the controller board. It has no relation to the
"NVRAM" or EEPROM on the BiCU.
Please use the following procedure when the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption are
reinstalled.
Data Overwrite Security (MP 501/601)
1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
2. Make sure that "Admin. Authentication" is on.
If this setting is off, tell the customer that this setting must be on before you do the installation
procedure.
Using Auto Erase Memory
The Auto Erase Memory function can be enabled by the following procedure.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel.

4. Press [Next] three twice.
181
2. Installation
5. Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting].
6. Press [On].
7. Select the method of overwriting.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step 10.
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step 8.
8. Press [Change].
9. Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number keys, and then
press [#].
10. Press [OK].
Auto Erase Memory is set.
11. Log out.
12. Check the display and make sure that the Data Overwrite icon appears.
When Auto Erase Memory is enabled, the Data Overwrite icon will be indicated in the bottom left
of the panel display.
182
Security Setting
Icon Icon name Explanation
This icon is displayed when there is temporary

Dirty data to be overwritten, and flashes during
overwriting.
This icon is displayed when there is no temporary

Clear
data to be overwritten.
Data Overwrite Security (SP 5300/5310)
2. Make sure that "Administrator Authentication Management" is on.
1. Log in as the administrator from Web Image Monitor.
2. [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Device Settings] -> [Administrator Authentication
Management]
183
2. Installation
3. From [User Administrator Authentication], [Machine Administrator Authentication], [Network

Administrator Authentication], and [File Administrator Authentication], set the administrator
authentication setting to [On].
procedure.
Using Auto Erase Memory
The Auto Erase Memory function can be enabled by the following procedure.

2. Select [Security Options] -> Press [OK]
3. Select [Auto Erase Memory Setting] -> Press [OK]
4. Select [On] -> Select [HDDErase]
5. Select the method of erasing the data from [NSA], [DoD], or [Random Numbers]. -> Press
[OK]
If you select [Random Numbers], enter the number of times that you want to overwrite. Then press
[OK].
6. Press [OK].
7. Press [Menu].
8. Log out.
Checking the Auto Erase Memory Status
If Auto Erase Memory is enabled, you can use the "Memory Erase Status" screen to find out whether
there is any data to be erased in the memory.
1. Press the [Menu] key -> Select [Memory Erase Status] ->Press [OK]
The Memory Erase status appears.
HDD Encryption (MP 501/601)
Before You Begin the Procedure:
184
Security Setting
2. Make sure that "Admin. Authentication" is on.
procedure.
Enable Encryption Setting
Machine Data Encryption Settings can be enabled by the following procedure.
• When setting up encryption, specify whether to start encryption after deleting data (initialize) or
encrypt and retain existing data. If data is retained, it may take some time to encrypt it.
• When the Machine Data Encryption Settings is enabled;
• If the HDD is replaced, HDD data will be deleted. After installing the new HDD, the data in
the new HDD will be automatically encrypted.
• If the NVRAMs on the controller board are replaced, Machine Data Encryption Settings will
be automatically enabled after installing the new NVRAMs.
• If the controller board is replaced, the restore key will be required after installing the new
controller board.
• If you have the restore key, you will be able to continue using the HDD data.
• If the restore key has been lost, the HDD will be formatted and you need to reset NVRAM
data to the default settings after the forced start-up. (HDD data will be deleted) Refer to "How
to do a forced start up with no encryption key" in "Encryption Key Restoration" (page 188).
• If the controller board and the NVRAMs are replaced together, HDD data will be deleted
since all the encryption information is deleted.

185
2. Installation
5. Press [Next] three times.

6. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
7. Press [Encrypt].
8. Select the data to be carried over to the HDD and not be reset.
• To carry all of the data over to the HDD, select [All Data].
• To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only].
• To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].
9. Select the backup method.
If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
control panel and press [OK] to back up the machine's data encryption key.
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Start] key. Print out the machine's data encryption
key.
10. Press [OK].
186
Security Setting
11. Press [Exit].

12. Press [Exit].
13. Log out.
14. Turn OFF the main power, and then turn the main power back on.
The machine will start to convert the data on the memory after you turn ON the main power. Wait
until the message "Memory conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off." appears, and
then turn OFF the main power.
Check the Encryption Settings
1. Press the [User Tools] icon.

5. Confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display.
Backing Up the Encryption Key
The encryption key can be backed up. Select whether to save it to an SD card or to print it.
• The encryption key is required for data recovery if the machine malfunctions. Be sure to store the
encryption key safely for retrieving backup data.

187
2. Installation
6. Press [Back Up Encryption Key].
7. Select the backup method.

If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
control panel and press [OK]. When the machine's data encryption key is backed up, press [Exit].
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press [Start] and print out the machine's data encryption key.
8. Press [Exit].
9. Log out.
Encryption Key Restoration
How to restore the old encryption key to the machine

The following message appears after the controller board is replaced. In such a case, it is necessary to
restore the encryption key to the new controller board.
To do this, follow the procedure below.
1. Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format.

2. Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key".
3. Create a folder in the "restore_key" folder and name it the same as machine’s serial
number, "xxxxxxxxxxx" (11 digits).
188
Security Setting
4. Create a text file called "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" and save it in the "xxxxxxxxxxx" folder.
Write the encryption key in the text file.
/restore_key/xxxxxxxxxxx/key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt
• Ask the administrator to enter the encryption key. The key has already been printed out by the
user and may have been saved in the "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" file. (The function of back-up the
encryption key to the SD card directly is provided 11A products or later.)
6. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains
the encryption key.
8. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD Card Slot 2 (the lower slot).
• The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on the
controller board.
10. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key
If the encryption key back-up has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.
• The HDD will be formatted after the forced start-up.

• Encrypted data will be deleted.
• User settings will be cleared.
1. Prepare an SD card.
2. Create a directory named "restore_key" inside the root directory of the SD card. Then,
save the "nvram_key.txt" file using the following name:
/restore_key/nvram_key.txt
3. Create a text file and write "nvclear".
• Write this string at the head of the file.

• Use all lower-case letters.
• Do not use quotation marks or blank spaces.
189
2. Installation
• It is judged that a forced start has been selected when the content of "nvclear" is executed and
the machine shifts to the alternate system (forced start).
the encryption key.
8. Turn ON the main power, the machine automatically clear the HDD encryption.
12. Execute SP5-801-xx (Exclude SP5-801-001: All Clear and SP5-801-002: Engine) to resets
NVRAM data to the default settings.
13. Execute SP5-846-046 to clear the address book information.
14. Set necessary user settings from the [User Tools] icon.
HDD Encryption (SP 5300/5310)
Before You Begin the Procedure:
2. Make sure that "Administrator Authentication Management" is on.
2. [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Device Settings] -> [Administrator Authentication
Management]
3. From [User Administrator Authentication], [Machine Administrator Authentication], [Network
Administrator Authentication], and [File Administrator Authentication], set the administrator
authentication setting to [On].
procedure.
190
Security Setting
Enable Encryption Setting
Machine Data Encryption Settings can be enabled by the following procedure.
• When setting up encryption, specify whether to start encryption after deleting data (initialize) or
encrypt and retain existing data. If data is retained, it may take some time to encrypt it.
• When the Machine Data Encryption Settings is enabled;
• If the HDD is replaced, HDD data will be deleted. After installing the new HDD, the data in
the new HDD will be automatically encrypted.
• If the NVRAMs on the controller board are replaced, Machine Data Encryption Settings will
be automatically enabled after installing the new NVRAMs.
• If the controller board is replaced, the restore key will be required after installing the new
controller board.
• If you have the restore key, you will be able to continue using the HDD data.
• If the restore key has been lost, the HDD will be formatted and you need to reset NVRAM
data to the default settings after the forced start-up. (HDD data will be deleted) Refer to "How
to do a forced start up with no encryption key" in "Encryption Key Restoration" (page 192).
• If the controller board and the NVRAMs are replaced together, HDD data will be deleted
since all the encryption information is deleted.

4. Select [Machine Data Encryption] -> Press [OK]
5. Make sure [Encrypt] is displayed on the control panel -> Press [OK]
6. Select the data to be carried over to the hard disk and not be reset -> Press [OK]
• To carry all of the data over to the hard disk, select [Carry Over All Data].
• To carry over only the printer settings data, select [CarryOver FileSys DataOnly].
• To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].
7. Select [PrtOnPpr] -> [Print] -> [Continue]
8. Select [OK].
9. Press [Menu].
10. Log out.
11. Turn OFF the main power, and then turn the main power back ON.
The machine will start to convert the data on the memory after you turn ON the main power. Wait
until the message "Memory conversion complete. Turn the power switch off." appears, and then
turn OFF the main power again.
191
2. Installation
Backing Up the Encryption Key
You can back up the encryption key by printing it.
• The encryption key is required for data recovery if the printer malfunctions. Be sure to store the
encryption key safely for retrieving backup data.

3. Select [Machine Data Encryption] -> Press [OK]
4. Select [Back Up Encryption Key] -> Press [OK]
5. Select [PrtOnPpr] -> [Print]
6. Press [Menu].
7. Log out.
Encryption Key Restoration
How to restore the old encryption key to the machine

The following message appears after the controller board is replaced. In such a case, it is necessary to
restore the encryption key to the new controller board.
To do this, follow the procedure below.
1. Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format.

2. Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key".
3. Create a folder in the "restore_key" folder and name it the same as machine’s serial
number, "xxxxxxxxxxx" (11 digits).
4. Create a text file called "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" and save it in the "xxxxxxxxxxx" folder.
Write the encryption key in the text file.
/restore_key/xxxxxxxxxxx/key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt
192
Security Setting
• Ask the administrator to enter the encryption key. The key has already been printed out by the
user and may have been saved in the "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" file. (The function of back-up the
encryption key to the SD card directly is provided 11A products or later.)
the encryption key.
• The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on the
controller board.
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key
If the encryption key back-up has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.
• The HDD will be formatted after the forced start-up.

• Encrypted data will be deleted.
• User settings will be cleared.
1. Prepare an SD card.
2. Create a directory named "restore_key" inside the root directory of the SD card. Then,
save the "nvram_key.txt" file using the following name:
/restore_key/nvram_key.txt
3. Create a text file and write "nvclear".
• Write this string at the head of the file.

• Use all lower-case letters.
• Do not use quotation marks or blank spaces.
• It is judged that a forced start has been selected when the content of "nvclear" is executed and
the machine shifts to the alternate system (forced start).
the encryption key.
193
2. Installation

8. Turn ON the main power, the machine automatically clear the HDD encryption.
12. Execute SP5-801-xx (Exclude SP5-801-001: All Clear and SP5-801-002: Engine) to resets
NVRAM data to the default settings.
13. Execute SP5-846-046 to clear the address book information.
14. Set necessary user settings from the [Menu] key.
194
@Remote Settings
@Remote Settings
• Prepare and check the following check points before you visit the customer site. For details, ask the
@Remote key person.
Check points before making @Remote settings
1. The setting of SP5-816-201 in the mainframe must be "0".

2. Print the SMC with SP5-990-002 and then check if a device ID2 (SP5-811-003) must be
correctly programmed.
• 6 spaces must be put between the 3-digit prefix and the following 8-digit number (e.g.
xxx______xxxxxxxx).
• ID2 (SP5-811-003) and the serial number (SP5-811-001) must be the same (e.g. ID2:
A01______23456789 = serial No. A0123456789)
3. The following settings must be correctly programmed.
• Proxy server IP address (SP5-816-063)
• Proxy server Port number (SP5-816-064)
• Proxy User ID (SP5-816-065)
• Proxy Password (SP5-816-066)
4. Get a request number.
Execute the @Remote Settings

2. Input the request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI with
SP5-816-202.
3. Confirm the request number, and then press [EXECUTE] with SP5-816-203.
4. Check the confirmation result with SP5-816-204.
Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround
0 Succeeded -
Communication error (proxy

3 Check the network condition.
enabled)

disabled)
5 Proxy error (authentication error) Check Proxy user name and password.
195
2. Installation
6 Communication error Check the network condition.
8 Other error See "SP5-816-208 Error Codes" below.
Request number confirmation

9 Processing. Please wait.
executing
11 Already registered -
12 Parameter error -
20 Dial-up authentication error
21 Answer tone detection error
22 Carrier detection error

* These errors occur only in the modems that
23 Invalid setting value (modem)
support @Remote.
24 Low power supply current
25 unplugged modem
26 Busy line
5. Make sure that the screen displays the location information with SP5-816-205 only when
it has been input at the Center GUI.
6. Press [EXECUTE] to execute the registration with SP5-816-206.
7. Check the registration result with SP5-816-207.
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
2 Already registered Check the registration status.

enabled)

disabled)
5 Proxy error (Authentication error) Check Proxy user name and password.
196
@Remote Settings
8 Other error See "SP5-816-208 Error Codes" below.
Request number confirmation

9 Processing. Please wait.
executing
11 Already registered -
12 Parameter error -
20 Dial-up authentication error
21 Answer tone detection error
22 Carrier detection error

* These errors occur only in the modems that
23 Invalid setting value (modem)
support @Remote.
24 Low power supply current
25 unplugged modem
26 Busy line

SP5-816-208 Error Codes
These are caused by operation errors, or incorrect settings.
Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
Inquiry, registration attempted without Obtain a request number before

-12002
acquiring Request No. attempting the Inquiry or registration.
Attempted registration without execution of a Perform confirmation before attempting

-12003
confirmation and no previous registration. the registration.
Attempted setting with illegal entries for

-12004 Check ID2 of the mainframe.
certification and ID2.
@Remote communication is prohibited. The

Make sure that "Remote Service" in User
-12005 device has an Embedded RC gate-related
Tools is set to "Do not prohibit".
problem.
A confirmation request was made after the

-12006 Execute registration.
confirmation had been already completed.
197
2. Installation
The request number used at registration was

-12007 Check Request No.
different from the one used at confirmation.
Update certification failed because Check the mainframe condition. If the

-12008
mainframe was in use. mainframe is in use, try again later.
The ID2 in the NVRAM does not match the

-12009 Check ID2 of the mainframe.
ID2 in the individual certification.
-12010 The certification area is not initialized. Initialize the certification area.
Errors Caused by Response from GW URL
-2385 Other error -
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center -
-2389 Database out of service -
-2390 Program out of service -
Check the registration condition of the

-2391 Two registrations for the same mainframe
mainframe.
-2392 Parameter error -
-2393 External RCG not managed -
-2394 Mainframe not managed -
-2395 Box ID for external RCG is illegal. -
-2396 Mainframe ID for external RCG is illegal. -
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format Check the ID2 of the mainframe.
-2398 Incorrect request number format Check the request number.
198
Operation Guidance for Users
Operation Guidance for Users

Function/Operation Instruction to provide
Basic machine • How to load and replace the toner cartridge and the waste toner
functions, operations bottle
• How to load paper
• How to turn ON/OFF the main power
• How to clear paper jams
• How to program, modify, and delete Address Book entries
• How to customize the UI and home screen
• Overview of machine options/peripherals
• How to take the proper action for SC errors (clearing the error,
contacting service and support, etc.), how to interpret @Remote
notifications
• Important notes to keep in mind whenever moving the machine
• Product limitations
Copier (MP 501/601 • Basic Copier operations

Only) • How to load an original in the ARDF or place it on the exposure glass
for scanning
• How to use thick paper and other specialized paper/media
• How to configure the Copier main screen (duplex/simplex, User
Codes, etc.)
• Basic Document Server operations
Fax (MP 501/601 • How to send a fax (Memory Transmission, Direct Transmission)
Only)
Printer • How to install printer drivers (using the recommended method)

• How to connect to a PC (performing the port settings)
• How to print out a test page
• Overview of various settings inside each tab in the printer driver (e.g.
duplex printing)
Scanner (MP • How to install printer drivers (using the recommended method)
501/601 Only) • How to connect to a PC and perform a test scan
199
2. Installation
200
Preventive Maintenance Tables

• Preventive Maintenance Tables
201
Yield Parts Settings

Yield Parts Replacement Procedure
The parts mentioned in the table have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume made by the
machine will not reach the target yield within the machine’s targeted lifetime if the machine is used under
the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O). So, these parts are categorized not as
PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts).

2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004.
3. Set SP7-804-002 to "1".
Item SP
Drum unit
Development unit
Fusing unit
Transfer unit
Paper feed roller SP7-804-002
Pickup roller
Separation roller
Feed roller assy (ARDF)*1
Separation pad (ARDF) *1
*1 Only for MP 501/601

6. Replace the yield parts and turn ON the main power.
The machine will reset the PM counter.
After installing the new yield parts

2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004 and check the counter value.
3. Make sure that the PM counter is "0" with SP7-621-002.
202
Yield Parts Settings
Operation check
Check if the sample image has been copied normally.
203
204
Notes on the Main Power Switch

Push Switch
The main power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch (push button) from the
conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications different from the
rocker switch. Care must be taken when replacing and adjusting parts.
Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch)

Power is supplied to the machine even when the main power is turned OFF.
The push switch in this machine uses DC (direct current). Therefore, if the AC power cord is
connected to an electrical outlet, power is supplied to the controller board, the operation unit and
other modules even when the main power is turned OFF. When replacing electrical components in
this stage, it can damage other electrical components.
So, when performing maintenance work such as replacing parts, in addition to turning OFF the
main power with the push switch, always unplug the AC power cord after the main power LED on
the operation panel is turned OFF.
• If you unplug the power cord before turning OFF the main power LED, some icons on the
operation panel will not appear at the next start-up. Restarting the machine again will solve
this issue.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine there is still
residual charge.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, there is still residual charge inside
the machine for a while. Therefore, if you remove boards in this state, it can cause a blown fuse or
memory failure.
• How to remove the residual charge inside the machine
After you unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlet, in order to remove the residual
charge from inside the machine, press the main power switch. The charge remaining in the
machine is released, and it is possible to remove boards.
When you reconnect the AC power cord into an AC wall outlet, the machine will start
automatically.
In order to remove the residual charge, push the main power switch after you disconnect the AC
power cord. At that time, the power ON flag inside the machine is set. Therefore, after you finish
205
work on the machine and reconnect the power cord to the AC, even if you do not press the main
power switch, the machine will start automatically and the moving parts will begin to move. When
working on moving parts, be careful that fingers or clothes do not get caught.
• Automatic restart deals with cases when you accidentally unplugged the AC power cord or
unexpected power outages. By keeping the power flag ON, after the resumption of power, the
machine will start up automatically.
In rare cases, when you reconnect the AC power cord to a power outlet, the machine does not start
automatically. This is due to the timing of releasing the residual charge. If you press the main power
switch when the residual charge was already released, the power ON flag will not be set. For such a
case, start the machine manually by pressing the main power switch.
Shutdown Method
1. Press the main power switch [A] on the machine.

2. The shutdown message appears. After the shutdown process, the main power is turned
OFF automatically. The main power LED on the operation panel is turned OFF when the
machine completes the shutdown.
• Before removing and adjusting electrical boards, do the following procedure. Otherwise, the
board can be damaged by the residual charge inside the machine and must be replaced.
3. Disconnect the power cord after shutdown.
4. Press the main power switch for a second to remove the residual charge inside the
machine.
206
Notes on the Main Power Switch
Forced Shutdown
In case normal shutdown does not complete for some reason, the machine has a forced shutdown
function.
To make a forced shutdown, press and hold the main power switch for 6 seconds.
In general, do not use the forced shutdown.
• Forced shutdown may damage the hard disk and memory, and can cause damage to the machine.
Use a forced shutdown only if it is unavoidable.
207
Beforehand
• Before you begin a procedure, please do the following:

For MP 501 and MP 601, which have fax features, print out all messages stored in the memory,
the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.
If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer.
Turn OFF the main power. Disconnect the power cord and network cable. For MP 501 and MP
601, disconnect the telephone line.
• Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you handle
SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards.
• Before you start to remove components from the machine, do the following:
2. Make sure that the shutdown process has finished and that the LED on the operation panel has
turned OFF.
3. Unplug the power cord.
• After the main power of the machine has been turned OFF, the power is supplied to the controller
board until the HDD unit has been shut down safely.
208
Special Tools
Special Tools
The following special tools should be prepared for maintenance of this machine in the field.
U: Unique for this machine
C: Common with listed machine
No. Part Number Description Q’ty Unique or Common
1 B6455030 SD Card 2GB 1 C (General)
• A PC is required for creating the Encryption key file on an SD card when replacing the controller
board for a model in which HDD encryption has been enabled.
209
Image Adjustment
Printing
• Make sure the paper is set correctly in each paper tray before you start these adjustments.
• Use Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-003, No.14) to print the test pattern for the following
procedures.
• Set SP2-109-003 to "0" again after completing these printing adjustments.
Registration: Leading Edge/Side-to-Side
A: Leading Edge Registration (4 ± 2.5 mm)

B: Side-to-side Registration (4 ± 2.5 mm)
210
Image Adjustment
1. Check the leading edge registration [A] for each paper feed station, and adjust them
using SP1-001.
Paper Feed Station SP No. Adjustment Range
Tray 1 (Main unit) SP1-001-001
Tray 2 (Optional tray) SP1-001-002
Tray 4 (Optional tray) SP1-001-004 4±2.5 mm
Bypass Tray SP1-001-006
Duplex Tray SP1-001-007
2. Check the side-to-side registration [B] for each paper feed station, and adjust them using
SP1-002.
Paper Feed Station SP No. Adjustment Range
Tray 1 (Main unit) SP1-002-001
Tray 4 (Optional tray) SP1-002-004 4±2.5 mm
Bypass Tray SP1-002-006
Duplex Tray SP1-002-007
Blank Margin
If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within the specifications, adjust the
leading/left side edge blank margin.
211
A: Left Edge Blank Margin

B: Right Edge Blank Margin
C: Leading Edge Blank Margin
D: Trailing Edge Blank Margin
1. Check the trailing edge [A], right edge [B], leading edge [C], left edge [D] blank margins,
and adjust them using the following SP modes.
Edge SP No. Adjustment Range
Left Edge SP2-103-001
Right Edge SP2-103-002

4±2.5 mm
Leading Edge SP2-103-003
Trailing Edge SP2-103-004
Main Scan Magnification
1. Use SP2-109-003, No.5 (Grid Pattern) to print the single-dot grid pattern.
2. Check the magnification, and adjust the magnification using SP2-102-001 (Magnification
Adjustment Main Scan) if necessary. The specification is ± 1%.
212
Image Adjustment
Scanning (MP 501/601 Only)
• Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing registration /side-to-
side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
Registration: Platen Mode
A: Side-to-side Registration (Main Scan Reg)
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the side-to-side registration, and adjust it using the following SP mode if necessary.
SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range
SP4-011-001 Main Scan Reg ±2.5 mm
213
ARDF Image Adjustment (MP 501/601 Only)
Registration
A: Side-to-side Registration
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF and make a copy from one of the feed
stations.
2. Check the registration, and adjust them using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP6-006-001 ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Front

±3.0 mm
SP6-006-002 ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Rear
214
Factory SP Settings
Factory SP Settings
This section provides the factory SP settings.
You can check the factory SP settings with the SMC report provided with the machine. The SMC report is
stored in the paper feed tray. (For details, see page 30 "SMC Storage")
If the SMC report is not stored with the machine, refer to the tables in this section.
MP 501/601
Factory
SP No. SP Name Default Value
Setting
SP1-001-001 Reistration Correct: Main +0.0 mm -- mm*1
SP1-001-006 Reistration Correct: By-Pass Tray +0.0 mm -- mm*1
SP1-001-007 Reistration Correct: Duplex +0.0 mm -- mm*1
SP4-011-001 S-to-S Regist Adjustment +0.0 mm -- mm*1
SP4-108-001 Sub Scan Speed.Adjustment +0.0 % -- %*1
SP4-110-001 L-Edge Timing Adjustment +0 pulse -- pulse*1
SP4-609-001 Gray Balance Set: R: Book Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
SP4-609-002 Gray Balance Set: R: DF Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
SP4-610-001 Gray Balance Set: G: Book Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
SP4-610-002 Gray Balance Set: G: DF Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
SP4-610-003 Gray Balance Set: BW: Book Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
SP4-610-004 Gray Balance Set: BW: Book Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
SP4-611-001 Gray Balance Set: B: Book Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
SP4-611-002 Gray Balance Set: B: DF Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
215
Factory
Setting
SP5-101-107 Auto Logout Timer: Auto Logout Time 1: Enable 0: Disable
SP5-305-101 Auto Off Set: Set Function 1: Enable 0: Disable
OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel

SP5-748-201 0: Not connected 1: Connected
Connect Setting
NA/EU :0
NA/EU :0 (Off)
SP5-805-002 Drum Heater (Off)
AP: 1 (ON)
AP: 1 (ON)
0: The machine
reboots 1: The
automatically when machine does
SP5-875-001 SC Auto Reboot: Reboot Setting the machine issues not reboot
an SC error and when an SC
logs the SC error error occurs.
code.
0 or 9
(Set the
SP5-907-001 Plug & Play Maker/Model Name 0 appropriate
setting for the
model)
SP5-985-001 Device Setting: On Board NIC 0: Disable 1: Enable
SP5-985-002 Device Setting: On Board USB 0: Disable 1: Enable
ADF Adjustment: Side-to-Side Regist:

SP6-006-001 +0.0 mm -- mm*1
Front
ADF Timing Adjustment: Leading Edge

SP6-026-001 +0 pulse -- pulse*1
Start Timing: Front

SP6-026-003 -16 pulse -- pulse*1
End Timing: Front

SP6-026-004 -16 pulse -- pulse*1
End Timing: Rear
ADF Adjustment Scan Speed: Simplex

SP6-027-001 +0.0 % -- %*1
Mode
216
Factory SP Settings
Factory
Setting
ADF Adjustment Scan Speed: Duplex

SP6-027-003 +0.0 % -- %*1
Mode: Rear
*1: This setting is specific to the machine type.
SP 5300/5310
Factory
Setting
SP5-101-107 Auto Logout Timer: Auto Logout Time 1: Enable 0: Disable
SP5-305-101 Auto Off Set: Set Function 1: Enable 0: Disable
0: The machine
reboots 1: The
automatically when machine does
SP5-875-001 SC Auto Reboot: Reboot Setting the machine issues not reboot
an SC error and when an SC
logs the SC error error occurs.
code.
NA/EU :0
NA/EU :0 (Off)
SP5-805-002 Drum Heater (Off)
AP: 1 (ON)
AP: 1 (ON)
217
Factory
Setting
0 or 9
(Set the
SP5-907-001 Plug & Play Maker/Model Name 0 appropriate
setting for the
model)
*1: This setting is specific to the machine type.
218
Exterior Covers (MP 501/601)

Scanner Front Cover
1. Insert a flathead screwdriver at [A] to release the hook of the scanner front cover [B].
2. Release the two hooks of the scanner front cover [A].
3. Insert a flathead screwdriver at [A] to release the hook, and then remove the scanner
front cover [B].
219
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the scanner front cover when you remove or
install the scanner front cover.
Front Cover
220
2. Open the bypass tray [A].
3. Release the left hinge [A] of the bypass tray with a flathead screwdriver by slightly
bending the bypass tray inward.
221
4. Release the right hinge [A] of the bypass tray by sliding it to the left.
5. Remove the right connecting arm [A] and left connecting arm [B] of the bypass tray [C].
222
6. Remove the bypass tray [C].
223
8. Remove the switch cover [A].
224
9. Remove the spring [A] and power switch [B].
10. Remove the belt [A].
11. Remove the front cover [A] by releasing the left hinge [B].
225
Right Upper Cover
1. Remove the rear left stay. (page 245)

the arrow.
226
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right upper cover when you remove or
install the right upper cover.
Right Lower Cover
1. Remove the right upper cover. (page 226)
227
228
4. Remove the four screws from the right lower cover [A].
229
6. Open the rear lower cover [A], and then release the hook of the right lower cover [B] by
7. Release the hooks [A] and [B].
230
8. Remove the right lower cover [A] by rotating it in the direction of the arrow.
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right lower cover when you remove or
install the right lower cover.
• Do not remove the screw [A] when removing the right lower cover [B].
231
Left Upper Cover
232
2. Insert a flathead screwdriver into , , and in order to release the three hooks of the
left upper cover [A].
3. Remove the left upper cover [A] by inserting a flathead screwdriver into [B].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left upper cover when you remove or
install the left upper cover.
233
Left Middle Cover
1. Remove the following covers.

• Left upper cover (page 232)
• Left rear cover (page 237)
3. Open the waste toner bottle cover [A], and then remove the waste toner bottle [B].
4. Release the hook by lifting the left middle cover [A] upward.
234
5. Release the hooks in the order of , , and .

6. Remove the left middle cover [A] and waste toner bottle cover [B].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left middle cover when you remove or
install the left middle cover.
Left Lower Cover
1. Remove the left middle cover. (page 234)
235
2. Remove the screw holding the left lower cover [A].
3. Release the hook by opening the right side of the left lower cover as shown below, and
then remove the left lower cover [A]. (hook×3)
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left lower cover when you remove or install
the left lower cover.
236
Left Rear Cover
2. Remove the left rear cover [A] by rotating it in the direction of the arrow. (hook×2)
237
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left rear cover when you remove or
install the left rear cover.
Rear Upper Cover

• Left lower cover (page 235)
• Rear middle cover (page 241)
2. Remove the ground screw from the left side of the machine.
238
3. Open the transparent film [A]. (hook×2)
4. Disconnect two connectors, and then release them from the harness guide [A].
239
6. Release the left hinge [A] of the rear upper cover [B] by slightly bending the rear upper
cover inward.
7. Remove the rear upper cover [A] by sliding it to the left.
• When removing the rear upper cover, release the harness [A] from the mainframe.
240
Rear Middle Cover
1. Remove the rear lower cover. (page 243)

2. Release three hooks of the rear middle cover [A] in the order of , , and .
• When releasing the hooks at and , pull the right side [A] of the rear middle cover while
pressing each hook upward.
241
• When releasing the hook at , pull the left side [A] of the rear middle cover while pressing
the hook upward.
3. Remove the rear middle cover [A] by rotating in the direction of the arrow.
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear middle cover when you remove or
install the rear middle cover.
242
Rear Lower Cover
1. Release the right hinge [A] of the rear lower cover [B] by pushing the rear lower cover
inward with a flathead screwdriver.
243
2. Remove the rear lower cover [A] by sliding it to the right.
Rear Center Stay

• Rear left stay (page 245)
2. Remove the screw from the rear center stay [A].
3. Insert a flathead screwdriver into [A] and [B] to release the hooks of the rear center stay
[C].
244
4. Remove the rear center stay [C].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear center stay when you remove or install
the rear center stay.
Rear Left Stay
1. Remove the controller cover. (page 254)

2. Insert a flathead screwdriver in the order of , , and to release three hooks of the
rear left stay [A].
245
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear right stay when you remove or install
the rear right stay.
Paper Exit Cover
1. Remove the rear center stay. (page 244)
246
2. Remove the two screws from the paper exit cover [A].
3. Remove the paper exit cover [A] from the right side. (hook×1)
• Be careful not to damage the hook at the rear of the paper exit cover when you remove or install
the paper exit cover.
247
Paper Exit Tray
1. Remove the scanner unit. (page 290)

2. Remove the controller box. (page 350)
• Paper exit cover (page 246)
[B].
5. Release the two hooks from the operation panel arm upper cover [A].
248
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the operation panel arm upper cover
when you remove or install the operation panel arm upper cover.
7. Release the USB cable [A] and harness [B] of the operation panel from the harness
guides.
249
8. Remove the operation panel unit with bracket [A].
250
• The screw [B] is a sems screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the paper
exit tray.
10. Remove the two screws from the left side cover [A].
11. Remove the left side cover [A].
• These two screws are tapping screws. Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing
the paper exit tray.
251
12. Remove the front right cover [A].
13. Remove the two screws from the right side cover [A].
14. Remove the right side cover [A].
• These two screws are tapping screws. Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing
the paper exit tray.
252
15. Remove the paper exit tray [A].
• The screw [B] is a sems screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the paper
exit tray.
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the paper exit tray when you remove or
install the paper exit tray.
253
Controller Cover
2. Insert a flathead screwdriver into [A] to release the hook of the controller cover [B].
254
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the controller cover when you remove or install
the controller cover.
255
Exterior Covers (SP 5300/5310)

Upper Cover

256
257
258
8. Remove the plastic sheet [A] from the main frame (hook×2), and then remove the upper
cover [A].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the upper cover when you remove or install the
upper cover.
259
Front Cover
2. Open the bypass tray [A].
260
3. Release the left hinge [A] of the bypass tray with a flathead screwdriver by slightly
bending the bypass tray inward.
4. Release the right hinge [A] of the bypass tray by sliding it to the left.
5. Remove the right connecting arm [A] and left connecting arm [B] of the bypass tray [C].
261
6. Remove the bypass tray [C].
7. Open the upper cover [A], and then open the front cover [B].
262
8. Remove the screw from the switch cover [A].
9. Release the right hinge [A] of the front cover.
10. Remove the switch cover [A].
263
11. Remove the spring [A] and power switch [B].
12. Remove the front cover [A] by releasing the left hinge [B].
Right Cover
1. Remove the upper cover. (page 256)

264
265
5. Remove five screws from the right cover [A].
266
267
the right cover.
Left Upper Cover

• Upper cover (page 256)
• Left rear cover (page 272)
268
3. Open the waste toner bottle cover [A], and then remove the waste toner bottle [B].
4. Release the hook by lifting the left upper cover [A] upward.
5. Release the hooks in the order of , , and .
269
6. Remove the left upper cover [A] and waste toner bottle cover [B].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left upper cover when you remove or install
the left upper cover.
Left Lower Cover
1. Remove the left upper cover. (page 268)
270
2. Remove the screw holding the left lower cover [A].
3. Release the hook by opening the right side of the left lower cover as shown below, and
then remove the left lower cover [A]. (hook×3)
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left lower cover when you remove or install
the left lower cover.
271
Left Rear Cover
2. Remove the left rear cover [A] by rotating it in the direction of the arrow.
272
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left rear cover when you remove or
install the left rear cover.
Rear Upper Cover

• Rear middle cover (page 276)
2. Remove the ground screw.
273
3. Open the transparent film [A]. (hook×2)
4. Disconnect the two connectors, and then release them from the harness guide [A].
274
6. Release the left hinge [A] of the rear upper cover [B] by slightly bending the rear upper
cover inward.
7. Remove the rear upper cover [A] by sliding it to the left.
• When removing the rear upper cover, release the harness [A] from the mainframe.
275
Rear Middle Cover
1. Remove the rear lower cover. (page 278)

2. Release three hooks of the rear middle cover [A] in the order of , , and .
• When releasing the hooks at and , pull the right side [A] of the rear middle cover while
pressing each hook upward.
276
• When releasing the hook at , pull the left side [A] of the rear middle cover while pressing
the hook upward.
3. Remove the rear middle cover [A] by rotating in the direction of the arrow.
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear middle cover when you remove or
install the rear middle cover.
277
Rear Lower Cover
1. Release the right hinge [A] of the rear lower cover [B] by pushing the rear lower cover
inward with a flathead screwdriver.
278
2. Remove the rear lower cover [A] by sliding it to the right.
Controller Cover
279
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the controller cover when you remove or install
the controller cover.
280
Operation Panel (MP 501/601)

This section includes only the replacement procedure which is unique for the MP 501/601 series. The
replacement procedures for the other parts are included in the FSM for the Smart Operation Panel,
because these parts are also used with other models.
Operation Panel

• Scanner front cover (page 219)
• Right lower cover (page 227)
2. Disconnect the USB cable [A].
3. Release the USB cable [A] from the harness guides.
281
4. Release the two hooks from the operation panel arm upper cover [A].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the operation panel arm upper cover when you
remove or install the operation panel arm upper cover.
282
6. Remove the ground screw and disconnect the connector.
7. Pull out the USB cable [A].
8. Remove the operation panel [A] from the mainframe.
283
9. Remove the rear center cover [A].
10. Remove the rear right cover [A] and rear left cover [B].
11. Remove the right hinge cover [A] and left hinge cover (lower) [B].
284
12. Remove the left hinge cover (upper) [A] and left hinge cover (left) [B]. (hook×2)
13. Remove the right hinge [A] and left hinge [B].
285
14. Remove the USB cable [A] and ground cable [B].
Before Installing the New Operation Panel
There is a DIP switch [A] on the sub board of the operation panel.
The switch setting to use depends on the model.

Make sure that only switch No. 3 and 7 are ON. Otherwise, SC672-11 occurs when starting the
machine.
286
Internal Parts
Refer to the FSM for the Smart Operation Panel.
287
Operation Panel (SP 5300/5310)

Operation Panel
1. Remove the upper cover. (page 256)

2. Remove the sheet [A] from back side of the upper cover [B].
3. Remove the seven screws.
• The screws [A] are sems screws. Be careful not to use the wrong screws when installing the
operation panel.
288
Operation Panel (SP 5300/5310)
4. Open the bracket [A].
5. Remove the operation panel [A].
OPU Board
1. Remove the operation panel. (page 288)

2. Remove the OPU board [A].
289
Scanner Unit (MP 501/601 Only)

Scanner Unit

• Scanner front cover (page 219)
• Right upper cover (page 226)
• Rear center stay (page 244)
3. Disconnect the flat cable [A] and release it from the harness guide [B].
290
4. Open the clamp [A] and disconnect the three connectors. Then release the connectors
from the harness guides [B].
5. Remove the ground screw [A].
6. Remove the two screws from the rear side of the scanner unit [A].
291
7. Remove the scanner unit [A].
Scanner Carriage
1. Remove the ARDF unit. (page 385)
292
2. Remove the exposure glass [A].
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the exposure glass when you remove or
install the exposure glass.
293
3. Remove the clip [A] from the pulley [B] on the right side.
4. Remove the plate [A] and carriage belt [B].
5. Move the scanner carriage [A] to the right, and then remove the carriage belt [B] from the
pulley [C] on the left side.
294
6. Remove the scanner carriage [A] and shaft [B] with the carriage belt from the mainframe.
• When removing the scanner carriage [A] from the mainframe, disconnect the flat cable [B]
and release it from the harness guides at the back of the scanner carriage [A].
7. Remove the shaft [A] from the scanner carriage [B].
295
8. Remove the carriage belt [A] from the scanner carriage [B]. (hook×1)
296
Laser Unit (MP 501/601)
• Turn OFF the main power and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this
section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
Caution Decal Location
The caution decal is attached as shown below.
Laser Unit
1. Remove the paper exit tray. (page 248)

2. Disconnect the red connector and flat cable from IOB [A].
297
3. Pull the flat cable [A] out through the apertures.
4. Remove the flat cable with the bracket [A] by sliding it to the rear while pushing the hook
[B].
5. Pull the red harness [A] out through the apertures, and then release it from the harness
guides.
298
6. Remove the laser unit [A].
299
Laser Unit (SP 5300/5310)
• Turn OFF the main power and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this
section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
Caution Decal Location
The caution decal is attached as shown below.
Laser Unit

2. Disconnect the red connector from IOB [A].
300
Laser Unit (SP 5300/5310)
3. Disconnect the flat cable.
4. Remove the flat cable with the bracket [A] by sliding it to the rear while pushing the hook
[B].
5. Pull the red harness [A] out through the apertures, and then release it from the harness
guides.
301
6. Remove the laser unit [A].
302
Development Unit
Development Unit
Development Unit

303
[B].
3. Pull out the PCDU [A].
4. Release the hook, and then remove the container guide [A] by sliding it to the rear.
(hook×1)
304
Development Unit
5. Disconnect the connector.
6. Release the hook [A] by pressing the lock lever, and then remove the development unit
[B]. (hook×1)
After replacing the development unit

RTB 27
305
Drum Unit
Drum Unit
1. Remove the development unit. (page 303)

2. Remove the right lock lever [A] from the drum unit [B].
• Be careful not to lose the right lock lever [A]. The right lock lever is not included in the drum
unit as a service part.
3. Remove the left lock lever [A] from the drum unit [B].
306
Drum Unit
• Be careful not to lose the left lock lever [A]. The left lock lever is not included in the drum unit
as a service part.
4. Remove the drum unit [A] by pulling it out.
Charge Roller

307
[B].
308
Drum Unit
4. Remove the charge roller [A] from the PCDU [B] by pressing the lock lever [C].
309
Transfer Unit
Transfer Roller
1. Remove the drum unit. (page 306)

2. Remove the transfer guide plate [A] by sliding it to the left.
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the transfer guide plate when you remove or install the
transfer guide plate.
310
Transfer Unit
3. Remove the shaft [A] of the transfer roller [B] from the bearings on the right and left sides
with a flathead screwdriver.
311
4. Remove the transfer roller [B].
Discharge Plate Unit
1. Remove the transfer roller. (page 310)
312
Transfer Unit
2. Remove the discharge plate unit [A] by rotating it towards you.
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the discharge plate unit when you remove or install the
discharge plate unit.
313
Fusing Unit
Fusing Unit

• MP 501/601: Rear upper cover (page 232), Controller cover (page 254)
• SP 5300/5310: Rear upper cover (page 273), Controller cover (page 279)
2. Remove the connector cover [A] from the rear side of the machine.
3. Disconnect the two connectors.
• The connector [A] is gray. Be careful not to connect the wrong connector when installing the
fusing unit.
314
Fusing Unit
4. Remove the connector cover [A]. (hook×1)
• When removing the connector cover, insert the flathead screwdriver into [A] and release the
hook of the connector cover.
315
316
Fusing Unit
6. Remove the screw from the connector cover [A].
7. Release the hook, and then remove the connector cover [A].
317
9. Release the connector from the harness guide.
10. Remove the fusing unit [A].
Modified
from here
RTB 23
• When removing the fusing unit [A], release the harness [B] from the mainframe.
318
Paper Exit Unit (MP 501/601)

Paper Exit Unit
1. Remove the paper exit tray. (page 248)

2. Remove the spring [A] from the right side of the paper exit unit [B].
319
3. Disconnect the connector from the Connect-Left PCB [A].
4. Release the harness [A] from the harness guides.
320
5. Remove the three screws from the left side of the machine.
• The screw [A] is a ground screw and [B] is a big screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screws
when installing the paper exit unit.
7. Remove the two screws from the right side of the machine.
321
8. Remove the paper exit unit [A].
• When removing the paper exit unit [A], release the four hooks from both sides of the paper
exit unit.
322
• When removing the paper exit unit [A], disconnect the connector [B] from the paper exit unit.
323
Paper Exit Unit (SP 5300/5310)

Paper Exit Unit

• Controller box (page 354)
2. Remove the spring [A] from the paper exit unit [B].
324
3. Disconnect the connector [A] from the Connect-Left PCB [B], and then release it from the
plastic harness guide [C].
4. Release the harness [A], disconnected in the previous step, from the harness guides.
325
5. Remove the three screws from the left side of the machine.
• The screw [A] is a ground screw and [B] is a big screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screws
when installing the paper exit unit.
7. Remove the two screws from the right side of the machine.
326
8. Remove the paper exit unit [A].
• When removing the paper exit unit [A], release the four hooks from both sides of the paper
exit unit.
327
• When removing the paper exit unit [A], disconnect the connector [B] from the paper exit unit.
328
Paper Feed Unit
Paper Feed Unit

Paper Feed Roller, Pickup Roller
2. Release the lock of the feed roller holder [A] by releasing the lever.
329
3. Remove the paper roller holder [A] by pushing it to the left.
4. Remove the paper feed roller [A] from the feed roller holder [B]. (hook×1)
5. Remove the pickup roller [A]. (hook×1)
330
Paper Feed Unit
Separation Roller
2. Remove the separation roller holder [A].
3. Remove the spring [A].
331
4. Remove the separation roller unit [A] by rotating it as shown below.
5. Remove the separation roller [A]. (hook×1)
332
Bypass Tray Unit
Bypass Tray Unit

Bypass Paper Feed Roller

• MP 501/601: Front cover (page 220), Right lower cover (page 227), Left middle cover
(page 234)
• SP 5300/5310: Front cover (page 260)
2. Remove the bypass bottom plate unit [A].
• When removing the bypass bottom plate unit [A], rotate the lever [B].
333
3. Slide the shaft [A] of the bypass tray paper feed roller [B] to the right while releasing the
hook.
4. Remove the bypass tray paper feed roller [A].
334
Duplex Unit
Duplex Unit
Duplex unit
1. MP 501/601 only) Remove the ARDF unit. (page 385)

2. Remove the left lower cover. (MP 501/601: page 235, SP 5300/5310: page 270)
3. Remove the controller box. (MP 501/601: page 350, SP 5300/5310: page 354)
4. Remove the PSU fan. (page 383)
5. Remove the connector cover [A] from the rear side of the machine. (hook×1)
• When removing the connector cover, insert the flathead screwdriver into [A] and release the
hook of the connector cover.
335
336
Duplex Unit
7. Release the harness [A] from the harness guide.
8. Remove the ground screw [A] and disconnect the two connectors.
• When installing, wind the harness [A] around the clamp [B] twice, as shown below.
337
338
Duplex Unit
10. Remove the PSU [A] and bracket [B] from the mainframe. (hook×3)
339
12. Close the front cover [A].
13. Stand the main unit front side up.
340
Duplex Unit
14. Remove the bottom plate [A].
15. Remove the bottom plate [A].
341
16. Remove the wire cover [A]. (hook×2)
18. Remove the seven screws from the duplex unit [A].
342
Duplex Unit
19. Remove the duplex unit [A] while removing the shaft [B] from the coupling [C].
343
Drive Unit
Paper Feed Motor
1. Remove the IOB. (MP 501/601: page 370, SP 5300/5310: page 371)
3. Remove the harness from the harness guides of the bracket [A].
344
Drive Unit
5. Remove the paper feed motor [A].

MP 501/601
SP 5300/5310
345
Main Drive Unit
1. Remove the IOB. (MP 501/601: page 370, SP 5300/5310: page 371)
2. Remove the PSU. (page 378)
346
Drive Unit
3. Remove the harness from the harness guide of the bracket [A].
347
5. Remove the main drive unit [A].
Main Motor
1. Remove the main drive unit. (page 346)

2. Remove the clip [A] and gear [B] from the backside of the main drive unit [C].
3. Remove the main motor [A].
348
Drive Unit
Drum Motor
1. Remove the main drive unit. (page 346)

2. Remove the clip [A] and gear [B] from the backside of the main drive unit [C].
3. Remove the drum motor [A].
349
Electrical Components
Controller Box
Controller Box (MP 501/601)
1. Remove the right lower cover. (page 227)

3. Disconnect the USB connector [A] of the operation panel.
350
4. Disconnect the two flat cables and two connectors.
• When disconnecting the flat cable [A], pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
351
• The screw [B] is a tapping screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the
controller box.
352
7. Release the hook [A], and then remove the controller box [B] by rotating it counter-
clockwise.
• When installing the controller box [A], make sure to secure the harness and flat cable to the
• When installing the bracket [A] of the controller box [B], do not interpose the harness and the
flat cable between the bracket and the controller box.
353
Controller Box (SP 5300/5310)
1. Remove the right cover. (page 264)

354
355
controller box.
• When installing the controller box [A], make sure to secure the harness and flat cable to the
• When installing the bracket [A] of the controller box [B], do not interpose the harness and the
flat cable between the bracket and the controller box.
356
Controller Board
Controller Board (MP 501/601)
• Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can
damage NVRAM data.

2. Disconnect the connector on the controller box [A].
357
3. Remove the fax unit [A].
4. Remove the cap [A].
358
359
8. Remove the controller board [A] from the BiCU [B].
360
9. Remove the two guide rails [A] from the controller board [B]. (hook×2)
10. Remove the two NVRAMs [A] from the old controller board and install them on the new
controller board.
• Make sure the NVRAM [A] is installed at the correct mounting location and orientation. Install the
NVRAM so that the indentation on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark [B] on the controller
board.
• Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the controller board and NVRAM.
Controller Board (SP 5300/5310)
• Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can
damage NVRAM data.
361
362
6. Remove the controller board [A] from the BiCU [B].
7. Remove the two guide rails [A] from the controller board [B]. (hook×2)
363
8. Remove the two NVRAMs [A] from the old controller board and install them on the new
controller board.
• Make sure the NVRAM [A] is installed at the correct mounting location and orientation. Install the
NVRAM so that the indentation on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark [B] on the controller
board.
• Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the controller board and NVRAM.
NVRAM on the controller board
• SC195 (Machine serial number error) will be displayed if you forget to attach the NVRAM.
• If you mounted the NVRAM in the wrong direction, it will cause a short circuit in the controller
board and the NVRAM, and each component will need to be replaced.
• Installing a new NVRAM initializes SPs and issues an SC. Reset the SC with the procedure below.
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (Factory SP Settings). This report comes with the
machine. (page 30)
If you do not have the SMC report, enter the factory settings while referring to the "Factory SP
Settings" (page 215).
2. Output the SMC log using one of the following methods:
To print SMC log data, execute SP5-990-001.
To save SMC log data to an SD card, execute SP5-992-001 (SMC List Card Save Function).
4. Insert a blank SD card in the SD Card Slot 2, and then turn ON the main power.
5. Use SP5-824-001 to upload the NVRAM data from the controller board.
364
6. Make sure the customer has a backup of their address book data. If not, obtain the
backup by referring to SP5-846-051.
• The address data stored in the machine will be discarded later during this procedure. So be
sure to obtain a backup of the customer’s address book data.
• Note that the counters for the user will be reset when doing the backup/restore of the address
book data.
• If the customer have a backup of the address book data, use their own backup data for
restoring. This is because there is a risk that the data cannot be backed up properly
depending on the NVRAM's condition.
7. For MP 501/601, do the following steps.
1. Print the Box List with the User Tools.
• [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] -> [General Settings] -> [Box
Setting: Print List]
2. Print the Special Sender List by pressing these buttons in the following order.
• [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Reception Settings] -> [Program Special Sender:
Print List]
3. Write down the following fax settings.
• [Receiver] in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] -> [Reception
Settings] -> [Reception File Settings] -> [Forwarding].
• [Notify Destination] in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] ->
[Reception Settings] -> [Reception File Settings] -> [Store].
• [Specify User] in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] -> [Reception
Settings] -> [Stored Reception File User Setting].
• [Notify Destination] in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] ->
[Reception Settings] -> [Folder Transfer Result Report].
• Specified folder in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] -> [Send
Settings] -> [Backup File TX Setting].
• [Receiver] in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] -> [Reception
Settings] -> [Reception File Settings] -> [Output Mode Switch Timer].
• [Store: Notify Destination] in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] -
> [Reception Settings] -> [Output Mode Switch Timer].
• All the destination information shown on the display.
• In the fax settings, address book data is stored with entry IDs, which the system internally
assigns to each data. The entry IDs may be changed due to re-assigning in backup/
restore operations.
365
4. Make sure that there is no transmission standby file. If any standby file exists, ask the customer
to delete it or complete the transmission.
8. Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord.
9. Turn ON the main power again to discharge the residual charge.
10. Replace the NVRAM with a new one.
• For SP 5300/5310, SC995 will be displayed after turning ON the main power.
• For MP 501/601, SC995 might be internally issued after turning ON the main power.
• After turning ON the main power, SC870 will occur and the address book data will be
cleared.
12. For MP 501/601, change the following SP settings for the operation panel after turning
ON the main power.
• SP5-748-101: (OpePanel Setting: Op Type Action Setting): Change bit 0 from "0" to "1".
• SP5-748-201: (OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel Connect Setting): Change the value from
"0" to "1".
13. For MP 501/601, change the Flair API SP values.
• SP5-752-001 (Copy FlairAPIFunction Setting): Change bit 0 from "0" to "1".
• SP1-041-001 (Scan:FlairAPI Setting) in Scanner SP: Change bit 0 from "0" to "1".
• SP3-301-001 (FAX:FlairAPI Setting) in Fax SP: Change bit 0 from "0" to "1".
14. Turn OFF/ON the main power with the SD card where the NV-RAM data has been
uploaded in SD slot 2.
15. Download the NV-RAM data stored in the SD card to the brand-new NV-RAM using
SP5-825-001 (NV-RAM Data Download).
• The download will take a few minutes.

16. Turn OFF the main power and remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
18. Restore the original settings of the following SPs, by referring to the SMC data obtained in
step 2.
• SP5-825-001 does not download the following SP data to the new NV-RAM. You must set
them manually.
• SP5-985-001(Device Setting: On Board NIC) (MP 501/601 only)
• SP5-985-002(Device Setting: On Board USB) (MP 501/601 only)
366
• SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Settings)

• SP5-730-001 (Extended Function Setting: JavaTM Platform setting) (MP 501/601 only)
19. For MP 501/601, if the security functions (HDD Encryption and HDD Data Overwrite
Security) were applied, set the functions again.
20. Ask the customer to restore their address book. Or restore the address book data using
SP5-846-052 (UCS Setting: Restore All Addr Book), and ask the customer to ensure the
address book data has been restored properly.
• If you have obtained a backup of the customer’s address book data, delete the backup
immediately after the NVRAM replacement to avoid accidentally taking out the customer’s
data.
21. Output the SMC log using one of the following methods:
To print SMC log data, execute SP5-990-001.
To save SMC log data to an SD card, execute SP5-992-001 (SMC List Card Save Function).
• Check that the counters are reset.

22. For MP 501/601, make sure that the list output in steps 7-1 through steps 7-3 matches the
destination information in the machine. If not, set it to the setting before replacement.
• Try the following if NVRAM upload (SP5-824-001) or download (SP5-825-001) cannot be

done.
• Check the SP values that changed on the SMC you printed out in step 2. Adjust the
values manually. Make sure that the values of SP5-045-001 (MP 501/601 only) and
SP5-302-002 are the same as before replacing.
• If a message tells you need an SD card to restore displays after the NVRAM replacement,
create a "SD card for restoration" and restore with the SD card. Refer to the following.
• MP 501/601: page 188 "Encryption Key Restoration"
• SP 5300/5310: page 192 "Encryption Key Restoration"
BiCU
• Fuse condition on the BiCU is below.
367
Address MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310
FU1 5A 76V T0.5A 63V
1. Remove the controller board with the BiCU from the controller box.
• MP 501/601: (page 357)
• SP 5300/5310: (page 361)
2. Remove the BiCU [A] from the controller board [B].
3. Remove the NVRAM [A] from the old BiCU and attach it to the new BiCU.
• Attaching the used NVRAM to the new BiCU allows users to use old data such as SP settings.
• Make sure the serial number is input in the machine for the NVRAM data with SP5-811-004.
If not, SC995-001 occurs. Install a NVRAM [A] so that the indentation [B] on the NVRAM
corresponds with the mark on the BiCU. Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both
the BiCU and NVRAM.
368
Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BiCU
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (Factory SP Settings). This report comes with the
machine. (page 30)
If you do not have the SMC report, enter the factory settings while referring to the "Factory SP
Settings" (page 215).
2. Output the SMC data ("ALL") using SP5-990-001/SP5-992-001.
4. Insert a blank SD card in the SD Card Slot 2, and then turn ON the main power.
5. Use SP5-824-001 to upload the NVRAM data from the BiCU.
6. Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord.
7. Replace the NVRAM on the BiCU with a new one.
• Install a new NVRAM [A] so that the indentation [B] on the NVRAM corresponds with the
mark on the BiCU. Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the BiCU and
NVRAM.
8. Plug in the power cord, and then turn ON the main power.
• When the main power is turned ON, SC195-00 appears. Continue with the following steps.
• After changing the EEPROM, some SPs do not have the correct values.
• Because of this, step 9 must be done.
369
9. Set the machine serial number SP5-811-001, area selection SP5-996-001, CPM set
SP5-882-001.
• For information on how to configure the above SPs, contact the supervisor in your branch
office.
11. Execute SP5-801-002 "Memory Clear Engine".
12. Turn OFF the main power, and then turn it back ON.
13. From the SD card where you saved the NV-RAM data in step 5, download the NV-RAM
data with SP5-825-001.
14. Turn OFF the main power, and then remove the SD card from SD slot 2.
16. Check the SMC report (Factory SP Settings) from step 1, and set the user tool and SP
settings so they are the same as before.
IOB
IOB (MP 501/601)

2. Remove the bracket [A]. (hook×2)
370
3. Remove the IOB [A].
4. Remove the NVRAM [A] from the old IOB and attach it to the new IOB.
• Install a NVRAM [A] so that the indentation [B] on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark on
the IOB. Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the IOB and NVRAM.
IOB (SP 5300/5310)
371
2. Disconnect the two connectors, and then release them from the harness guides.
3. Remove the bracket [A]. (hook×2)
4. Disconnect the two flat cables.
372
5. Remove the IOB [A].
6. Remove the NVRAM [A] from the old IOB and attach it to the new IOB.
• Install a NVRAM [A] so that the indentation [B] on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark on
the IOB. Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the IOB and NVRAM.
Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the IOB
RTB 40 If the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the IOB needs to be replaced, contact your supervisor to acquire the new
This section NVRAM (EEPROM) with the information below.
was replaced
373
• Machine Serial Number
Connect-Left PCB
1. Remove the laser unit. (MP 501/601: page 297, SP 5300/5310: (page 300)
2. For SP 5300/5310, remove the left upper cover. (page 268)
3. Disconnect the flat cable and harness from the Connect-Left PCB [A].
4. Disconnect the connector from the left side of the machine.
374
5. Release the harness from the harness guides of the laser fan unit [A].
6. Remove the laser fan unit [A]. (hook×1)
7. Remove the Connect-Left PCB [A].
375
Fusing Thermistor Connection PCB

• MP 501/601: Paper exit tray (page 248)
• SP 5300/5310: Upper cover (page 256)
2. Remove the screw which is fixing the fusing thermistor connection PCB [A].
3. Turn over the fusing thermistor connection PCB [A], and then disconnect the flat cable and
connectors.
376
Power Pack
1. Remove the duplex unit. (page 335)

2. Remove the power pack [A]. (hook×2)
• When removing the power pack, disconnect two connectors from back side of the power pack [A].
377
• When installing the power pack, insert the actuator [A] through the hole [B] of the power pack [C].
PSU
RTB 32
Add caution 1. Remove the controller box (MP 501/601: page 350, SP 5300/5310: page 354)
378
3. Remove the ground screw [A] and release the two connectors.
• When installing, wind the harness [A] around the clamp [B] twice, as shown below.
379
5. Remove the PSU [A] and bracket [B] from the mainframe. (hook×3)
380
6. Remove the PSU [A] from the bracket [B].
HDD (MP 501/601 Only)
• Before replacing the HDD, copy the address book data to an SD card with SP5-846-051 if
possible.
• If the customer uses the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19, NFC Card Reader Type M24, or
OCR Unit Type M13, these applications must be installed again.
1. Remove the controller board with the BiCU. (page 357)

2. Remove the HDD with the bracket [A] from the controller box [B]. (hook×2)
381
3. Remove the HDD [A] from the HDD bracket.
Adjustment after Replacement
1. Execute SP5-832-001 to initialize the HDD.

Initialization should be performed for the HDD which has already been formatted before.
2. If applicable, execute SP5-846-052 to restore the address data from SD card to the HDD.
382
Fans
Fans
PSU Fan
1. Remove the right lower cover. (MP 501/601: page 227, SP 5300/5310: page 264)
2. Disconnect the connector of the PSU fan [A] from the right side of the machine.
3. Release the hook [A] by lifting the fan bracket [B]. (hook×1)
4. Remove the PSU fan with the bracket [A]. (hook×2)
383
5. Remove the PSU fan [A] from the bracket. (hook×3)
Direction of Installing the Fans
384
ARDF (MP 501/601 Only)

ARDF Unit
1. Remove the right upper cover. (page 226)

2. Remove the ground screw and release the clamp from the rear side of the machine.
3. Release the harness from the harness guides and clamp.
385
4. Disconnect the three connectors.
5. Open the ARDF [A].
6. Remove the ARDF unit [A] by lifting it up.
386
ARDF Paper Feed Roller, ARDF Pickup Roller
1. Open the ARDF upper cover [A].
2. Rotate the lock lever [A] to the unlock position. (hook×1)
387
3. Remove the ARDF paper feed roller and ARDF pickup roller [A].
ARDF Friction Pad
1. Remove the ARDF paper feed roller and ARDF pickup roller. (page 387)
2. Remove the ARDF friction pad [A]. (hook×2)
388
ARDF Inverter Motor
2. Remove the ARDF rear cover [A]. (hook×4)
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the ARDF rear cover when you remove or install the
ARDF rear cover.
389
3. Remove the ARDF inverter motor [A].
ARDF Paper Feed Motor, ARDF Paper Transport Motor
390
2. Remove the ARDF rear cover [A]. (hook×4)
• Be careful not to damage the hooks on the ARDF rear cover when you remove or install the
ARDF rear cover.
391
3. Disconnect the eight connectors from the rear side of the ARDF.
4. Release the harness from the harness guides.
392
5. Remove the ARDF inverter motor unit [A]. (hook×1)
• The screw [B] is a ground screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing the
ARDF paper feed motor and ARDF paper transport motor.
393
6. Remove the ARDF paper feed motor and ARDF paper transport motor [A].
394
Paper Feed Unit (Paper Feed Unit PB1100)

Paper Feed Roller, Pickup Roller
1. Remove the paper feed tray [A] of the optional paper feed unit by pulling it out.
2. Slide the shaft [A] to the left while pushing the release lever [B].
3. Remove the feed roller holder [A] by sliding it to the left.
395
4. Remove the paper feed roller [A] from the feed roller holder [B]. (hook×1)
5. Remove the pickup roller [A]. (hook×1)
Separation Roller
396
2. Remove the separation roller holder [A].
3. Remove the spring [A].
4. Remove the separation roller [A] by rotating it as shown below.
397
5. Remove the separation roller [A]. (hook×1)
Main Board
1. Uninstall the optional paper feed unit from the main machine.
2. If the optional paper feed unit is installed on the caster table, uninstall it from the caster
table.
398
4. Turn over the optional paper feed unit [A], and then remove the board cover [B].
(hook×2)
5. Remove the main board [A]. (hook×3)
Drive Unit
1. Uninstall the optional paper feed unit from the main machine.
2. If the optional paper feed unit is installed on the caster table, uninstall it from the caster
table.
399
4. Turn over the optional paper feed unit [A], and then remove the board cover [B].
(hook×2)
5. Release the harness of the main board [A] from the harness guides.
400
6. Disconnect the five connectors from the main board [A].
7. Turn over the optional paper feed unit again, and then remove the upper cover [A].
(hook×1)
401
8. Remove the drive unit [A] from the upper cover [B].
• When removing the drive unit [A], remove the coupling [B] from the shaft [C].
402
Service Program Mode

SP Tables

• SP Mode Tables
403
Firmware Update
Overview
In order to update the firmware of this machine, it is necessary to download the latest version of
firmware on a SD card. Insert the SD card in SD Card Slot 2.
Firmware Type
MP 501/601
Firmware type Firmware position Message display
FONT (Font EXP) Controller board GW13e_prt_SAMf
FONT1 (PCL Font) Controller board GW3a_pcl_fntI
FONT2 (PS3 Font) Controller board GW2e_prt_psfnt8

RTB 39 Engine BiCU BRMF1a_eplot
Correction
Engine (IPU) BiCU BRMF1a_eipu
NetworkDocBox Controller board BRMF1a_netfile
Media print JPEG/TIFF (Printer) Controller board BRZMF1e_printer
Web Support Controller board BRZMF1a_web
Network Support Controller board BRZMF1a_net
PowerSaving Sys Controller board BRZMF1e_subcpu
PCL Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PCL
RPCS Controller board BRMF1e_prt_RPCS
PS (PDF) Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PDF
PS3 Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PS3
Web Uapl Controller board BRZMF1a_webua
RFax (Remote Fax) Controller board BRMF1a_fax2
Scanner Controller board BRMF1a_scn
404
Firmware Update
FCU Controller board GW1a_efax_fcu1T
System/Copy Controller board BRMF1a_system
Fax Controller board BRMF1a_fax
Smart Operation Panel System Smart Operation Panel – CPU board M2a_System
CSPF Smart Operation Panel – CPU board M2a_cspf
LegacyUI type-1 Smart Operation Panel – CPU board M2a_LegacyUI
Fax RX File Widget Smart Operation Panel – CPU board M2a_WFaxInfo
Quick Scanner Smart Operation Panel – CPU board M2a_SimpleScan
Quick Copy Smart Operation Panel – CPU board M2a_SimpleCopy
Quick Fax Smart Operation Panel – CPU board M2a_SimpleFax
Stop Widget Smart Operation Panel – CPU board M2a_WStopKey
Eco-friendly Widget Smart Operation Panel – CPU board M2a_WEcoInfo
Standard IC Card Plugin Smart Operation Panel – CPU board M2a_QuickCdAuth
iWnn IME Smart Operation Panel – CPU board M2a_iWnn
SP 5300/5310
FONT (Font EXP) Controller board GW13e_prt_SAMf
FONT1 (PCL Font) Controller board GW3a_pcl_fntI
FONT2 (PS3 Font) Controller board GW2e_prt_psfnt8
RTB 39
Engine BiCU BRP1a_eplot
Correction
Engine (IPU) BiCU BRP1a_eipu
NetworkDocBox Controller board BRMF1a_netfile
Media print JPEG/TIFF (Printer) Controller board BRZMF1e_printer
Web Support Controller board BRZMF1a_web
405
Network Support Controller board BRZMF1a_net
PowerSaving Sys Controller board BRZMF1e_subcpu
PCL Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PCL
RPCS Controller board BRMF1e_prt_RPCS
PS (PDF) Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PDF
PS3 Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PS3
System Controller board BRZP1a_system
• Even when not using a RPCS driver, the XPS driver requires RPCS firmware.
Procedure
• A SD card is a precision device, so when you handle an SD card, respect the following.
• When the power is switched ON, do not insert or remove a card.
• During installation, do not switch the power OFF.
• Since the card is manufactured to high precision, do not store it in a hot or humid location, or in
direct sunlight.
• Do not bend the card, scratch it, or give it a strong shock.
• Before downloading firmware on an SD card, check whether write-protection of the SD card is
canceled. If write-protection is enabled, an error code (error code 44, etc.) will be displayed
during download, and the download will fail.
• Before updating firmware, remove the network cable from this machine.
• If SC818 is generated during software update, switch the power OFF -> ON, and complete the
update which was interrupted.
• During software update, network cables, remove interface cables, wireless boards, etc., (so that
they are not accessed during update).
Update procedure (MP 501/601)
1. First download the software to be updated to the SD card.
406
Firmware Update

4. Insert the SD card [A] straight in the SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
• If the customer has used all of the slots, you have to keep an empty slot for this procedure. Ask
the customer to temporarily remove the SD card in the SD Card Slot 2.
• Check whether the card is properly in the SD Card Slot. When a SD card is inserted, a click is
heard, and it is locked.
• To remove the card, release by pressing once in the set state.
6. Wait until the update screen starts (about 45 seconds).
When it appears, "Please Wait" is displayed.
7. Check whether a program installation screen is displayed. (English display) When two or more
software modules are contained in the SD card, they are displayed as follows.
When two or more software names are displayed
1. Press the module selection button or 10 keypad [1] - [5].

2. Choose the appropriate module. (If already selected, cancel the selection)
407
Operation of keys or buttons
Keys or buttons to press Contents
[Exit] or 10 key [0] Returns to normal screen.
[Start] Key Select all modules.
[Clear/Stop] key Cancel all selection states.
Display contents
On the above screen, two programs, i.e., engine firmware and printer application are
displayed. (The screen may change depending on the firmware or application).
The display contents are as follows:
Display Contents
ROM: Display installed module number / version information.
NEW: Display module number / version information in the card.
* The upper row corresponds to the module number, the lower row corresponds to the
version name.
8. Select the module with the module selection button or 10 key operation. The selected module is
highlighted, and [Verify] and [Update] are displayed.
• Depending on the combination of update software, it may not be possible to select

simultaneously.
408
Firmware Update
Key or button operations
Keys or buttons to press Contents
[Update] or [#] key Update the ROM of the selected module.
[Verify] button or [./*] key Perform verification of the selected module.
9. Press the [Update] or [#] key, and perform software update.

10. During firmware update, a "firmware update/ verification progress screen" is displayed. When
firmware update is complete, a "firmware update end screen" is displayed.
• In the middle row, the name of the module currently being updated is displayed. (in this case,
the printer is being updated)
• In the lower row, a progress bar is displayed in ten steps. (The more *, the more the
progress.)
• When updating the control unit program, since progress cannot be displayed on the screen,
the ROM update process is determined when the LED of the [Start] key changes from red to
green.x
Firmware update end screen
• This screen is displayed when all selected firmware modules are to be updated. "printer"
in the second row shows that the module updated last is the printer. (When more than
one are updated simultaneously, only what was updated last is displayed.)
• When Verify has completed normally, the Update done display of the above screen is
"Verify done." If "Verify Error" is displayed, reinstall the software of the application
displayed in the lower row.
409
11. After turning OFF the main power, remove the SD card from the SD Card Slot 2.
12. Again, turn ON the main power, and check whether the machine is operating normally.
• When the power supply is switched OFF during firmware update, update is interrupted, and the
power is switched ON again, normal operation cannot be guaranteed.
• To guarantee operation, an update error continues to be displayed until update is successful.
• In this case, insert the SD card again, switch the power ON, and continue download of firmware
from the SD card automatically.
• Web access card software: EXJS (EXtended Java Script) is a Type-C ESA application, and like a
conventional Web access card, update using an sdk folder is required.
• The PS3 firmware program is included in the preinstalled PDF firmware.
• In the default state, although the PS3 firmware program is hidden in the disabled state, the function
is enabled by installing the PS3 card.
• (The program installed in the PS3 card is a dongle (key) for enabling PS3 function).
• Due to the above specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM module number /
software version of the PDF firmware at the PS location.
Update procedure (SP 5300/5310)
1. First download the software to be updated to the SD card.

4. Insert the SD card [A] straight in the SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
• If the customer has used all of the slots, you have to keep an empty slot for this procedure. Ask
the customer to temporarily remove the SD card in SD Card Slot 2.
410
Firmware Update
• Check whether the card is properly in the SD Card Slot. When a SD card is inserted, a click is
heard, and it is locked.
• To remove the card, release by pressing once in the set state.
6. Wait until a firmware name is shown on the display (about 1 minute).
• The firmware name is read from inside the firmware. The firmware name is not changed even
if you change the file name on your PC.
7. If the necessary firmware name is shown on the display, check the firmware version with the left-
arrow or right-arrow keys. Pressing the left or right-arrow key shows a firmware name, firmware
version and serial number in order.
8. To use a different firmware, push the up-arrow key or the down-arrow key to find the necessary
firmware.
9. To select the firmware, push the OK key. Make sure that the selected firmware is highlighted.
10. If you update more than one firmware program at the same time, find each of them and select each
of them. Make sure that the selected firmware is high-lighted.
11. To start firmware update, push the "UpDate" key. While each firmware is downloaded, the
underscores on the operation panel are replaced by stars.
12. Wait until the message "Update done" is shown.
13. After turning OFF the main power, remove the SD card.
14. Again, turn ON the main power, and check whether the machine is operating normally.
15. Print the Configuration Page to check that the every firmware is correctly updated:
List/Test Print > Config. Page
• An error code is shown if an error occurs during the download. Error codes have the letter "E" and
a number. If an error occurs, the firmware is not correctly downloaded; see the error code table
(page 412) and do the necessary steps. After this, download the firmware again.
• If firmware update is interrupted by power failure, the firmware is not correctly downloaded. In this
condition, machine operation is not guaranteed. You have to download the firmware again.
411
Error Screens During Updating
EXX shows an error code.

(This error is generated if update was performed when a printer application startup card is removed
after system startup. An error indicating failure of card access is displayed on the screen.)
For error codes, refer to the following table:
Error Code List
Code Contents Solutions
20 Physical address mapping cannot • Switch the main power supply off and on to
be performed. try again.
• Re-insert the SD card to reboot it.
• Replace the controller board if the above
solutions do not solve the problem.
21 Insufficient memory for the • Switch the main power supply off and on to
download try again.
• Replace the controller board if the updating
cannot be done by switching the power off
and on.
23 Error occurred when ROM update Controller program abnormal. If the second
program started attempt fails, replace controller board.
22 Decompression of compressed • Switch the main power supply off and on to

data failed. try again.
• Replace the SD card used for the update.
412
Firmware Update
24 SD card access error • Re-insert the SD card.

• Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• Replace the SD card used for the update.
31 Data incorrect for continuous Insert the SD card with the remaining data
download required for the download, then re-start the
procedure.
32 The SD card used after download • Insert the SD card containing the same
suspension is incorrect. program as when the firmware update was
SD cards are different between suspended, and then switch the main power
the one which was inserted before supply off and on to try again.
power interruption and the one • There is a possibility that the SD card is
which was inserted after power damaged if the update cannot be done after
interruption. the correct SD card has been inserted. In this
case, try again with a different SD card.
Replace all relevant boards if the update is
done for the BiCU and FCU.
Replace the operation panel unit if the
update is done for the operation panel.
33 Card version error. • Install the correct ROM update data for
The wrong card version is each version in the SD card.
downloaded.
34 Destination error. • Install the correct ROM update data for

A card for the wrong destination is each destination (JPN/ EXP/ OEM) in the
inserted. SD card.
35 Model error. • Install the correct ROM update data for

A card for the wrong model is each model in the SD card.
inserted.
413
36 Module error. • Install the program to be updated in

The program to be downloaded advance.
does not exist on the main unit. • There is a possibility that the SD card
The download destination containing the program to be updated has
specified by the card does not not been mounted. Check to confirm that the
match up to the destination for the SD card has been correctly mounted.
main unit’s program. • The SD card is incorrect if the program to be
updated has been correctly installed. In this
case, insert the correct SC card.
38 The version of the downloaded • Make sure that the program to be

program has not been authorized overwritten is the specified version.
for the update.
40 Engine download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• If the download fails again, replace the
controller board and the BiCU.
41 Fax download fails.*1 • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
controller board and the FCU board.
42 Control panel / language • Switch the main power supply off and on to
download fails.*1 try again.
controller board and the operation panel
unit.
43 Printing download fails.*1 • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• The SD card media is damaged if the
update fails again. Replace the SD card
media.
414
Firmware Update
44 The data to be overwritten cannot • Switch the main power supply off and on to
be accessed when controller- try again.
related programs are • Install the correct ROM update data in the
downloaded. SD card.
• Replace the controller board if the data to
be overwritten is contained on the controller
board.
49 Firmware updates are currently • The setting of Update Firmware in the

prohibited. Administrator Tools has been set to [Prohibit]
by an administrator. Amend the setting to
[Do not Prohibit] and try again.
50 The results of the electronic • Install the correct ROM update data in the
authorization check have rejected SD card.
the update data.
57 @Remote is not connected at the • Check the @Remote connection.

date/time reserved for receiving
the package firmware update
from the network. *1
58 Update cannot be done due to a • Check the @Remote connection.

reception route problem. *1
59 HDD is not mounted. *1 • Check the HDD connection.
60 HDD could not be used during the • Try again.

package firmware update. *1 • Replace the HDD if the download fails
again.
61 The module ID for the package • Prepare the correct package files.
firmware update is incorrect. *1
62 The configuration of the package • Prepare the correct package files.

firmware update files is
incorrect. *1
63 Reception fails due to the power • Update is to be done automatically when

off at the reserved date/time of the next reception time has elapsed.
the remote firmware update from
the network. *1
415
64 Reception fails due to the power • Reset the reservation date/time for the
off at the reserved date/time of remote update.
the package firmware update
from the network. *1
65 Reception fails due to the status • Update is to be done automatically when

error of the machine at the the next reception time has elapsed.
reserved date/time of the remote
firmware update from the
network. *1
66 Reception failed due to the status • Reset the reservation date/time for the
error of the machine at the remote update.
reserved date/time of the
package firmware update from
the network. *1
67 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected

information from the Gateway correctly.
fails at the reserved date/time of
the remote firmware update from
the network. *1
68 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected

information from the Gateway correctly.
fails. *1
69 Download fails at the reserved • Check that the network is connected

date/time of the remote firmware correctly.
update from the network.*1
70 Package firmware download from • Check that the network is connected

the network fails.*1 correctly.
71 Network communication error • Check that the network is connected

occurs at the reserved date/time correctly.
of the package firmware update
from the network.*1
72 The setting of @Remote is invalid • Set the setting of @Remote Service in the
at the reserved date/time of the Administrator Tools to [Do not Prohibit].
package firmware update from
the network.*1
416
Firmware Update
*1 The error occurs in MP 501/601 only
• The PDF firmware installed as standard contains a program required to print PS3 data as default.
However, this PS3 program is normally disabled.
• The PS3 firmware is a dongle (key) which enables PS3 data printing functions. When the PS3
firmware is installed, the PS3 program in the PDF firmware is enabled. Due to this specification, the
self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM part number/software version of the PDF firmware
contained in the PS3 program.
417
RFU Updating the Firmware

In this machine, software can be updated by remote control using @Remote.
RFU Performable Condition
RFU is performable for a device which meets the following conditions.

1. The customer consents to the use of RFU.
2. The devise is connected to a network via TCP/IP for @Remote.
418
Package Firmware Update (MP 501/601 Only)
Package Firmware Update (MP 501/601

Only)
• The HDD unit must be installed on the machine to enable the SFU or the package firmware update
via SD card.
Overview
Each firmware module (such as System/Copy, Engine, etc) used to be updated individually. However,
an all-inclusive firmware package (package_ALL) is now available.
There are two ways to update using the firmware package.
• Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)
• Package Firmware Update with an SD card
Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)

• There are two methods for SFU.
• Immediate Update: To update the firmware when visiting
• Update at the next visit: To set the date and time for downloading. The firmware will be
automatically downloaded beforehand and updated at the following visit.
• "Update at the next visit" is recommended since firmware download may take some minutes
due to the network condition.
• SFU requires the connection to @Remote via a device which has the embedded @Remote
communicating function. When a machine is connected to @Remote via an intermediate
device (RC Gate), the SFU function is disabled.
419
Package Firmware Update via an SD Card

Package firmware update can also be performed using the conventional SD card method by
writing the package firmware directly to the SD card.
Types of firmware update files, supported update methods:

SFU SD RFU
Individual firmware N/A Available Available
Package firmware Available Available N/A
Immediate Update
Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to @Remote with a
device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating function.
• If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating (page 412).

2. Touch [Firmware Update].
420
3. Touch [Update].
4. Touch [Execute Update].
5. Touch [YES].
421
6. The following display will be displayed.
• If the error code E66, which indicates that the download of the firmware has failed, is
displayed, implement this procedure from step 1.
• Update will be started automatically after the download is finished.
• When the machine is in the update mode, the automatic update is suspended if a print job is
implemented. After the print job is finished, touch [YES] on the display shown with the
following picture to restart updating.
7. [Update done] is displayed.

• The machine will automatically reboot itself.
422
• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All items to
be updated".
Update at the Next Visit (Reserve)
It is possible to set the machine to download the package firmware which is necessary for SFU in
advance, and then perform the actual installation at the next service visit. This saves waiting time for the
firmware to download at the service visit.
How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (RESERVE)
Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to @Remote with a
device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating function. If an error code is
displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating (page 412).
423

3. Touch [Reserve].
4. Touch [Reservation setting].
5. Enter the dates and times of next visit and start of receiving data.
• "Next time to visit this customer": The package firmware will be automatically downloaded by
this time/date.
424
• "When to receive? (1-7)": The download of the package firmware will begin this number of
days before the next visit.
Successful Download
In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the day before the next
scheduled visit. In the first diagram, the download is successful on the first try. In the second
diagram, the download fails three times and is successful on the fourth try.
• If the firmware download fails or cannot be completed due to the network settings/condition, no
power to the machine, or other reason, the machine will continue retrying every six hours until the
scheduled deadline (up to a maximum of four tries). For example, if the download is set for the day
before the next visit, the machine will attempt the download at 24 hours before the visit, and then
continue trying every six hours (max. four tries total).
• The retry is only performed in cases when the firmware download has failed.
• If the machine is in Energy Saver mode when the download is scheduled to begin, the download
will be performed in the background and the machine/panel will stay in Energy Saver mode.
• The download will continue uninterrupted even if the customer initiates a print job, copy job, fax
receiving or other operation while the download is in progress.
425
• The download will be terminated if the customer turns the main power OFF while the download is
in progress.
• If the download cannot be completed successfully by the time of the next scheduled visit, the
machine will stop trying to download the firmware.
How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE

3. Touch [Reserve].
426
4. Touch [Reserve and received package information].
5. Check the information displayed.

When the package firmware is downloaded successfully, the details of the download result are
displayed as the following picture shows.
• This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been
downloaded. If not, all the data items are indicated with "-".
How to Install Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE
427
3. Touch [Update].
4. Touch [Execute Update].
5. Check the version of the received package firmware, and then touch [YES].
• Update is started.
428
• If the version of the reserved package in the HDD is older than the latest version, the messages
shown in the following picture are displayed.
• If you wish to download the latest version, touch [Execute] beside the message "Download
and update the latest package." Then update of the package firmware will be started.
• If you wish to update using the firmware in the HDD (old version), touch [Execute] beside the
message "Update to the received package."
6. [Update done] message is displayed.
• The machine will automatically reboot itself.
429
be updated".
Update via SD card
Update with an SD card, which is the conventional method, is available if you write the package
firmware to the SD card.
• If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating (page 412).
1. Create a new folder in the SD card, and then name it "package".
430
2. Copy the package firmware (xxxxxxxx.pkg) to this folder.
• If you copy the package firmware into the conventional "romdata" folder, the update will not
work.
• Only one version of the package firmware should be copied into the folder. If you copy
multiple versions of package firmware to the SD card, the machine will select only one version
of the firmware randomly.
4. Insert the SD card which contains the package into the SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
5. Turn ON the main power, and then touch [Update].
• When the SD card contains both a firmware package and one or more modules, the
following display may show up. Select [Package] and touch [OK] to move to step 4 above.
431
6. Update is started automatically after the package firmware download to the HDD has
been completed.
7. When update is completed, "Update done" is displayed.
be updated".
8. Turn OFF the main power, and then pull out the SD card from the SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
432
Updating JavaVM
Updating JavaVM
MP 501/601
Creating an SD Card for Updating
1. Download the update modules from Firmware Download Center. As one of the model
modules, "Java VM v12 UpdateTool" is available for download. (The version differs
depending on the model.)
2. Unzip the downloaded file. Copy the whole "sdk" folder to the root of the SD card directly
below.
• When unzipping the downloaded file, two subfolders ("update" and "sdk") exist in the "sdk"
folder. Rather than just copying the subfolder "sdk", copy the whole folder "sdk".
Updating Procedure
• SD card can be inserted with the machine power off.

• During the updating process, do not turn OFF the main power.
• If you turn OFF the main power during the updating, the machine performance is not guaranteed.
(There is a possibility that an SC and boot failure occurs.)
• If you accidentally turn OFF the main power during the updating, retry the updating procedure
from the beginning. (If the update fails again, you will need to replace the controller board.)
1. If the boot priority application is set to the ESA application, switch to the copy application
in [Function Priority].
• User Tools -> Machine Features -> System Settings -> General Features -> Function Priority
3. Insert the SD card you created into the service slot.
5. After booting Java VM, update of the application is started. "Updating SDK/J" appears in
the banner message of the touch panel display. (Estimated time: about 2 minutes)
433
6. After completing the update and starting the Java VM, "Update SDK/J done SUCCESS
(xx.yy.zz), restore SUCCESS" appear in the banner message of the touch panel display.
After turning OFF the main power, remove the SD card from the slot.
"xx.yy.zz" indicates the firmware version of the Java VM.
When you fail to update, "Update SDK/J done FAIL" is displayed. You can confirm the cause of
the error message below.
8. Return to the previous setting for the boot priority application.
List of Error Messages
Update results are output as a text file on the SD card called "sdkjversionup.log" in the "\sdk \update"
folder.
Result File contents Description of the output
script file = /mnt/sd0/sdk/update/

Boot script path
bootscript
Success Boot scripts processing start time
2012/08/22 17:57:47 start
End time boot script processing, the results
2012/08/22 17:59:47 end SUCCESS
script file = /mnt/sd0/sdk/update/

Boot script path
bootscript
Boot scripts processing start time
Failure 2012/08/22 17:57:47 start
Error message (Possibly multiple)
XXXX Error
End time boot script processing, the results
2012/08/22 17:57:57 end FAIL
Error Message Cause Remedy
PIECEMARK Applied the wrong updating Use the correct updating tool for
Error,machine=XXXXX tool (Using the updating tool of this model.
a different model)
pasePut() - error : The file of the Inadequacy with the SD card Re-create the SD card for
copy origin is not found for updating updating.
Put Error! (Files are missing in the

updating tool)
434
Updating JavaVM
Error Message Cause Remedy
paseCopy() - error : The file of Inadequacy SD card for Inadequacy SD card for
the copy origin is not found. updating updating
Copy Error! (Files in the updating tool are (Files in the updating tool are
missing) missing)
[file name: XX] error,No space Writing destination is full. (The Uninstall the unnecessary SDK
left on device NAND flash memory on the applications.
controller board is full.) If you can not uninstall it,
pasePut() - error : The
implement escalation, stating
destination directory cannot be
the "model name, application
made. configuration, SMC sheet
pasePut() - error : fileCopy (SP5-990-006/024/025),
Error. and error file."
Put Error!
[file name: XX] error,No space Writing destination is full. (The Uninstall the unnecessary SDK
left on device NAND flash memory on the applications.
controller board is full.) If you can not uninstall it,
paseCopy() - error : The
implement escalation stating the
destination directory cannot be
"model name, application
made. configuration, SMC sheet
paseCopy() - error : fileCopy (SP5-990-006/024/025),
and error file."
Error.
Copy Error!
Put Error! *1 Error, not normally expected to If you cannot uninstall it,
occur implement escalation stating the
Copy Error! *1 "model name, application
Delete Error! configuration, SMC sheet
(SP5-990-006/024/025),
[XXXXX] is an unsupported and error file."
command. *1
Without the foregoing error
Version Error
message, only "Put Error /
Copy Error" will be displayed
435
SP 5300/5310
For the SP5300/5310 series, updating Java VM is performed with PC using the update tool.
• Prepare the following items in advance.
• SD memory card reader/writer
• PC
• Updating flow is as follows.
1. Deactivate the SDK applications with Web Image Monitor.
2. Remove the VM CARD Type P8 from the main machine.
3. Update Java VM with PC using the update tool.
4. Install the VM CARD Type P8 to the main machine.
5. Activate the SDK applications with Web Image Monitor.
Deactivating SDK Applications

2. Take a note of the current heap size setting in [Heap / Stack Size Settings].
• [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Extended Feature Settings] -> [Administrator
Tools] -> [Heap / Stack Size Settings]
3. Stop all SDK applications except for Java TM Platform.
1. Display the [Startup Setting] menu.
• [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Extended Feature Settings] -> [Startup
Setting]
2. Check the radio button of the SDK application which status is "Starting Up".
3. Click [Start Up/Stop] to stop the application.
"Stop" is displayed in the status column.
• Do not change the status of Java TM Platform to "Stop".

4. Make sure that "Auto Start" is set to "Off" for each SDK application.
1. Click the [Details] icon ( ) for each SDK application in [Startup Setting].
2. Make sure that "Auto Start" is set to "Off". (Default: On)
5. Turn the main power OFF.
436
Updating JavaVM
7. Remove VM CARD Type P8 from the SD Card Slot 1 [A].
Updating JavaVM
1. Insert VM CARD Type P8 into SD memory card reader/writer of your PC.

2. Check that the SD memory card reader/writer is detected on your PC, and then write
down the drive letter. (If the SD memory card reader/writer is detected as (F:), the drive
letter is "f")
3. Download the update modules from Firmware Download Center.
4. Unzip the downloaded file, and then execute the .exe file.
5. The folder is generated.
6. Execute the .bat file in the folder.
7. Input the drive letter following a message "Please input drive letter of SD card [a - x]: ". (If
the SD memory card reader/writer is detected as (F:), input "f")
8. Press the [Enter] key to start updating Java VM.

It takes 3 minutes to update Java VM.
9. After completing the update, remove VM CARD Type P8 from SD memory card reader/
writer of your PC.
437
10. Insert VM CARD Type P8 into SD Card Slot 1 [A] of the machine.
Activating SDK Applications
1. Turn the main power ON.

3. Change the setting of "Auto Start" to "On" for each SDK application.
1. Display the [Startup Setting] menu.
• [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Extended Feature Settings] -> [Startup
Setting]
2. Click the [Details] icon ( ) for each SDK application.
3. Make sure that "Auto Start" is set to "On". (Default: On)
4. Reconfigure the heap size setting in [Heap / Stack Size Settings].
• [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Extended Feature Settings] -> [Administrator
Tools] -> [Heap / Stack Size Settings]
438
Capturing the Debug Logs

Overview
• This function is not available on models without a hard disk.

• Log related to FAX like FCU debug log is stored only when a machine has FAX.
With this feature, you can save debug logs that are stored in the machine (HDD or operation panel) on
an SD card. It allows the service representative to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
The Capturing Log feature saves debug logs for the following three.
• Controller debug log
• Engine debug log
• FCU debug log (MP 501/601 only)
• Operation panel log
• Communication log (network packet)
• Configuration page
• Printer setting list
• Font list
• Error log
• Fax information (MP 501/601 only)
• SMC
• In older models, a service representative enabled the logging tool after a problem occurred. After
that, when the problem had been reproduced, the service representative was able to retrieve the
debug log.
• However, this new feature saves the debug logs at the time that problems occur. Then you can
copy the logs to an SD card.
• You can retrieve the debug logs using an SD card without a network.
• Analysis of the debug log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the debug
log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by hardware.
439
Types of debug logs that can be saved

Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum storage capacity)
Controller HDD (4 GB)

debug log
• Saved at all times Compressed when written to an SD card from
(GW debug
log) the HDD (from 4 GB to about 300 MB)
• When an engine SC occurs

• When paper feeding/output
Engine debug stop by jams
HDD (Up to 300 times)
log • When the machine covers are
opened during normal
operation
• When a controller SC occurs

• When saving by manual
operation with the Number
keys and the Reset key (Press
Operation Operation panel (400 MB /Up to 30 times)
[Reset], [0], [1] and [C] (hold
panel debug for 3 seconds)) When updating the firmware for the operation
log panel, the debug logs are erased.
• When the operation unit
detects an error
• When the operation panel
detects an error
• Debug logs are not saved in the following conditions.

• When there is no HDD.
• While erasing all memory
• While data encryption equipment is installed
• While changing the firmware configuration
• Forced power OFF (accidentally disconnecting the outlet)
• Engine debug log in shutdown
• When the power supply to the HDD is off because of energy saving (engine OFF mode /STR
mode)
440
Security of the Operation Log
The following operation logs related to security are not saved.

• User ID
• Password
• IP address
• Telephone number
• Encryption key
• Transition to SP mode
Also the following operation logs are not saved.
• Soft keyboard on the touch panel display
• External keyboard
Retrieving the Debug Logs
• Retrieve debug logs to identify the date of occurrence of the problems and to find details of the
problems
• e.g.: At around 8:00 am on March 10, an engine stall occurred. The operation panel does not
respond. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
• You need to retrieve the debug logs dating back three days from the date of the problem.
• Analysis of the debug log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the debug
log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by hardware.
Procedure for Retrieving the Debug Log
1. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot.

MP 501/601:
RTB 33
The procedure Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the operation panel.
was modified
SP 5300/5310:
2. Insert the SD card into the SD Card Slot 2 (lower) [A].
441
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Set the start date of the log with SP5-857-101 (Start date of debug log output)
e.g.: March 28, 2013: input 20130328 (yyyymmdd)
• Set the date three days earlier than the occurrence of the problems.
4. Set the end date of the log with SP5-857-102 (End date of debug log output)
e.g.: March 31, 2013: input 20130331 (yyyymmdd)
5. Execute SP5-857-103 (Get a debug log of all) to write the debug log to the SD card.
6. If the transfer is finished successfully, "completed" is displayed.
• The approximate time it takes to transfer the debug log is as follows. Transfer time may be
affected by the type or format of the SD card. (It is recommended that you format the SD card
using the Panasonic SD Formatter (freeware)).
• Controller debug log (GW debug log): 2 - 20 minutes
• Engine debug log: 2 minutes
• Operation panel log: 2 - 20 minutes
7. Make sure that the SD card access LED is off, then remove the SD card.
• If "failed" appears on the operation panel, turn the main power OFF, and then recover from step 1
again.
The debug logs are saved with the following file names.
Controller debug log (GW /LogTrace/machine number/watching/

debug log) yyyymmdd_hhmmss_unique identification number.gz
Engine debug log /LogTrace/machine number/engine/yyyymmdd_hhmmss.gz
FCU debug log (MP 501/601

/LogTrace/machine number/fculog/yyyymmdd_hhmmss.gz
only)
442
/LogTrace/machine number/opepanel/
Operation panel og
yyyymmdd_hhmmss.tar.gz
Communication log (network /LogTrace/machine number/packet_log/

packet) yyyymmdd_hhmmss.gz
/LogTrace/machine number/gps/ConfigrationPage/
Configuration page
ConfigrationPage_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.csv
• /LogTrace/machine number /gps/PrintSettingList/

PrintSettingList_RPGL_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
Printer setting list
• /LogTrace/machine number/gps/PrintSettingList/
PrintSettingList_RTIFF_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.csv
• /LogTrace/machine number/gps/FontPage/
FontPage_PCL_the page number_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.jpg
Font list
FontPage_PDF_the page number_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.jpg
FontPage_PS_the page number_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.jpg
/LogTrace/machine number/gps/ErrorLog/
Error log
yyyymmdd_hhmmss.csv
Fax information (MP 501/601

/LogTrace/machine number/faxreport/yyyymmdd_hhmmss.csv
only)
/LogTrace/machine number/smc/machine
SMC
number_5992XXX_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.csv
443
NVRAM Data Upload/Download

Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card
Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
• This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
• Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked.
1. Execute SP5-990-001 (SP Print Mode: All (Data List)) before you turn OFF the main
power. You will need a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
3. Remove the controller cover. (MP 501/601: page 254, SP 5300/5310: page 279)
4. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2 (lower) [A].
MP 501/601
SP 5300/5310

6. Press [Execute] in SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload).
444
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
7. The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload
procedure is finished. The file is saved to the path and the following filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number "K5000017114":
NVRAM\K5000017114.NV
8. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds
the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded.
• You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM
Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
• The NVRAM data download may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the
connection between the controller and BiCU is defective.
• Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
• Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
• Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the NVRAM
data.

MP 501/601
SP 5300/5310
445

5. Press [Execute] with SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Data Download).
• The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine for
the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the serial numbers do not
match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• C/O, P/O Count (MP 501/601 only)
446
UP/SP Data Import/Export

Overview
Import/export conditions
Import/export is possible between devices only if their model type, region of use.
UP Data Import/Export (MP 501/601)
Data that can be imported and exported
• Copier / Document Server Features

• Printer Features
• Scanner Features
• Facsimile Features
• Browser Features
• Program (Document Server)
• Program (Copier)
• Program (Scanner)
• Web Image Monitor Setting
• Web Service Settings
• System Settings
• Screen Features
• Home screen customization settings *1
*1 Wallpaper cannot be exported if "Live Wallpapers" is selected.
Data that cannot be imported or exported
• Some System Settings *1 *2

*1 The setting for the date, settings that require the device certificate, and settings that need to be
adjusted for each machine (for example, image adjustment settings) cannot be imported or
exported.
*2 Settings only for executing functions and settings only for viewing cannot be imported or
exported.
447
• Extended Feature Settings

• Address book
• Programs (fax function)
• Programs (printer function)
• Settings that can be specified via telnet
• @Remote-related data
• Counters
• Settings that can only be specified via Web Image Monitor or Web Service (for example, Bonjour,
SSDP setting)
Exporting Device Information
This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges.

When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the operation panel.
2. Log in from the operation panel as an administrator with all privileges.
6. Press [Device Setting Information: Export (Memry Strge Devc)].
448
7. Set the export conditions.
• Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device Unique
Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
• Specify an encryption key.
8. Press [Run Export].
9. Press [OK].
10. Press [Exit].
11. Log out.
• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
• When device Information is periodically imported, it is necessary to create the device setting
information file with special software and store it on the web server.
Importing Device Information

Import device information saved on an SD card.
2. Log in from the operation panel as an administrator with all privileges.
6. Press [Device Setting Information: Import (Memry Strge Devc)].
449
7. Configure the import conditions.
• Press [Select] of the "Device Setting Info. File" to select the file(s) to import.
• Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device Unique
Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
• Enter the encryption key that was specified when the file was exported.
8. Press [Run Import].
9. Press [OK].
10. Press [Exit].
The machine restarts.
• If import or export fails, you can check the log for the error. The log is stored in the same location
as the exported device setting information file.
UP Data Import/Export (SP 5300/5310)
• Paper Input
• Maintenance
• System
• Print Settings
• Security Options
• Remote Services
• Host Interface
• Web Image Monitor Setting
450
• Web Service Settings
Data that cannot be imported or exported
• Address book
• Programs (printer function)
• Settings that can be specified via telnet
• RICOH @Remote-related data
• Counters
• Settings that can only be specified via Web Image Monitor or Web Service (for example, Bonjour,
SSDP setting)
• Settings for the date and time
• Settings that require the device certificate
• Settings that need to be adjusted for each printer (for example, image adjustment settings)
• Settings exclusively for executing functions and settings exclusively for viewing



4. Press the [Menu] key.
5. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges.
6. Select [Device Setting Information] -> Press [OK]
7. Select [DevSettgInfo: Exp (MemDev)] -> Press [OK]
451
8. Select [Device Unique Information] -> Press [OK]

9. Select [Include] or [Exclude] -> Press [OK]
If [Include] is selected, the device unique information (IP address, host name, fax number, etc) is
included in the exporting device information.
10. Select [Enter Encryption Key] -> Press [OK]
11. Select [Yes] -> Press [OK]
12. Select [Enter] -> Enter an encryption key. -> Select [Accept]
13. Select [Enter] -> Re-enter the encryption key. -> Select [Accept]
14. Select [Export] -> [Export]
15. When the confirmation screen appears, select [Yes].
16. Make sure the message regarding that the exporting process being successfully
completed appears. -> Select [Exit]
17. Log out.
• When device Information is periodically imported, it is necessary to create the device setting
information file with special software and store it on the web server.



4. Press the [Menu] key.
452
5. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges.

6. Select [Device Setting Information] -> Press [OK]
7. Select [DevSettgInfo: Exp (MemDev)] -> Press [OK]
8. Select [Device Unique Information] -> Press [OK]
9. Select [Include] or [Exclude] -> Press [OK]
If [Include] is selected, the device unique information (IP address, host name, fax number, etc) is
included in the importing device information.
10. Select [Enter Encryption Key] -> Press [OK]
11. Select [Yes] -> Press [OK]
12. Select [Enter] -> Enter an encryption key. -> Select [Accept]
13. Select [Enter] -> Re-enter the encryption key. -> Select [Accept]
14. Select [Export] -> [Export]
15. When the confirmation screen appears, select [Yes].
16. Make sure the message regarding that the exporting process being successfully
completed appears. -> Select [Exit]
17. Log out.
• If import or export fails, you can check the log for the error. The log is stored in the same location
as the exported device setting information file.
SP Data Import/Export (MP 501/601)
• System SP
• Printer SP
• Fax SP
• Scanner SP
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-001 (Import/Export: Export)
453
4. Select "Target" SP settings (System/Printer/Fax/Scanner/Smart Operation Panel) to be

exported.
5. Select "Option" settings (Unique/Secret).
Item Specification Note
Unique Unique Unique information that can be updated

information of the #1. Items that are to be used to identify the machine.
machine is
Example: Network Information/ Host name / Information
included in the
related to fax number /Mail address assigned to the machine
exported file if
you select #2. Items for specifying the options equipped on the machine.
"Unique" setting. Example: Lot number for developer
Unique information that cannot be updated
#1. Items that may cause a problem if imported
Example: Serial number / Information related to @Remote
#2. Items for managing the history of the machine
Example: Time and date / Counter information / Installation
date
#3. Setting values for the Engine
Secret Secret Secret information

information is #1. Data that cannot be exported without being encrypted.
exported if you
(Exported data is encrypted.)
select "Secret"
setting. Example: Password / Encryption key / PIN code
#2. Confidential information for the customer
Example: User name / User ID / Department code / Mail
address / Phone number
#3. Personal information
Example: Document name / Image data
#4. Sensitive information for the customer
Example: MAC address / Network parameters
* The IP address is exported when both 'Unique' and 'Secret' are selected.
454
6. Select "Crypt config" setting (Encryption).
Encryption Select whether to If the encryption function is used, setting of an

encrypt or not when encryption key is required by direct input.
exporting. • Type the arbitrary password using the soft
If you push the keyboard
"Encryption" key, you • Can enter up to 32 characters
can export secret
information.
7. Press [EXECUTE].
8. Press [OK].
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-101(Import/Export: Import)
4. Select a unique setting.
5. Press [Encryption Key], if the encryption key was created when the file was exported.
6. Select an encryption setting.
Unique If you want to apply the unique information Refer to the above information.
to the target machine, select the "Unique"
key.
Encryption If an encrypted file is selected as the import

file, this setting is required.
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].
455
SP Data Import/Export (SP 5300/5310)
• Service SP
• Engine SP


4. Enter SP mode.
5. Select SP5-749-001 (Import/Export: Export).
6. If you want to include the unique information in the exported file, select [Unique].
7. Select [Encryption] -> Enter an encryption key. -> Select [Accept]
8. Press [EXECUTE].
9. Press [OK].
456

4. Enter SP mode.
5. Select SP5-749-101 (Import/Export: Import).
6. If you want to include the unique information in the imported file, select [Unique].
7. Select [Encryption] -> Enter an encryption key. -> Select [Accept]
8. Press [EXECUTE].
9. Press [OK].
Possible solutions for import/export problems
The access log file is created when export/import is executed. The file is stored in the same location as
the exported device setting information file.
If an error occurs, check the log's result code in the access log file first. Values other than 0 indicate that
an error occurred.
The result code will appear in the circled area illustrated below.
- Example of a log file
457
If you cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code, note down the
error log entry, then contact your supervisor.
Result Code Cause Solutions
2 (INVALID REQUEST) A file import was Import files exported from the same model
attempted between with the same device configurations.
different models or
machines with different
device configurations.
4 (INVALID OUTPUT Failed to write the device Check whether the destination device is
DIR) information to the operating normally.
destination device.
7 (MODULE ERROR) An unexpected error Switch the power off and then back on, and
occurred during import then try the operation again. If the error
or export. persists, contact your supervisor.
8 (DISK FULL) The available storage Execute the operation again after making sure
space on the external there is enough storage space.
medium is insufficient.
9 (DEVICE ERROR) Failed to write or read Check whether the path to the folder for
the log file. storing the file or the folder in which the file is
stored is missing.
10 (LOG ERROR) The hard disk is faulty. Contact your supervisor.
458
Result Code Cause Solutions
20 (PART FAILED) Failed to import some The reason for the failure is logged in
settings. "NgCode". Check the code.
Reason for the Error (Ng-Name)
2. INVALID VALUE
The specified value exceeds the allowable
range.
3. PERMISSION ERROR
The permission to edit the setting is missing.
4. NOT EXIST
The setting does not exist in the system.
5. INTERLOCK ERROR
The setting cannot be changed because of the
system status or interlocking with other
specified settings.
6. OTHER ERROR
The setting cannot be changed for some other
reason.
21 (INVALID FILE) Failed to import the file Check whether the file format is correct.
because it is in the wrong The import file should be a CSV file.
format in the external
medium.
22 (INVALID KEY) The encryption key is not Use the correct encryption key.
valid.
• When exporting device information from the control panel, the data can be saved only on an SD
card.
• The file format for exports is CSV.
459
Address Book Upload/Download

Information List
The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded.

MP 501/601
• Registration No.
• User Code
• E-mail
• Protection Code
• Fax Destination
• Fax Option
• Group Name
• Key Display
• Select Title
• Folder
• Local Authentication
• Folder Authentication
• Account ACL
• New Document Initial ACL
• LDAP Authentication
SP 5300/5310
• Registration No.
• User Code
• Local Authentication/ Authentication Lock-out
• Account ACL
• New Document Initial ACL
• LDAP Authentication
• Group Entry Number
• Group Name
460
Download
1. Prepare a formatted SD card.

2. Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
MP 501/601
SP 5300/5310

8. Execute SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book).
9. Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the main power.
10. Remove the SD card form the SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
• If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an error message is
displayed.
461
• Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it back to your location.
Upload

3. Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD Card Slot 2 (lower) [A].
MP 501/601
SP 5300/5310

6. Execute SP5-846-052 (Restore All Addr Book).
7. Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the main power.
8. Remove the SD card from the SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
• The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.
462
• The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded.

• If there is no data of address book information in the SD card, an error message is displayed.
463
SMC List Card Save Function

Overview
SMC List Card Save
The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the SD-card
inserted into the operation panel SD card slot.
Procedure
MP 501/601

2. Insert the SD card into the operation panel SD card slot. Then turn ON the main power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select [System SP].
5. Select SP5-992 (SP Text Mode).
6. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card.
SP5-992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
464
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
027 SmartOperationPanel SP
028 SmartOperationPanel UP
7. Press [EXECUTE].
8. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving.
465
9. "It is executing it" is shown on the screen while executing.
10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until "Completed" is shown.
• The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.

• Press [CANCEL] to abort executing.
11. Press [Exit] to exit from SP mode.
SP 5300/5310

2. Insert the SD card into the SD Card Slot 2 (lower). Then turn ON the main power.
3. Enter the [Engine] in the SP mode (Service).
4. Select SP5-992 (SP Text Mode).
5. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card and press [OK].
SP5-992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
466
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
6. Press [EXECUTE].
7. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving.
8. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until "Completed" is shown.
• The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.

• Press [CANCEL] to abort executing.
9. Press [End] to exit from SP mode.
467
File Names of the Saved SMC Lists
The SMC list data saved on the SD-card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are as
follows.
Example:
A:
Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)
B:
SP number saved in this file.
First four digits (5992) in this part are fixed. The other one or two digits are the detail SP number(s). In
this case, it is one digit. Therefore, this file is of SP5-992-001 (All data list). See the upper SP table for
the correspondence between SP detail numbers and the contents.
C:
File creation date
Year/Month/Day ("Zero" will be omitted if each is one digit.)
D:
File creation time
Hour/Minute/Second ("Zero" will be omitted if each is one digit.)
E:
File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value)
This part is fixed.
• A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this function is
executed.
• This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation panel SD
card slot.
468
Error Messages
SMC List Card Save error message:

• Failed:
FACTOR: Read-only file system, No space left on device.
If an error occurs, pressing [Exit] will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.
469
Test Pattern Printing

Printing Test pattern: SP2-109
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for design
testing.
• Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, SC will
occur.
MP 501/601
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-109-003 (Pattern Selection).

2. Select the test pattern for print from the list then press [OK].
3. To change the density of the test pattern, select the density with SP2-109-006, then press
[#].
• If select "0" with SP2-109-006, the color adjusted so will not show up in the test pattern.
4. To print, touch [Copy Window], then set settings within the following window for test
print (paper size etc…).
5. Press [Start] to start test print.
6. After checking test pattern, press [SP Mode] to return to SP mode display.
7. Reset all settings to the default values (SP2-109-003, SP2-109-006).
8. Exit SP mode.
No. Pattern No. Pattern
0 None 13 Independent Pattern (4dot)
1 Vertical Line (1 dot) 14 Trimming Area
2 Vertical Line (2 dot) 15 Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
3 Horizontal Line (1 dot) 16 Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
4 Horizontal Line (2 dot) 17 Black Band (Horizontal)
5 Grid Vertical Line 18 Black Band (Vertical)
6 Grid Horizontal Line 19 Checker Flag Pattern
470
Test Pattern Printing
7 Grid Pattern Small 20 Grayscale (Vertical)
8 Grid Pattern Large 21 Grayscale (Horizontal)
9 Argyle Pattern Small 22 Two Beam Density Pattern
10 Argyle Pattern Large 23 Full Dot Pattern
11 Independent Pattern (1dot) 24 All White Pattern
12 Independent Pattern (2dot)
SP 5300/5310
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern).

2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print -> Press [OK].
SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern)
0 None 13 Independent Pattern (4dot)
1 Vertical Line (1 dot) 14 Trimming Area
2 Vertical Line (2 dot) 15 Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
3 Horizontal Line (1 dot) 16 Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
4 Horizontal Line (2 dot) 17 Black Band (Horizontal)
5 Grid Vertical Line 18 Black Band (Vertical)
6 Grid Horizontal Line 19 Checker Flag Pattern
7 Grid Pattern Small 20 Grayscale (Vertical)
8 Grid Pattern Large 21 Grayscale (Horizontal)
9 Argyle Pattern Small 22 Two Beam Density Pattern
10 Argyle Pattern Large 23 Full Dot Pattern
11 Independent Pattern (1dot) 24 All White Pattern
12 Independent Pattern (2dot)
471
3. To change the density of the test pattern, select the density with SP2-109-006.
• If select "0" with SP2-109-006, the color adjusted so will not show up in the test pattern.
4. Enter SP5-990-001, and then press [EXECUTE] to start printing the test pattern.
5. Check the test pattern.
6. Exit SP mode.
472
6. Troubleshooting
Self-Diagnostic Mode
Service Call Codes
Service Call Conditions
SC call or SC alarm in
Pattern Display How to reset
customer support system
The SC is displayed on the Occurrence & alarm count

Execute CE reset SP mode,
operation panel, and the
A and switch main power
machine cannot be used
from OFF to ON. Immediate alarm
(safety-related SC).
Occurrence & alarm count

When a function is
selected, the SC is
displayed on the operation Switch main power from Power OFF ON
B
panel, and the machine OFF to ON.
cannot be used (down-
Alarm count and alarm only
time mitigation).
if recurrence
Occurrence
No display on the
C operation panel, and use Count only logging.
is permitted. Logging count & alarm
count
Occurrence & alarm count

The SC is displayed on the
operation panel, and the Switch main power from Power OFF ON
D
machine cannot be used OFF to ON.
(machine-error SC).
Alarm count and alarm only
if recurrence
473
6. Troubleshooting
• When an ordinary SC (type D) is generated, an automatic reboot is performed. When an event is

reported by the customer support system, even in the event of an ordinary SC, reboot is not
performed. During automatic reboot, a confirmation screen is displayed after the reboot.
• When automatic reboot occurs twice continuously, an SC is displayed without rebooting, and
logging count is performed. Also, when an SMC print is output, an * mark is added alongside the
SC number for clarity.
• Automatic reboot can be enabled or disabled with SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting)
(default value: ON).
SC Logging
When an SC is generated, the "total count value when the SC is generated" and the "SC code" are
logged. However, if the total count value during the SC is the same as last time, logging is not
performed.
Logged data can be checked by outputting an administrative report (SMC print). The SC history is
logged up to the last 10 entries, and if there are more than 10 entries, data are progressively deleted
starting from the oldest.
SC Automatic Reboot (MP 501/601)
When an ordinary SC (pattern D) is generated, automatically reboot is performed. Automatic reboot or

reboot by user operation can be set by SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting out) (default value:
0 "Automatic reboot").
When a type D occurs, automatic reboot is done or the machine display asks the customer if it can
reboot. However, when the SC occurs twice in a short time, the machine sends a report to the @Remote
server without rebooting. This is because just rebooting may not be a good solution if an SC occurs
twice.
When an automatic reboot is performed, a confirmation screen is displayed after reboot. The
confirmation screen can be cancelled by pressing the [OK] key (display is not cancelled only when the
main power switch is switched OFF to ON).
Screen display during reboot
• Status display on the current screen
• Post-processing ...... Post-processing during printing, etc.
• Automatic reboot .... After operation end
Post-processing
474
Self-Diagnostic Mode
Until automatic reboot
• Reset key (Reboot key)

Key to perform reboot
# Cancel key is not displayed.
• Turn on spanner LED (same as when an SC is generated).
Operation during SC reboot
• Timing of SC reboot
When @Remote is enabled, and when a NRS alarm*1 is not generated, the corresponding
SC is the object of an automatic reboot.
*1 NRS alarm: Issued when an ordinary SC (type D) is generated twice while the total counter counts
10 times.
• Time to automatic reboot
Reboot is performed 30 seconds after an engine reboot is possible, after the end of post-
processing during printing, etc.
At that time, a reboot is performed even if the machine is operating. The engine does not start
process control when a reboot is possible.
• Automatic reboot
See the flowchart below.
475
6. Troubleshooting
476
Service Call 101-195

SC100 (Engine: Scanning) (MP 501/601 Only)
SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC101-01 D Lamp Error (Scanning)
The white level peak did not reach the prescribed threshold when the
white guide plate was scanned.
Error detection timing;
• During a scan from the exposure glass:
When the scanning of white guide plate is completed. (when the
SHGH is negated)
• During a scan from ARDF:
During the shading operation.
When the scanning of white guide plate is completed. (when the
SHGH is negated)
• Condensation in scanner unit

• Connector disconnected
• Scanner Carriage defective
• BiCU defective
• Harness defective
• White Guide Plate dirty or defective
• IOB defective
477
6. Troubleshooting
Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC
occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling
the power after each step.
1. Reconnect the connector.
Reconnect the following connectors;
• Scanner Carriage – BiCU connector
• BiCU – IOB connector
2. Check the white guide plate (exposure glass).
Check the white guide plate attached to the exposure glass. If the
white guide plate is in an unusual state, replace the white guide
plate.
3. Scanner carriage defective
Replace the scanner carriage.
4. BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
5. Harness defective
Replace the following harnesses.
• Scanner Carriage – BiCU harness
• BiCU – IOB harness
6. IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
SC101-02 D Lamp Error (Detecting the lighting error)
The white level peak did not reach the prescribed threshold when the
white guide plate was scanned.
Error detection timing; During the scanner adjustment (detecting the
lighting error) at the time of applying power source for scanner (when the
main power is turned ON).
478

• BiCU defective
• White Guide Plate dirty or attachment fault
• IOB defective
• SBU – LEDB connector (SBU side connector on the scanner
carriage)
plate.
4. BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
6. IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
479
6. Troubleshooting
SC102-00 D LED Light Quantity Error
The white level peak exceeded the prescribed threshold when the white
guide plate was scanned.
Error detection timing; During the scanner adjustment (detecting the
lighting error) at the time of applying power source for scanner (when the
main power is turned ON).
• BiCU defective
• IOB defective
480
• SBU – LEDB connector (SBU side connector on the scanner
carriage)
plate.
4. BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
6. IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
SC120-00 D Scanner Home Position error
The home position is not correct when the main power is turned ON, at
the end of a reading process from the exposure glass and ARDF.
481
6. Troubleshooting
• Scanner motor defective

• Scanner HP sensor defective
• SBU defective
• BiCU defective
• Controller board defective
• Scanner motor defective

1. Move the scanner carriage by hand to check whether it is
unusually difficult to move.
2. Check that the scanner driving belt is not disengaged.
3. Reconnect the following connector.
Scanner Motor – Controller Board connector
4. If the connector is broken, shorted, or grounded, replace the
connector.
5. Replace the scanner motor.
• Scanner HP sensor defective

1. Check that the scanner HP sensor is correctly positioned.
2. Reconnect the following connectors.
• Scanner HP Sensor – SBU connector
• SBU – Controller Board connector
3. Replace the scanner HP sensor.
• SBU defective
Replace the scanner unit.
• BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
Replace the controller board.
482
SC141-00 D Black level detection error
The black level cannot be adjusted to the target level at the time of
applying power source for scanner (when the main power is turned ON).

• BiCU defective
• IOB defective
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC
3. BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
5. IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
483
6. Troubleshooting
SC142-00 D White level detection error
The white level cannot be adjusted to the target level during auto gain
control.

• BiCU defective
• White Guide Plate dirty or attachment fault
• SBU – LEDB connector (SBU side connector which is on the
scanner carriage)
plate.
4. BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
6. IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
484
SC144-00 D SBU Communication Error
• The machine cannot detect that the Scanner Carriage is connected.

• The machine cannot communicate with the Scanner Carriage, or the
communication data is incorrect.
• The configuration of FPGA is not completed.
Error detection timing: At the time of applying power source for
scanner (when the main power is turned ON or when the machine
returns from energy save mode)

• BiCU defective
• IOB defective
3. BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
4. IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
485
6. Troubleshooting
SC100 (Engine: Others)
SC195-00 D Machine serial number error
Comparison of the product identification code in the machine serial

number (11 digits).
The product identification code in the machine serial number (11 digits)
does not match.
Re-enter the machine serial number.
486

SC200 (Engine: Image Writing)
SC202-00 D Polygon Motor Error
After Polygon motor is stabilized, the ready signal is at the H level for 20
seconds consecutively.
• Polygon motor defective

• IOB defective
• Polygon motor defective

1. Confirm that the connector between laser unit and IOB is firmly
connected. If necessary, connect the connector all the way in.
connector.
3. Replace the laser unit.
• IOB defective
1. Update the engine software to the latest version.
2. Replace the IOB.
487
6. Troubleshooting
SC220-00 D Leading Edge: LD synchronization detection error
The leading edge LD synchronization detection signal was not output

within the specified time (sec.) while the polygon mirror motor was
operating at normal speed.
Error detection timing; During the startup operation of the machine or
during printing.
• Laser unit defective (Synchronization optical system defective, LDB

defective, LD defective)
• BiCU defective (Image writing ASIC defective)
• IOB defective
• LDB – IOB, IOB – BiCU harness broken, or connector disconnected

2. Check for condensation on the mirrors and lenses.
3. Reconnect the connectors between LDB and IOB, and between IOB
and BiCU.
4. Replace the laser unit.
5. Replace the BiCU.
6. Replace the harness between LDB and IOB, and between IOB and
BiCU.
7. Replace the IOB.
SC270-00 D GAVD Communication Error
The communication is not performed normally between CPU and image

writing ASIC.
Error detection timing; Only when initial setting is executed.
• Image writing ASIC defective

• Interface circuit between CPU and image writing ASIC defective

488

SC300 (Engine: Imaging 1: Charge, Development)
SC303-00 D Charger Current Error
When the charging voltage is applied by changing the voltage in three

levels, the current value is less than 20uA in one of three levels.
• Connector defective or disconnected

• Power pack defective
• IOB defective

Reconnect the following connectors. Then perform a conduction
inspection. If there is no conduction, replace the connector.
• Drum Unit – Power Pack connector
• Power Pack – IOB connector
• Power pack defective
Replace the power pack.
• IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
489
6. Troubleshooting
SC321-00 C Development Unit Non-Installing Error
The sensor output value is 31 or less continuously for 5 seconds.

• Toner density sensor defective
• Connect-Left PCB defective
• IOB defective

• Development Unit – Drum PCB connector
• Drum PCB – Drum Connection PCB connector
• Drum Connection PCB – Connect-Left PCB connector
• Connect-Left PCB – IOB connector
Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the Connect-Left PCB.
• IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
490
SC300 (Engine: Imaging 2: Around the Drum)
SC396-01 D Drum Motor Error 1
The drum motor is not stabilized within 2 seconds after the motor is
activated.
• Connector disconnected or defective

• Drive transmission of the drum motor defective
• Drum motor defective
• IOB defective

Reconnect the following connector. Then perform a conduction
• IOB – Drum Motor connector
Check the gears. If any gears are damaged, replace them.
Replace the drum motor.
• IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
491
6. Troubleshooting
SC396-02 D Drum Motor Error 2
After the drum motor is stabilized, the stable OFF signal is detected for 2

• IOB defective

• IOB – Drum Motor connector
Replace the drum motor.
• IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
492

SC400 (Engine: Imaging 3: Around the Drum)
SC490-00 D Toner Density Sensor Error
The sensor output value is 930 or more continuously for 5 seconds.

• Toner motor defective
• IOB defective

• Toner Density Sensor – Drum PCB connector
connector.
3. Check that the gears and rollers of the development unit are
not damaged and rotate smoothly.
4. Replace the development unit.
493
6. Troubleshooting
• Toner motor defective

1. Check the drive gears can rotate or they are not unusually
loaded. If necessary, replace the drive gear.
• Toner Density Sensor – Drum PCB connector
connector.
4. Replace the drum unit.

• IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
494
SC491-01 D Drum Unit Type Mismatch Error
• Cannot communicate with the EEPROM of the drum PCB normally.

• An incompatible drum unit is installed.

• Drum PCB defective
• IOB defective

• Drum Unit – Drum Connection PCB connector
Replace the drum PCB.
• IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
495
6. Troubleshooting
SC491-02 D Drum Unit Error
• No response from the device in reading/writing for 5 ms or more

and this problem is repeated 5 times consecutively.
• The reading data of 2 locations do not match 8 times consecutively.
• The writing data and reading date do not match 8 times
consecutively.

• IOB defective

connector.
3. Replace the drum unit.

• IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
496

SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport 1: Paper Feed, Duplex, Transport)
SC501-01 D Paper Feed Tray Lift Motor Error (Tray 1)
After the paper feed tray 1 is set, paper feed tray lift sensor does not turn
on within 10 seconds. This SC is issued if a problem is detected four times
consecutively.
• Bottom plate of the paper feed tray defective

• Drive transmission of the paper feed tray lift motor defective
• Paper feed tray lift motor defective
• IOB defective

Check the bottom plate of the paper feed tray. If the bottom plate
does not move smoothly, repair or replace the paper feed tray.
• Paper Feed Tray Lift Motor – IOB connector

Replace the paper feed tray lift motor.
• Engine board defective
Replace the engine board.
497
6. Troubleshooting
consecutively.

• Main board defective

• Paper Feed Tray Lift Motor – Main Board connector

Replace the main board.
498
SC502-02 D Paper Feed Tray Error (Tray 2)
The error signal is detected for 2 seconds consecutively after the paper
feed motor is activated.

• Drive transmission of the paper feed motor defective
• Paper feed motor defective

Replace the paper feed motor.
consecutively.

499
6. Troubleshooting


500


• Paper Feed Motor – Main Board connector
consecutively.

501
6. Troubleshooting



502


consecutively.

503
6. Troubleshooting


504


505
6. Troubleshooting
SC520-01 D Main Motor Error 1
The main motor is not stabilized within 2 seconds after the motor is
activated.
• Main motor defective

• IOB defective

1. Reconnect the following connector. Then perform a conduction
• IOB – Main Motor connector
2. Replace the main motor.
• IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
SC520-02 D Main Motor Error 2
After the main motor is stabilized, the stable OFF signal is detected for 2

• IOB defective

1. Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If any gears are damaged,
replace them.
2. Reconnect the following connector. Then perform a conduction
• IOB – Main Motor connector
3. Replace the main motor.
• IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
506
SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport 2: Fusing, Others)
SC540-01 D Fusing Pressure Release Motor Error 1
The over-current detection signal of the fusing pressure release motor is

detected 20 times consecutively.

• Drive transmission of the fusing pressure release motor defective
• Fusing pressure release motor defective
• IOB defective

• Fusing Pressure Release Motor – Connect-Left PCB connector

Replace the fusing pressure release motor.
• IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
507
6. Troubleshooting
SC540-02 D Fusing Pressure Release Motor Error 2
The position detection sensor is not detected for 30 seconds consecutively

after the fusing pressure release motor is activated.

• IOB defective

• Fusing Pressure Release Motor – Connect-Left PCB connector

Replace the fusing pressure release motor.
• IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
508
SC541-00 D Fusing Thermistor (Center) Disconnected Error
Input from fusing thermistor (center) is 1019 or more (A/D value)

continuously for 4 seconds.
• Connector pin defective

• Triac defective
• Fusing unit defective
• Fusing thermistor connection PCB defective
• IOB defective
• Fusing thermistor (center) defective
• Fusing thermostat defective
• PSU defective

If the I/F connector pins of the fuser unit and the main unit are
deformed owing to foreign materials, replace the connectors or the
units including the connectors.
• Triac defective
Disconnect the power cord and check that the resistance between
terminals T1 and T2 of the triac TRA31 and triac TRA41 on the PSU
are several Mega-Ohms and not shorted. If failed, replace the PSU.
509
6. Troubleshooting

1. Check that no paper jam is present.
• Fusing Unit – Fusing Thermistor Connection PCB
connector
• Fusing Thermistor Connection PCB – IOB connector
connector.
4. Replace the fusing unit.
Replace the fusing thermistor connection PCB.
• IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
• Fusing thermistor (center) defective
Replace the fusing unit.
• Fusing thermostat defective
• Fusing Unit – PSU connector
connector.
• PSU defective
Replace the PSU.
510
SC543-00 D Fusing Thermistor (Center) High Temperature
• The fusing thermistor (center) detects the temperature that exceeds

245 degrees C.
195 degrees C in a heater-off state after the fusing thermistor
(center) detects the temperature of 155 degrees C or less.

• Triac defective
• Fusing thermistor defective
• IOB defective
511
6. Troubleshooting

• Triac defective

• IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
512
SC549-00 D Fusing Lamp Disconnected Error
The fusing thermistor (center) temperature does not reach a temperature

of 100 degrees C within 30 seconds after the machine starts warming up.

• Triac defective
• IOB defective
• PSU defective
• Fusing lamp defective

235 degrees C.
195 degrees C in a heater-off state after the fusing thermistor
(center) detects the temperature of 155 degrees C or less.
513
6. Troubleshooting

• Triac defective

1. Check that no paper jam is present.
• Fusing Unit – Fusing Thermistor Connection PCB
connector
connector.
514

• IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
• PSU defective
• PSU – IOB connector
2. Replace the PSU.
• Fusing lamp defective
SC551-00 D Fusing Thermistor (End) Disconnected Error
Input from fusing thermistor (end) is 1019 or more (A/D value)

continuously for 4 seconds.

• Triac defective
• IOB defective
515
6. Troubleshooting

Reconnect the following connectors.
• Fusing Thermistor – Fusing Thermistor Connection PCB
connector
• Triac defective

• IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
516
SC553-00 D Fusing Thermistor (End) High Temperature
• The fusing thermistor (end) detects the temperature that exceeds 245
degrees C.
• The fusing thermistor (end) detects the temperature that exceeds 195
degrees C in a heater-off state after the fusing thermistor (end)
detects the temperature of 155 degrees C or less.

• Triac defective
• IOB defective
517
6. Troubleshooting

• Triac defective

• IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
518
SC581-00 C Temperature Sensor Disconnected Error
• The average of the output from the temperature sensor is 1019 or

more for 160 ms.
• The average of the output from the temperature sensor is 930 or
more for 5 seconds.
• Temperature sensor defective

• IOB defective

• Temperature Sensor – IOB connector
connector.
3. Replace the temperature sensor.
• IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
519
6. Troubleshooting
SC582-00 C Temperature Sensor Shorted Error
The average of the output from the temperature sensor is 31 or less for 5
seconds.

• IOB defective

• Temperature Sensor – IOB connector
connector.
3. Replace the temperature sensor.
• IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
RTB 56
SC584 added
520
SC500 (Engine: Paper Transport 3: Paper Feed, Duplex, Transport, Fusing)
SC547-00 D Zero Cross Signal Error
While fusing lamp ON/OFF control is performed, the zero cross signal is
not input within 2 seconds consecutively.

• PSU defective
• IOB defective

• PSU – IOB connector
connector.
• PSU defective
Replace the PSU.
• IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
521
6. Troubleshooting

SC600 (Engine: Communication and Others)
SC622-01 D Paper Feed Unit Communication Error (Tray 2)
A communication error is detected from the paper feed unit 2, 10 times

consecutively.
• Paper feed tray 2 defective

• IOB defective

Check the connection between the main machine and paper feed
tray 2.
Reconnect the following connector.
• IOB – Main Board connector
• Replace the main board.
• Replace the IOB.
522

consecutively.

• IOB defective

tray 3.
connector.
3. Replace the main board.
• IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
523
6. Troubleshooting

consecutively.

• IOB defective

tray 4.
connector.
• IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
524

consecutively.

• IOB defective

tray 4.
connector.
• IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
SC636-01
RTB 29
525
6. Troubleshooting
SC665-02 D BiCU – IOB Connection Error
FFC connection error (connector disconnected) between BiCU and IOB is

detected during the startup operation of the engine (when the main
power is turned on or when the machine returns from energy save mode)
• FFC defective or disconnected

• BiCU defective
• IOB defective

2. Reconnect the FFC between BiCU and IOB.
3. Replace the FFC between BiCU and IOB.
5. Replace the IOB.
SC665-21 D BREIT Connection Error
The signal connection error is detected between CPU and Breit during the
startup operation of the engine (when the main power is turned on or
when the machine returns from energy save mode).
BiCU defective

SC667-01 D Master Device Operating Mode Setting Error
The mode setting error of CPU is detected during the startup operation of
the engine (when the main power is turned on or when the machine
returns from energy save mode).
BiCU defective

526
SC667-20 D Breit Operating Mode Setting Error
The mode setting error of Breit is detected during the startup operation of
the engine (when the main power is turned on or when the machine
returns from energy save mode).
BiCU defective

SC668-00 D SPI Communication Error
• The SPI communication error cannot be recovered within 10

seconds after the error occurred.
• The error recovery does not finish normally.
• FFC defective or disconnected

• BiCU defective
• IOB defective

2. Reconnect the FFC between BiCU and IOB.
3. Replace the FFC between BiCU and IOB.
5. Replace the IOB.
SC669 EEPROM Communication Error
SC669-01 D EEPROM OPEN: ID error
SC669-02 D EEPROM OPEN: Channel error
SC669-03 D EEPROM OPEN: Device error
SC669-04 D EEPROM OPEN: Communication abort error
527
6. Troubleshooting
SC669-05 D EEPROM OPEN: Communication timeout error
SC669-06 D EEPROM OPEN: Operation stopped error
SC669-07 D EEPROM OPEN: Buffer full
SC669-08 D EEPROM OPEN: No error code
SC669-09 D EEPROM CLOSE: ID error
SC669-10 D EEPROM CLOSE: No error code
SC669-11 D EEPROM Data write: ID error
SC669-12 D EEPROM Data write: Channel error
SC669-13 D EEPROM Data write: Device error
SC669-14 D EEPROM Data write: Communication abort error
SC669-15 D EEPROM Data write: Communication timeout error
SC669-16 D EEPROM Data write: Operation stopped error
SC669-17 D EEPROM Data write: Buffer full
SC669-18 D EEPROM Data write: No error code
SC669-19 D EEPROM Data read: ID error
SC669-20 D EEPROM Data read: Channel error
SC669-21 D EEPROM Data read: Device error
SC669-22 D EEPROM Data read: Communication abort error
SC669-23 D EEPROM Data read: Communication timeout error
SC669-24 D EEPROM Data read: Operation stopped error
SC669-25 D EEPROM Data read: Buffer full
SC669-26 D EEPROM Data read: No error code
SC669-36 D Verification error
SC669-37 D Error Detection
528
The toner density sensor cannot be recovered after retrying N*1 times for
EEPROM communication error.
(*1 SC669-01 to 26: 3, SC669-36: 2, SC669-37: 1)
• Electrical noise
• EEPROM not installed correctly
• EEPROM defective
• BiCU defective

2. Reinstall the EEPROM on the BiCU.
3. Replace the EEPROM on the BiCU.
RTB 37
SC672
RTB 42
SC672 SC687-00 D PER Not Received Error
RAPI-PER command was not received from the controller within the
specified time (120 sec.) after RAPI-PES (preparation request for image
transmission) is issued.
• Electrical noise
Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON for ten
times. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC
reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Check the engine and controller firmware, and update the firmware
to the latest version.
2. If the SC is issued during printing or during receiving fax documents,
replace the controller board. If the SC is issued during copying,
check the ARDF and IOB connection.
529
6. Troubleshooting
SC689-01 D EEPROM Communication Error 1
• No response from the device in reading/writing for 5 seconds or

more and this problem is repeated 5 times.
• The reading data of 2 locations does not match 8 times
consecutively.
• The writing data and reading date does not match 8 times
consecutively.
EEPROM on the controller board defective
1. Turn the main power OFF and wait for 5 seconds. Then turn ON the
main power.
2. Check whether the EEPROM on the controller board is installed
correctly. If necessary, reinstall it.
3. Replace the controller board.
4. If the EEPROM on the controller board is damaged, replace the
EEPROM.
SC689-02 D EEPROM Communication Error 1
IOB defective
Controller board defective
530
SC690-00 C EEPROM Data Error
Reading data from EEPROM is abnormal.
EEPROM on the controller board defective
1. Turn the main power OFF and wait for 5 seconds. Then turn the main
power ON.
2. Replace the IOB.
3. If the EEPROM on the controller board is damaged, replace the
EEPROM.
SC691-00 D Image Processing Error
Paper jam (J010, J011, J012, J013, J014, J015) is detected twice.
SC600 (Controller)
SC No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
SC641-00 D Communication error between BiCU and Controller board.
Controller board does not respond after BiCU tries to communicate three
times.
• Controller board software error

• Connect error between BiCU and Controller board
• BiCU software error
• Check connections between Controller board and BiCU.

• Turn the main power OFF then ON.
531
6. Troubleshooting
SC670-01 D Engine does not start up during the staring up
• /ENGRDY signal was not asserted when the machine was turned
on.
• PCI I/F is not linked up when the machine returns from energy saver
mode.
• EC/PC/SC response was not received within specified time from
power on.
• Writing to Rapi driver failed (the other party not found through PCI).
• Connection defect between controller board and BiCU.
• BiCU is down / unstable
Engine board does not start up.
Refer to page 598 "SC670 (engine start up error) is displayed".
SC670-02 D Engine does not start up after the staring up
• CPU reset by software

• CPU reset by anomaly CPU
• CPU reset by hardware defect / noise
• Hardware defect
Engine board reset unexpectedly.
Refer to page 598 "SC670 (engine start up error) is displayed".
532
SC672-10 D Controller start up error
After the machine was powered on, communication between the

controller and the operation panel was not established.
• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late

2. Check the connection of the operation panel.
3. Check the connection of the controller board.
After the machine was powered on, communication between the

controller and the operation panel was not established, or
communication with controller was interrupted after a normal startup.
• Controller late

533
6. Troubleshooting
Communication with controller was interrupted after a normal startup.
• Controller late

The operation panel detects that the controller is down due to other
reason shown in SC672-10, SC672-11, and SC672-12.
• Controller late

534
The operation panel software ended abnormally.
• Controller late

SC673-10
RTB 47
535
6. Troubleshooting
Service Call 700

SC700 (Engine: Peripherals) (MP 501/601 Only)
SC700-00 C ARDF Inverter Motor Error
The home position cannot be detected even if the machine reties 3 times
consecutively.
* Conditions to detect the home position: When the home position is
detected by driving the ARDF inverter motor one rotation.
• ARDF inverter motor defective

• ARDF position sensor defective
• IOB defective
• ARDF inverter motor defective

1. Disconnect the power cord, and wait 5 seconds. Reconnect the
power cord, and then turn the main power ON.
2. Confirm that the connector of ARDF inverter motor is firmly
connected. If necessary, connect the connector all the way in.
• ARDF Inverter Motor – IOB connector
connector. If the connector pin is deformed, replace the
connector.
5. Replace the ARDF inverter motor.
536
Service Call 700
• ARDF position sensor defective

1. Rotate the ARDF inverter motor by hand to check whether it is
unusually difficult to rotate.
2. Check that the ARDF position sensor is not disengaged and is
correctly positioned. And check that the actuator correctly
shields the light.
• ARDF Position Sensor – IOB
connector.
5. Replace the ARDF position sensor.
• IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
537
6. Troubleshooting

SC800 (Controller)
No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC816-** [0x0000] Energy save I/O subsystem error
SC816-01 D Subsystem error
SC816-02 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
SC816-03 D Transition to STR was denied.
SC816-04 D Interrupt in kernel communication driver
SC816-05 D Preparation for transition to STR failed.
SC816-07 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
SC816-08 D Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error
SC816-09 D Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error
SC816-10 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error

D
to 12
SC816-13 D open() error
SC816-14 D Memory address error
SC816-15 open() error

D
to 18
SC816-19 D Double open() error
SC816-20 D open() error
SC816-22 D Parameter error
SC816-23 read() error

D
, 24
SC816-25 D write () error
SC816-26 write() communication retry error

D
to 28
538
SC816-29 read() communication retry error

D
, 30
SC816-35 D read() error
SC816-36 Subsystem error

D
to 96
SC Subsystem error
D
816-99
Energy save I/O subsystem detected some abnormality.
• Energy save I/O subsystem defective

• Energy save I/O subsystem detected a controller board error (non-
response).
• Error was detected during preparation for transition to STR.
• SC816-99 occurs as a subsystem error except any error from -06 to
96.
1. Update the following firmware and the other system firmware to the
latest version.
• MP 501/601: "System/Copy" firmware
• SP 5300/5310: "System" firmware
2. Disable the STR shift function by SP5-191-001 (Power Str Set).
539
6. Troubleshooting
SC817-00 D Monitor error: File detection / Digital signature error (MP 501/601
Only)
• Bootloader cannot read any of diagnostic module, kernel, or root

filesystem.
• In a bootloader SD card, the digital signature checking for any of
diagnostic module, kernel, or root filesystem is failed.
• Any of the following items does not exist or is broken OS Flash ROM,
Diagnostic module in SD card, Kernel, Root filesystem
• Any of the following items is revised fraudulently: Diagnostic module
in SD card, Kernel, Root filesystem
• ROM update for controller system

• Use another booting SD card having a valid digital signature
SC819
SC819-00 D Kernel halt error
RTB 48 C [xxxx]: Detailed error code
Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system

processing. One of the following messages was displayed on the
operation panel.
540
[0x5032] HAIC-P2 error
HAIC-P2 decompression error (An error occurred in the ASIC

compression/decompression module.)
• The code data saved in the HDD was broken for an unexpected
reason. (HDD device defective)
• The code data saved to memory was broken for an unexpected
reason. (Memory device defective)
• ASIC defective
• Data other than code data was unzipped due to a software
malfunction.
• Turn the main power OFF/ON.

• Replace the HDD.
• Replace the memory
• Replace the controller board.
• Fix the software
Link up error
Link up transaction between Engine ASIC and Veena was not completed
within 100 ms.
Either one of following message appears on console if Link up error

occurs.
RESUME:PCI-Express bus ROOT_DL status error
[0x5245]
RESUME:PCI-Express bus DETUP status error
"0x53554D45" -> Link up error
Also, error code "0x5245" and detail code ""0x53554D45" -> Link up
error" appears on operation panel.

• Replace the controller board or the BiCU.
541
6. Troubleshooting
L2 status time out
L2 status register between Engine ASIC and Veena was not reached the
target value within 1 sec.
Engine ASIC during operation was rebooted or shifted to energy saving

mode.
Machine reboots when SC23x, SC30x occurs.
If Engine ASIC is working when rebooting (or shifting to the energy saving
[0x5355]
mode), L2 status value is not on target.
The following message appears on console.
SUSPEND:PCI-Express L2 Status Check Error
Also, error code "0x5355" and detail code ""0x5350454E44" -> L2
status time out" appears on operation panel.

• Replace the controller board or the BiCU.
[0x6261] HDD defective
Received file system data was broken even if the initialization succeeds
and there was no error reply from the HDD.
Power supply disconnection during data writing to the HDD.
Replace the HDD.

This SC may occur when turning on the machine for the first time with a
new HDD. In this case, turn the main power OFF/ON.
[0x696e] gwinit processing end
If the SCS process is ended for some reason
If an unexpected error occurs at SCS processing end, gwint processing

also halts (this result is judged a kernel stop error, by gwinit specification)
"0x69742064" -> "init died"
Turn the main power OFF/ON.
542
[0x766d] VM full error
Occurs when too much RAM is used during system processing
"vm_pageout: VM is full"
Console Other error (characters on operation panel)

string
System detected internal mismatch error
• Software defective
• Insufficient memory
• Hardware driver defective (RAM, flash memory, CPU)
• Replace with a larger capacity RAM, or flash memory.

• Replace the connected controller option with a new one.
SC840-00 D EEPROM access error
• During the I/O processing, a reading error occurred. The 3rd

reading failure causes this SC code.
• During the I/O processing, a writing error occurred.
• Defective EEPROM
SC841-00 D EEPROM read data error
Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in

EEPROM.
Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason.
543
6. Troubleshooting
SC842-00 C Nand-Flash updating verification error
SCS write error (verify error) occurred at the Nand-Flash module when
remote ROM or main ROM was updated.
Nand-Flash defective
SC842-01 C Insufficient Nand-Flash blocks (threshold exceeded)
At startup, or when machine returned from energy save mode, the Nand-
Flash status was read and judged that the number of unusable blocks had
exceeded threshold, and then SCS generated the SC code.
Number of unusable blocks exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash
SC842-02 C Number of Nand-Flash block deletions exceeded
At startup, or when the machined returned from energy save mode, the
Nand-Flash was read and judged that the number of deleted blocks had
exceeded threshold, and then SCS generated this SC code.
Number of blocks deleted exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash.
SC845 Hardware Error Detected when the automatic firmware update
SC845-01 D Engine Board
SC845-02 D Controller Board
SC845-03 D Operation Panel (Normal)
SC845-04 D Operation Panel (Smart Panel)
544
SC845-05 D FCU
When updating the firmware automatically (ARFU), the firmware cannot

be read or written normally, and the firmware update cannot be
completed even by 3 retries.
Hardware abnormality of the target board
Replace the target board.

For SC845-02, HDD and memory may cause the problem. Replace the
HDD or memory if the SC cannot be recovered by replacing the controller
board.
SC853-00 B Bluetooth device connection error (MP 501/601 Only)
The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was connected after the machine was
turned on.
The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was connected after the machine was
turned on.
Always connect the Bluetooth device (USB type) before the machine is
turned on.
SC854-00 B Bluetooth device disconnected (MP 501/601 Only)
The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was disconnected after the machine
was turned on.
The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was disconnected after the machine
was turned on.
Never remove Bluetooth (USB type) after machine starts.
545
6. Troubleshooting
SC855-01 B Wireless LAN board error (driver attachment failure)
Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)
• Defective wireless LAN board

• Loose connection

• Replace wireless LAN board
SC855-02 B Wireless LAN board error (driver initialization failure)
Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)
• Defective wireless LAN board

• Loose connection

• Replace wireless LAN board
SC858-00 A Data encryption conversion error (Key Setting Error)
A serious error occurred during an attempt to update the encryption key.
• USB Flash, other data, corrupted

• Communication error caused by electrostatic noise
546
SC858-01 A Data encryption conversion error (HDD Key Setting Error)
A serious error occurred during an attempt to update the encryption key.
• USB Flash, other data, corrupted

• Communication error caused by electrostatic noise

• If the error persists, replace the controller board.
SC858-02 A Data encryption conversion error (NVRAM Read/Write Error)
A serious error occurred after data conversion during an attempt to

update the encryption key.
NVRAM defective
• Replace the NVRAM.

SC858-30 A Data encryption conversion error (NVRAM Before Replace Error)

Software error such as conversion parameters being invalid.

• If the error persists, replace the controller board.
547
6. Troubleshooting
SC858-31 A Data encryption conversion error (Other Error)

SC859-00 B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error
When the data encryption key was updated, HDD data was converted,
but not correctly. Image displayed at conversion only (this SC is not
displayed), but SC is displayed after machine is cycled off/on.
• HDD conversion was set with the data encryption key update
function, but the HDD was removed.
• Machine lost power during data encryption key update
• Electrostatic noise, or an HDD error occurred, during data encryption
key update, and data was not encrypted.
• Check HDD connection.

• Format the HDD (SP5-832: HDD formatting).
• If there is a problem with the HDD, it has to be replaced.
548
SC859-01 B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (HDD check error)
• HDD conversion was set with the data encryption key update
function, but the HDD was removed.
• Machine lost power during data encryption key update
• Electrostatic noise, or an HDD error occurred, during data encryption
key update, and data was not encrypted.

SC859-02 B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (Power failure during
conversion)
Details:
NVRAM/HDD conversion is incomplete.
Power failure occurred during encryption key update.
None
The display after restart instructs the user to format the HDD.
549
6. Troubleshooting
SC859-10 B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (Data read/write

command error)
Details:
Abnormal DMAC return value has been received two or more times
(DMAC timeout, serial communication error etc.)
HDD was not successfully converted during encryption key update due to
HDD errors or cable noises.

SC860-00 B HDD startup error at main power on (HDD error)
550
• The HDD is connected but the driver detected the following errors.
• SS_NO.T_READY:/* (-2)HDD does not become READY*/
• SS_BAD_LABEL:/* (-4)Wrong partition type*/
• SS_READ_ERROR:/* (-5)Error occurred while reading or checking
the label*/
• SS_WRITE_ERROR:/* (-6)Error occurred while writing or checking
the label*/
• SS_FS_ERROR:/* (-7)Failed to repair the filesystem*/
• SS_MOUNT_ERROR:/* (-8)Failed to mount the filesystem*/
• SS_COMMAND_ERROR:/* (-9)Drive not responding to
command*/
• SS_KERNEL_ERROR:/* (-10)Internal kernel error*/
• SS_SIZE_ERROR:/* (-11)Drive size too small*/
• SS_NO._PARTITION:/* (-12)The specified partition does not
exist*/
• SS_NO._FILE:/* (-13)Device file does not exist*/
• Attempted to acquire HDD status through the driver but there has
been no response for 30 seconds or more.
• Unformatted HDD
• Label data corrupted
• HDD defective
Format the HDD (SP5-832: HDD formatting) through SP mode.
SC862-00 D Number of the defective sector reaches the maximum count
101 defective sectors are generated at the image storage area in the
HDD.
SC863 occurs during the HDD reading and defective sectors are
registered up to 101.
• Format the HDD with SP5-832.

551
6. Troubleshooting
SC863-01 D HDD data read failure
The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.
Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as
the disk label area.)
Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
• Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned ON.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-
related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print
the SC log data and check them.
SC863-02 D HDD data read failure

to 23
The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

(An error occurred in partition "a" (SC863-02) to partition "v"
(SC863-23)).
552
Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
• Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned ON.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for
the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more,
the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-
related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print
the SC log data and check them.
SC864-01 D HDD data CRC error
During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query.
Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the
HDD.

• Format the HDD.

553
6. Troubleshooting
SC864-02 D HDD data CRC error

to 23
During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query.
Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the
HDD.

(SC864-23)).
• Format the HDD.

SC865-00 D HD access error
During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or
SC864 (CRC error).
Replace the HDD.
SC865-01 D HDD access error
SC864 (CRC error).
Replace the HDD.
554
SC865-02 D HDD access error

to 23
SC864 (CRC error).
(SC865-23)).
Replace the HDD.
SC865-50 D HDD time-out error

to 73
The machine does not detect a reply from the HDD during the HDD
operation.
The HDD does not respond to the read/ write command from the
machine.
• Check the harness connections between the controller board and

HDD.
SC866-00 B SD card authentication error
A license error of an application that is started from the SD card was

detected.
Invalid program data is stored on the SD card.
Store a valid program data on the SD card.
555
6. Troubleshooting
SC867-00 C SD card removed
The SD card was removed while the machine is on.
An application SD card has been removed from the slot (mount point
of /mnt/sd0).
of /mnt/sd1).
of /mnt/sd2).
SC868-** SD card access error
SC868-00 D The SD controller returned an error during operation.

(An error occurred at the mount point of /mnt/sd0)
The SD controller returned an error during operation.

SC868-01 D
The SD controller returned an error during operation.

SC868-02 D
556
• SD card defective
• SD controller defective
Slot number is displayed on the sub code.

Detail code is described in SMC print can confirm the details of the error.
• -13 to -3: File system check error
• Otherwise (no code, -2) : Device access error
SD card that starts an application
1. Turn the main power OFF and check the SD card insertion
status.
2. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the
main power ON.
3. If an error occurs, replace the SD card.
4. If the error persists even after replacing the SD card,
replace the controller board.
SD card for users
1. In case of a file system error, reformat the SD card (using

the "SD Formatter" made by Panasonic).*
In case of a device access error
1. Turn the main power OFF and check the SD card insertion
status.
2. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the
main power ON.
3. If an error occurs, use another SD card.
4. If the error persists even after replacing the SD card,
replace the controller board.
* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only format SD
cards used for Firmware Update by a service representative.
SC870-00 B Address Book data error (Anytime: Address Book Error.)
557
6. Troubleshooting
SC870-01 B Address Book data error (On startup: Media required for storing the
Address Book is missing.)
SC870-02 B Address Book data error (On startup: encryption is configured but the
module required for encryption (DESS) is missing.)
SC870-03 B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store
internal Address Book.)
delivery sender.)
delivery destination.)
information required for LDAP search.)
SC870-07 B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to initialize entries required
for machine operation.)
SC870-08 B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: HDD is present but the
space for storing the Address Book is unusable.)
SC870-09 B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Inconsistency in the

NVRAM area used for storing settings required for Address Book
configuration.)
SC870-10 B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Cannot make a

directory for storing the Address Book in the SD/USB FlashROM.)
SC870-11 B Address Book data error (On startup: Inconsistency in Address Book entry
number.)
SC870-20 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to initialize file.)
SC870-21 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to generate file.)
SC870-22 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to open file.)
SC870-23 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to write to file.)
SC870-24 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to read file.)
SC870-25 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to check file size.)
558
SC870-26 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to delete data.)
SC870-27 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to add data.)
SC870-30 B Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache when
searching in the machine Address Book. delivery destination/sender.)
SC870-31 B Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache during
LDAP search.)
SC870-32 B Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache while
searching the WS-Scanner Address Book.)
SC870-41 B Address Book data error (Cache: failed to obtain data from cache.)
SC870-50 B Address Book data error (On startup: Detected abnormality of the Address
Book encryption status.)
SC870-51 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to create directory
required for conversion between plaintext and encrypted text.)
SC870-52 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from
plaintext to encrypted text.)
SC870-53 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from
encrypted text to plaintext.)
SC870-54 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected data inconsistency
when reading the encrypted Address Book.)
SC870-55 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete file when
changing encryption setting.)
SC870-56 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to erase the file that
records the encryption key during an attempt to change the encryption
setting.)
SC870-57 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to move a file during
an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870-58 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete a directory
during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870-59 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected a resource

shortage during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
559
6. Troubleshooting
SC870-60 B Address Book data error (Unable to obtain the on/off setting for
administrator authentication (06A and later).)
When an error related to the Address Book is detected during startup or

operation.
• Software bug
• Inconsistency of Address Book source location (machine/delivery
server/LDAP server)
• Inconsistency of Address Book encryption setting or encryption key
(NVRAM or HDD was replaced individually without formatting the
Address Book)
• Address Book storage device (SD/HDD) was temporarily removed
or hardware configuration does not match the application
configuration.
• Address Book data corruption was detected.
Install the device that contains address book information properly, and
turn the main power off/on. If SC occurs again, do the following steps.
1. After installing the HDD, or SD/USB ROM, execute SP5-846-046
(UCS Setting).
Wait more than 3 seconds, then execute SP5-832 (HDD Formatting).
Procedure after SC870 is cleared
1. If there is backup data in SD card or Web Image Monitor, restore the
address book data. (To restore from SD card, enter the encryption
password which is the same as when you enter to backup.)
RTB 59
SC871 added
560
SC872-00 B HDD mail reception error
An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was
turned on.
• HDD defective
• Power was turned off while the machine used the HDD.
• Format the HDD (SP5-832-007: HDD Formatting: Mail RX Data).

When you do the above, the following information will be initialized.
• Partly received partial mail messages.
• Already-read statuses of POP3-received messages (All messages on
the mail server are handled as new messages).
SC873-00 B HDD mail reception error
An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was
turned on.
• HDD defective
• Power was turned off while the machine used the HDD.
• Format the HDD (SP5-832-008: HDD Formatting: Mail TX Data).

When you do the above, the following information will be initialized.
• Sender’s mail text
• Default sender name/password (SMB/FTP/NCP)
• Administrator mail address
• Scanner delivery history
SC874-05 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Read error
SC874-06 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Write error
561
6. Troubleshooting
SC874-09 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No response from HDD
SC874-10 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Error in Kernel
SC874-12 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated partition
SC874-13 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No device file
SC874-14 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Start option error
SC874-15 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated sector number
SC874-16 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Failure in performing hdderase
SC874-41 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Other fatal errors
SC874-42 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : End by cancellation
SC874-61 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : library error

to -65
SC874-66 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Unavailable
SC874-67 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Erasing not finished
SC874-68 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : HDD format failure (Normal)
SC874-69 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : HDD format failure (Abnormal)
SC874-70 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Unauthorized library (MP 501/601
Only)
SC874-99 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : other errors
An error occurred while data was being erased on HDD or NVRAM.
• Error detected in HDD data delete program

• Error detected in NVRAM data delete program
• The "Delete All" option was not set
• Turn the main power OFF and back on, and then execute "Erase All
Memory" under UP mode again. (However, if there is a defective
sector or other problem with the hard disk, the error will persist even
after trying the above.)
• If the "Delete All" option is not installed when this error occurs, install
the option.
562
SC875-01 D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (hddchack –i error)
SC875-02 D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (Data deletion failure)
An error was detected before HDD/data erasure starts. (Failed to erase

data/failed to logically format HDD)
• HDD logical formatting failed.

• The modules failed to erase data.
SC877-00 B Data Overwrite Security card error
The "Auto Erase Memory" function of the Data Overwrite Security is set to
on but it cannot be done.
• Data Overwrite Security option SD card is broken.

• Data Overwrite Security option SD card has been removed.
• If the SD card is broken, prepare a new Data Overwrite Security

option SD card and replace the NVRAM.
• If the SD card has been removed, turn the main power off and
reinstall a working Data Overwrite Security option SD card.
SC878-00 D TPM authentication error
TPM electronic recognition failure
• Update of system module attempted without correct update path

• USB flash memory not operating correctly
Trusted Platform Module

• In computing, Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is both the name of a published specification
detailing a secure crypto processor that can store cryptographic keys that protect information, as
563
6. Troubleshooting
well as the general name of implementations of that specification often called the "TPM chip" or
"TPM Security Device" (as designated in certain Dell BIOS settings).
SC878-01 D USB flash error
There is a problem in the file system of the USB flash memory.
USB Flash system files corrupted.
SC878-02 D TPM error
An error occurred in either TPM or the TPM driver.
TPM not operating correctly.
SC878-03 D TCSD error
An error occurred in the TPM software stack.
• TPM, TPM software cannot start

• A file required by TPM is missing
SC878-20 D Random number generator self check error
The unusual status is detected during the self test of generated random number
seed.
TPM defective. (The random number seed is generated by TPM)

564
SC899-00 D Software performance error (signal reception end)
Unknown software error occurred.
Occurs when an internal program behaves abnormally.
In the case of a hardware defect

• Replace the hardware.
In the case of a software error
• Try updating the firmware.
565
6. Troubleshooting

SC900 (Engine: Others)
SC995-01 D CPM setting error 1
Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine

identification code.
Details:
• Machine serial number cannot be identified because of BiCU
replacement or malfunctioning.
• Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM
replacement.
Machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does

not match.
1. Enter the machine serial number using SP5-811 (MachineSerial),

and then turn the main power ON/OFF.
2. Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously.

Details:
Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM
replacement or malfunctioning.

not match.
• Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously.

• Download data on the NV-RAM using SP5-825-001 (NV-RAM
Data Download).
566

Details:
Unable to recognize machine identification code because the controller
was replaced incorrectly or is malfunctioning.

not match.
Replace it with a specified controller.


not match.
Return the parts to the original configuration, and then replace them
according to the manual.
567
6. Troubleshooting
SC900 (Controller)
SC900-00 A Electric counter error
The electric total counter value is out of specification.

Error is detected when increasing the total counter.
• Unexpected NV-RAM is attached.

• NV-RAM defective
• NV-RAM data corrupted.
• Data written to unexpected area because of external factor etc.
• The count requested by the SRM on receiving PRT is not completed.
Replace the NV-RAM.
SC990-00 D Software operation error
Software attempted an unexpected operation.
• Parameter error
• Internal parameter error
• Insufficient work memory
• Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally
undetectable.

• Reinstall the software of the controller board and BiCU.
568
SC991-00 C Recoverable software operation error
Software attempted an unexpected operation.

SC991 covers recoverable errors as opposed toCS990.
• Parameter error
• Internal parameter error
• Insufficient work memory
• Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally
undetectable.
Logging only
SC992-00 D Undefined SC issued.
An SC, that is not controlled by the system, occurred.
• An SC for the previous model was used mistakenly, etc.

• Basically a software bug.
569
6. Troubleshooting
SC997-00 D Application function selection error
• No response to the predetermined command from SCS to the same

application program 4 times consecutively.
Cases when SC997-00 occur;
1. SCS sends command to the copy application.
2. There has been no response from the copy application for 30
sec. (Error count value: 1)
3. Step1-2 is repeatedly performed 3 times. (Error count value: 4)
4. SC997-00 occur.
Cases when SC997-00 does not occur;

2. There has been no response from the copy application for 30 sec.
(Error count value: 1)
Step1-2 is repeatedly performed 2 times. (Error count value: 4)
There has been response from the copy application. (Error count
value: 1)
• The application ended by an unusual process.
Software bug (mainly the application)
• Check the optional RAM/DIMM/boards required by the

application program.
• Check if the combination of downloaded programs are correct.
570
SC998-00 D Application start error
• No application was registered to system within a specified time after

the main power was turned ON.
(No application starts/All applications have been terminated
abnormally)
• Application started but cannot be drawn now for some reason.
• Software bug (mainly the application)

• The optional RAM/DIMM/boards, required by the application
program, are not installed correctly.
• Check the optional RAM/DIMM/boards required by the

application program.
• Check if the combination of downloaded programs are correct.
571
6. Troubleshooting
Jam Detection
Paper Jam Display
SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.
• CODE: Indicates the jam code.

• SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code.
• TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001).
• DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred.
• The 10 latest printer jams are displayed.

• Initial jams are not recorded.
Jam Codes and Display Codes
• MP 501/601
When a jam occurs, the location is displayed on the operation panel.
572
Jam Detection
• SP 5300/5310
An error message appears if a paper misfeed occurs. The error message indicates where the
misfeed occurs.
SP7-504 and SP7-505 (for ARDF) show how many jams occurred at each location.
Indication on the
SP No Jam Code Description
operation panel
SP7-504 001 Bypass paper end sensor A2
Paper feed sensor 1 (Tray 1) A1
Paper feed sensor 2 (Tray 2) Y1
Paper end sensor 3 (Tray 3) Y2
Registration sensor 1 B
Registration sensor 2 B
Duplex sensor 1 Z
Duplex sensor 2 Z
Rear cover switch C
573
6. Troubleshooting
Indication on the
operation panel
010 Unit package won’t become ready. A1
011 Transfer unit not ready. A1
012 Drive does not stop. A1
013 Duplex printing signal doesn't come. A1
014 Fuser unit not ready. A1
015 Tray 2 feeding signal doesn't come. A1
025 Rear cover open jam A1
026 Upper cover open jam A1
027 More pages than the duplex unit can contain. A1
028 Tray 1: No feed A1
029 Duplex unit: No feed Z
030 Bypass tray: No feed A2, B
031 Tray 1: Multiple feed B
032 Tray 2: Multiple feed Y1
036 Duplex unit: Multiple feed B
037 Bypass tray: Multiple feed B
Paper feed sensor 2: Late jam (When paper feed from

038 Y1
Tray 3)

039 Y1
Tray 4)

040 Y1
Tray 5)
574
Jam Detection
Indication on the
operation panel
Paper feed sensor 2: Lag jam (When paper feed from

041 Y1
Tray 3)

042 Y1
Tray 4)

043 Y1
Tray 5)

044 Y2
Tray 4)

045 Y2
Tray 5)

046 Y2
Tray 4)

047 Y2
Tray 5)

048 Y3
Tray 5)

049 Y3
Tray 5)
Registration sensor 1: Late jam (When paper feed from

050 B
Tray 2)

051 B
Tray 3)

052 B
Tray 4)

053 B
Tray 5)
Registration sensor 1: Lag jam (When paper feed from

054 B
Tray 2)

055 B
Tray 3)
575
6. Troubleshooting
Indication on the
operation panel

056 B
Tray 4)

057 B
Tray 5)

058 B
Tray 1)

059 B
Tray 2)

060 B
Tray 3)

061 B
Tray 4)

062 B
Tray 5)

063 B
duplex unit)

064 B
bypass tray unit)

065 B
Tray 1)

066 B
Tray 2)

067 B
Tray 3)

068 B
Tray 4)

069 B
Tray 5)

70 B
duplex unit)
576
Jam Detection
Indication on the
operation panel

071 B
bypass tray unit)
Paper exit full sensor: Late jam (When paper feed from
072 B
Tray 1)
073 B
Tray 2)
074 B
Tray 3)
075 B
Tray 4)
076 B
Tray 5)
077 B
duplex unit)
078 B
bypass tray unit)
Paper exit full sensor: Lag jam (When paper feed from
079 C
Tray 1)
080 C
Tray 2)
081 C
Tray 3)
082 C
Tray 4)
083 C
Tray 5)
084 C
duplex unit)
085 C
bypass tray unit)
577
6. Troubleshooting
Indication on the
operation panel
Duplex sensor 1: Late jam (When paper feed from Tray

086 C
1)

087 C
2)

088 C
3)

089 C
4)

090 C
5)
Duplex sensor 1: Late jam (When paper feed from

091 C
bypass tray unit)

092 Z
1)

093 Z
2)

094 Z
3)

095 Z
4)

096 Z
5)
Duplex sensor 2: Late jam (When paper feed from

097 Z
bypass tray unit)
Duplex sensor 2: Lag jam (When paper feed from

098 B
duplex unit)
099 Tray 2: No feed Y1
578
Jam Detection
Indication on the
operation panel
SP7-505 001*1 ARDF registration sensor: Initial jam P
002*1 ARDF registration sensor: Late jam P
003*1 ARDF registration sensor: Lag jam P
*1 MP 501/601 only
579
6. Troubleshooting
Sensor Layout
MP 501/601
RTB 57
Modified
Abbreviation Name Abbreviation Name
AROS ARDF original sensor PFPS1 Paper end sensor 1*1
ARRS ARDF registration sensor PFPS2 Paper end sensor 2*1
580
Jam Detection
Abbreviation Name Abbreviation Name
ARTS ARDF original timing sensor PFPS3 Paper end sensor 3*1
BPES Bypass paper end sensor PFPS4 Paper end sensor 4*1
DUS1 Duplex sensor 1 PFS Paper exit full sensor
DUS2 Duplex sensor 2 PS1 Paper end sensor 1
FS Fusing sensor PS2 Paper end sensor 2
PFFS1 Paper feed sensor 1*1 RS1 Registration sensor 1
PFFS4 Paper feed sensor 4*1
*1 Optional paper feed unit
581
6. Troubleshooting
SP 5300/5310
RTB 57
Modified
Abbreviatio
Name Abbreviation Name
n
BPES Bypass paper end sensor PFPS1 Paper end sensor 1*1
DUS1 Duplex sensor 1 PFPS2 Paper end sensor 2*1
DUS2 Duplex sensor 2 PFPS3 Paper end sensor 3*1
FS Fusing sensor PFPS4 Paper end sensor 4*1
PFFS1 Paper feed sensor 1*1 PFS Paper exit full sensor
PFFS2 Paper feed sensor 2*1 PLS Paper feed tray limit sensor
PFFS3 Paper feed sensor 3*1 PS1 Paper end sensor 1
582
Jam Detection
Abbreviatio
Name Abbreviation Name
n
PFFS4 Paper feed sensor 4*1 PS2 Paper end sensor 2
PFLS1 Paper feed tray limit sensor 1*1 RS1 Registration sensor 1
PFLS4 Paper feed tray limit sensor 4*1
*1 Optional paper feed unit
Paper Size Codes
Paper size codes are as follows.

* The unit of Main Scan/Sub Scan Length is 0.1 mm.
Size Code Paper Size Name Orientation Main Scan Length Sub Scan Length
005(05H) A4 LEF 2970 2100
006(06H) A5 LEF 2100 1480
007(07H) A6 LEF 1480 1050
014(0EH) B5 LEF 2570 1820
015(0FH) B6 LEF 1820 1280
036(24H) 8 1/2"x14"(LG) LEF 3556 2159
037(25H) 8 1/2"x13"(Foolscape) LEF 3302 2159
038(26H) 8 1/2"x11"(LT) LEF 2794 2159
039(27H) 8 1/4"x14" LEF 3556 2096
040(28H) 8 1/4"x13"(Folio) LEF 3302 2096
041(29H) 8"x13"(F/GL) LEF 3302 2032
043(2BH) 8"x10"(UK) LEF 2540 2032
044(2CH) 5 1/2"x8 1/2"(HLT) LEF 2159 1397
583
6. Troubleshooting
Size Code Paper Size Name Orientation Main Scan Length Sub Scan Length
045(2DH) 7 1/4"x10 1/2"(Exective) LEF 2667 1842
067(43H) 16K LEF 2670 1950
072(48H) 8 1/2"x13 2/5"(Oficio) LEF 3404 2159
080(50H) 4 1/8"x9 1/2"(Com10) LEF 2413 1048
081(51H) 3 7/8"x7 1/2"(Monarch) LEF 1905 984
083(53H) C5 Envelope LEF 2290 1620
084(54H) C6 Envelope LEF 1620 1140
085(55H) DL Envelope LEF 2200 1100
134(86H) A5 SEF 1480 2100
584
Troubleshooting Guide
Image Quality
Skewed image
Symptom
Images are skewed.
Solution
Check whether the side fences in the paper feed tray are set properly. They must tightly fit to the
paper without space.
Toner sticking to the right side area on the second side of the paper
Symptom
Toner sticking to the right side area [A] on the second side of the paper.
* The arrow indicates the paper feed direction.

The toner sticking image:
585
6. Troubleshooting
Solution
586
3. Clean the [A] area with a dry cloth.
Image quality failure due to the fixing failure

Symptom
The following image quality failure occur due to the fixing failure.
• Backside partial stains
• Toner peeling
• Black spots caused by the toner fixation
587
6. Troubleshooting
Solution
Change the paper type setting to thicker with the procedure below.
• MP 501/601
2. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
3. Press [Next].
4. Select the tray from [Tray Paper Size: Tray 1] to [Tray Paper Size: Tray 5] for which you want
to change the paper type.
5. Change the paper type setting to thicker in [Paper Thickness].
• SP 5300/5310
1. Press the [Menu] key on the control panel.
2. Select [Paper Input] -> Press [OK]
3. Select the tray from [Tray Paper Size: Tray 1] to [Tray Paper Size: Tray 5] for which you want
to change the paper type -> Press [OK]
4. Change the paper type setting to thicker -> Press [OK]
The setting is complete when specifying the following types of paper:
Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick, Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick
Paper 3, Special Paper 1, Special Paper 2, Special Paper 3
5. If you have selected [Recycled Paper], [Color Paper], [Letterhead], [Label Paper], [Envelope],
or [Preprinted Paper] for the paper type, press [Escape].
6. Select [Maintenance] -> Press [OK]
7. Select [General Settings] -> Press [OK]
8. Select the paper thickness setting for the specified paper type -> Press [OK]
9. Select the tray where the specified type of paper is loaded -> Press [OK]
If you selected [Letterhead Setting], [Label Paper Setting], or [Envelope Setting] in Step 8, you
can specify the paper thickness for each tray separately. For other paper types, the specified
paper thickness is applied to all trays.
Toner scattered
Symptom
The toner spreads under the horizontal lines.
Solution 1
Change the paper type setting to thicker with the procedure below.
588
• MP 501/601
2. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
3. Press [Next].
4. Select the tray from [Tray Paper Size: Tray 1] to [Tray Paper Size: Tray 5] for which you
want to change the paper type.
5. Change the paper type setting to thicker in [Paper Thickness].
• SP 5300/5310
2. Select [Paper Input] -> Press [OK]
3. Select the tray from [Tray Paper Size: Tray 1] to [Tray Paper Size: Tray 5] for which you
want to change the paper type -> Press [OK]
The setting is complete when specifying the following types of paper:
Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick, Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick
Paper 3, Special Paper 1, Special Paper 2, Special Paper 3
5. If you have selected [Recycled Paper], [Color Paper], [Letterhead], [Label Paper],
[Envelope], or [Preprinted Paper] for the paper type, press [Escape].
6. Select [Maintenance] -> Press [OK]
7. Select [General Settings] -> Press [OK]
8. Select the paper thickness setting for the specified paper type -> Press [OK]
9. Select the tray where the specified type of paper is loaded -> Press [OK]
If you selected [Letterhead Setting], [Label Paper Setting], or [Envelope Setting] in Step
8, you can specify the paper thickness for each tray separately. For other paper types,
the specified paper thickness is applied to all trays.
Solution 2
Enable the scattered toner prevention function with SP1-891-xxx (Scattering Control).
Change the value of the tray which you want to adjust from "0" to "1".
589
6. Troubleshooting
SP1-891-001 Scattering Control: Main
SP1-891-002 Scattering Control: Option Tray 1
SP1-891-003 Scattering Control: Option Tray 2 0 or 1
SP1-891-004 Scattering Control: Option Tray 3 (0: Disable, 1: Enable)
SP1-891-005 Scattering Control: Option Tray 4
SP1-891-006 Scattering Control: By-Pass Tray
• You can also enable the scattered toner prevention function with the UP mode.
• MP 501/601: [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Scattered Toner Image
Prevention]
• SP 5300/5310: [Menu] -> [Maintenance] -> [Quality Maintenance] -> [Scattered
Toner Prevention]
Related information
When you change the paper type setting or enable the scattered toner prevention function, the
transfer current, fusing temperature, and copy/print speed are changed. The following table shows
the difference of those values (transfer current, fusing temperature, copy/print speed) for each
paper type on the basis of "Plain Paper 2" when the paper type setting is changed or scattered
toner prevention function is enabled.
(Conditions: paper size: A4 LT, temperature: 23°C, humidity: 50%)
MP 501/SP 5300
Transfer Current
Fusing Temperature [°C] Copy/Print Speed [ppm]
Paper Type [µA]
A4 LT A4 LT A4 LT
1. When the scattered toner prevention function is disabled.
Thin Paper -60 -60 -15 -15 50 52
Plain Paper 1 -25 -25 -5 -5 50 52
Plain Paper 2 0 0 0 0 50 52
Middle Thick 0 0 25 25 50 52
Thick Paper 1 -100 -100 5 5 35 35
590
Transfer Current
Paper Type [µA]
A4 LT A4 LT A4 LT
Thick Paper 2 -100 -100 10 10 35 35
Thick Paper 3 -100 -100 15 15 35 35
2. When the scattered toner prevention function is enabled.
Plain Paper 1 45 45 -5 -5 50 52
Plain Paper 2 45 45 0 0 50 52
Middle Thick 45 45 25 25 50 52
MP 601/SP 5310
Transfer Current
Paper Type [µA]
A4 LT A4 LT A4 LT
1. When the scattered toner prevention function is disabled.
Thin Paper -60 -60 -20 -20 60 62
Plain Paper 1 -15 -15 -5 -5 60 62
Plain Paper 2 0 0 0 0 60 62
Middle Thick 0 0 25 25 60 62
Thick Paper 1 -110 -110 0 0 38 38
Thick Paper 2 -110 -110 5 5 38 38
Thick Paper 3 -110 -110 15 15 38 38
2. When the scattered toner prevention function is enabled.
Plain Paper 1 50 50 -5 -5 60 62
Plain Paper 2 50 50 0 0 60 62
Middle Thick 50 50 25 25 60 62
591
6. Troubleshooting
Paper Transport
Paper jam occurred in the paper path between Tray 1 and around the registration
roller
Symptom
The paper jam (such as J031, J054, J057, J069) occur in the paper path between Tray 1 and
around the registration.
Solution
Clean the registration sensor 1 and opposing part.
592
3. Clean the registration sensor 1 [A] with a damp cloth from the backside of the PCDU [B].
4. Clean the opposing part [A] of the registration sensor 1 with the damp cloth.
593
6. Troubleshooting
Paper jam (J001) occurred after removing the jammed paper from the registration
section
Symptom
Paper jam (J001) occur after removing the paper which was jammed between fusing section and
registration section. This is because the registration filler has got under the registration roller when
removing the jammed paper.
Solution
594
3. Check whether the registration filler [A] moves smoothly.
595
6. Troubleshooting
Non-feed jam in ARDF (MP 501/601 Only)

Symptom
Non-feed jam occur when 60 or more originals is strongly pushed into the ARDF.
Solution
• Open the ARDF upper cover [A] and remove the originals. Then place the originals into the
ARDF. When placing the originals, do not push them into the ARDF.
• Instruct users to reduce the number of originals.
Others
Troubles that can be improved by executing drum refresh mode
Execute the drum refresh mode when the following image quality failure occur.
• Background stains appear as bands perpendicular to the paper feed direction
• Vertical white streaks with about 1mm width in the form of a dotted line appear 15mm to the left of
the paper center
Drum refresh procedure
• It takes approximately 3 minutes to refresh the drum.

• If sheets of paper are loaded in the bypass tray, first remove them, and then refresh the drum.
• MP 501/601
2. Press [Maintenance Features].
3. Press [Maintenance].
596
4. Press [Drum Refresh]

5. Press [Start].
6. Press [Exit].
• SP 5300/5310
2. Select [Quality Maintenance] -> Press [OK]
3. Select [Drum Refresh] -> Press [OK]
4. Select [OK].
Problem at regular intervals
Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference of certain
components.
The following diagram shows the possible symptoms (black or white dots at regular intervals).
[A]: Paper feed direction

[B]: Problems at regular intervals
• 29.9 mm intervals: Charge roller
• 36.8 mm intervals: Registration roller
• 44.9 mm intervals: Development roller
• 61.2 mm intervals: Transfer roller
• 94.2 mm intervals: Drum
• 94.2 mm intervals: Pressure roller
• 109.9 mm intervals: Hot roller
597
6. Troubleshooting
SC670 (engine start up error) is displayed

Symptom
SC670 (engine start up error) is displayed.
Cause
The engine board resets at an unexpected timing, and does not start up again
Solution
If the symptom occurs, use the following flow chart to determine the cause and decide the best
course of action.
598
599
6. Troubleshooting
600
Product Overview
Component Layout / Paper Path
MP 501/601
601
No. Name No. Name
1 Paper feed tray 8 Drum unit
2 Bypass tray unit 9 Transfer unit
3 Transportation section 10 Fusing unit
4 Scanner unit 11 Paper exit unit
5 Laser unit 12 Duplex unit
6 Development unit 13 ARDF
7 Toner cartridge
SP 5300/5310
No. Name No. Name
1 Paper feed tray 9 Charge roller
2 Paper feed unit 10 Drum unit
602
Product Overview
No. Name No. Name
3 Transportation section 11 Transfer unit
4 Bypass tray 12 Paper exit tray
5 Bypass tray unit 13 Paper exit unit
6 Toner cartridge 14 Fusing unit
7 Development unit 15 Duplex unit
8 Laser unit
603
Parts Layout
Switches and sensors
MP 501/601
No. Name No. Name
1 ARDF registration sensor 13 Interlock switch
2 ARDF original timing sensor 14 Paper feed tray size switch
3 ARDF open/close sensor 15 Main power switch PCB
4 ARDF original sensor 16 Paper feed tray limit sensor
604
Product Overview
No. Name No. Name
5 ARDF position sensor 17 Bypass paper end sensor
6 Fusing thermistor 2 (Center) 18 Registration sensor 2
7 Fusing thermistor 1 (End) 19 Duplex sensor 2
8 Fusing sensor 20 Waste toner full sensor
9 Registration sensor 1 21 Paper end sensor 1
10 Paper exit full sensor 22 Paper end sensor 2
11 Duplex sensor 1 23 Rear cover switch
12 Envelope sensor 24 Scanner HP sensor
SP 5300/5310
605
No. Name No. Name
1 Toner density sensor PCB 11 Main power switch PCB
2 Rear cover switch 12 Paper feed tray size switch
3 Fusing thermistor 1 (End) 13 Duplex sensor 2
4 Fusing thermistor 2 (Center) 14 Registration sensor 2
5 Fusing sensor 15 Paper end sensor 2
6 Paper exit full sensor 16 Paper end sensor 1
7 Duplex sensor 1 17 Registration sensor 1
8 Envelope sensor 18 Bypass paper end sensor
9 Interlock switch 19 Waste toner full sensor
10 Paper feed tray limit sensor
606
Product Overview
Drive unit, Fans
MP 501/601
No. Name No. Name
1 ARDF paper transport motor 9 Main motor
2 ARDF paper feed motor 10 Paper feed tray lift motor
3 ARDF inverter motor 11 PSU fan
4 Polygon motor 12 Fusing pressure release motor
5 Toner supply motor 13 Development fan
607
No. Name No. Name
6 Scanner motor 14 Paper exit motor
7 Drum motor 15 Laser fan
8 Controller box fan
SP 5300/5310
No. Name No. Name
1 Polygon motor 7 Paper feed tray lift motor
2 Laser fan 8 PSU fan
3 Paper exit motor 9 Fusing pressure release motor
4 Drum motor 10 Development fan
5 Controller box fan 11 Toner supply motor
608
Product Overview
No. Name No. Name
6 Main motor
MP 501/601
No. Name No. Name
1 LDB 11 IOB
2 Toner cartridge connection PCB 12 Thermostat connection PCB
609
No. Name No. Name
3 Drum PCB 13 Power pack
4 Drum heater PCB (Asia Only) 14 Drum connection PCB
5 Toner cartridge PCB 15 Connect-Left PCB
6 Toner density sensor PCB 16 OPU board
7 Controller board 17 Thermistor connection PCB
8 BiCU 18 LED PCB
9 PSU 19 SBU
10 Fax board
SP 5300/5310
No. Name No. Name
1 LDB 9 OPU Board
610
Product Overview
No. Name No. Name
2 Connect-Left PCB 10 Sensor PCB
3 Thermostat connection PCB 11 Power pack
4 IOB 12 Drum connection PCB
5 Controller board 13 Toner cartridge PCB
6 BiCU 14 Drum PCB
7 PSU 15 Toner cartridge connection PCB
8 Thermistor connection PCB
611
Others
MP 501/601
No. Name No. Name
1 Fusing lamps 8 Duplex clutch
2 Fusing thermostat 1 (End) 9 Registration clutch
3 Fusing thermostat 2 (Center) 10 Paper feed clutch
4 Quenching lamp 11 Transport clutch
5 Speaker 12 Bypass solenoid
612
Product Overview
No. Name No. Name
6 HDD 13 Inverter solenoid
7 Development clutch
SP 5300/5310
No. Name No. Name
1 Fusing thermostat 1 (End) 8 Transport clutch
2 Fusing thermostat 2 (Center) 9 Bypass solenoid
3 Fusing lamp 1 10 Duplex clutch
4 Fusing lamp 2 11 Control panel
613
No. Name No. Name
5 Development clutch 12 Inverter solenoid
Drum heater PCB (Asia and Chinese

6 Registration clutch 13
Only)
7 Paper feed clutch 14 Quenching lamp
614

The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp and scanned by the CCD, the reflected light
being converted to an electrical signal.
If the ARDF is used, the scanner unit stops at the position of the ARDF exposure glass. Then the machine
sequentially scans each line of the image on the original in synchronization with the movement of the
original in the sub scan direction as it is fed by the ARDF.
No. Name No. Name
1 CCD 5 Original size indicator plate
2 Carriage 6 Exposure glass (for ARDF)
3 Scanner frame 7 Lens
4 Exposure glass 8 Mirrors
615
616
Laser Unit
Laser Unit
The charged surface of the drum is scanned by the laser beam from the laser unit. The polygon motor
rotates to reflect the laser beam over the drum. Various lenses and mirrors are housed in the laser unit, to
adjust the diameter of the laser beam, and focus it on the drum surface.
No. Name No. Name
1 Polygon motor 4 Unit base
2 f-theta main lens 5 Unit cover
3 Dust shield glass 6 Mirror
617
618
Development Unit
Development Unit
The development unit consists of the development roller that forms the magnetic brush, the development
blade and the development agitators that agitate the toner in the development unit. The toner sensor
checks whether or not toner remains in the development unit.
No. Name No. Name
1 Development roller 6 Toner supply roller
2 Development blade 7 Toner agitator
3 Development agitator A 8 Toner cartridge
4 Development agitator B 9 Development blade
5 Development case
619
620
Drum Unit
Drum Unit
Drum
The drum section consists of the drum, the charge roller unit, and the cleaning unit. The drum surface is
uniformly charged in preparation for formation of residual image by the laser beam.
After transfer is complete, toner remaining on the drum surface is removed with the cleaning blade and
is sent to the waste toner bottle with the drum coil. The quenching lamp consists of LEDs and removes
residual charge on the drum before main charging for the next image.
No. Name No. Name
1 Drum 3 Cleaning roller (for charge roller)
2 Charge roller 4 Charge roller case
621
Cleaning Unit
No. Name No. Name
1 Drum 5 Scraper
2 Cleaning blade 6 Drum frame
3 Cleaning roller 7 Waste toner removal coil (drum coil)
4 Control roller 8 Quenching lamp
622
Drum Unit
623
Transfer Unit
The transfer unit consists mainly of the transfer roller, discharge plate and drum separation claws.
A high voltage generated by the power pack is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging.
Paper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying the separation charge that is output from the
power pack to the discharge plate.
No. Name No. Name
1 Transfer guide plate 4 Discharge plate
2 Drum 5 Drum heater (Asia Only)
3 Transfer roller
624
Transfer Unit
625
Fusing Unit
The paper sent from the transfer unit is fed between the hot roller and the pressure roller.
The hot roller is heated by the fusing lamps, and the toner is fused by heat and pressure and fixed onto
the paper. The pressure roller is pressed by the fusing pressure spring. The surface temperature of the hot
roller is detected by the fusing thermistor and controlled by the controller board. If the fusing unit reaches
extremely high temperature, the power line will be shut off and the fusing lamp is forced to turn off.
No. Name No. Name
1 Hot roller 7 Actuator (fusing sensor)
2 Fusing lamps 8 Fusing exit roller
3 Fusing thermostat 9 Fusing exit pulley
4 Fusing thermistor 10 Fusing thermistor
5 Separators 11 Fusing entrance guide
6 Pressure roller
626
Fusing Unit
627
Paper Exit Unit

The paper exit unit consists of the transport path which sends the paper from the fusing unit to the paper
exit tray, and the transport path which sends the paper to the duplex unit when duplex printing.
No. Name No. Name
1 Upper paper exit pulley 5 Lower paper exit pulley
MP 501/601: Paper exit cover

2 Upper paper exit roller 6
SP 5300/5310: Upper cover
3 Actuator (paper tray full sensor) 7 Duplex feed pulley
4 Lower paper exit roller
628
Paper Exit Unit
629
Duplex Unit
The duplex unit consists of the transport path which sends the paper from the paper exit unit to the
transportation section when duplex printing.
No. Name No. Name
1 Duplex rollers 5 Duplex base
2 Duplex idle rollers 6 Duplex lower guide
3 Actuator (duplex sensor 1) 7 Feed upper guide
4 Actuator (duplex sensor 2)
630
Duplex Unit
631
Paper Feed Unit

The paper feed unit consists of the paper feed section that feeds paper from the cassette, the bypass
tray, and the paper transport section that conveys the fed paper to the transportation section.
The cassette can contain 500 sheets. The sheet from the cassette is pulled out by rotation of the pickup
roller and sent to the transportation section by rotation of the paper feed roller. The separation roller
prevents multiple feeding.
No. Name No. Name
1 Paper feed roller 7 Bottom plate
2 Pickup roller 8 Paper width guide
3 Feed roller holder 9 Paper length guide
4 Separation roller 10 Cassette base
5 Separation roller holder 11 Actuator (paper end sensor)
6 Friction pad
632
Paper Feed Unit
633
Bypass Tray Unit

The bypass tray can contain 100 sheets. Feeding from the bypass tray is performed by the rotation of
the bypass paper feed roller. The bypass separation pad prevents paper from multiple feeding.
No. Name No. Name
1 Bypass paper feed roller 5 Bypass frame
2 Bypass separation pad 6 Bypass paper width guide
3 Bypass bottom plate 7 Actuator (bypass paper end sensor)
4 Bypass tray
634
Bypass Tray Unit
635

Original Feed Section
The original feed section consists of the parts shown below. An original placed on the original tray is
conveyed to the original feed section. The original is fed by the rotation of the ARDF pickup pulley and
the ARDF paper feed roller.
No. Name No. Name
1 ARDF pickup roller 5 Pre-separation pad
2 ARDF paper feed roller 6 Actuator (ARDF original sensor)
3 ARDF feed roller holder 7 Original tray
4 ARDF separation pad 8 Actuator (ARDF original timing sensor)
636
Original Transport Section and Exit Section
The original transport section consists of the parts shown below. A transported original is scanned by the
optical section (CCD) of the main unit when it passes the exposure glass of the ARDF in the main unit.
The original exit section consists of the parts shown below. An original that has completed scanning is
ejected to the original exit table by the exit roller.
The original is transported temporarily to the original exit table and transported again to the original
transport section by the junction roller.
No. Name No. Name
1 Actuator (ARDF registration sensor) 8 Junction guide
2 ARDF registration roller 9 Junction roller
3 ARDF registration pulley 10 Junction pulley
4 Reading guide 11 ARDF exit roller
5 Exposure glass for ARDF 12 ARDF exit pulley
6 ARDF transport roller 13 ARDF exit guide
637
No. Name No. Name
7 ARDF transport pulley 14 Original exit tray
638
Energy Save
Energy Save
Energy Saver Modes
Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment.
The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are
at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be different. For example, if
the timers are all set to 240 min., the grey area will disappear, and no energy is saved before 240 min.
expires.
Timer Settings
The user can set these timers in the following menu.

• MP 501/601: User Tools > System settings > Timer Settings
• SP 5300/5310: System > Low Power Mode Timer
Auto off timer (1 – 240 min): Off/Sleep Mode. Default setting: 1 min.
Return to Stand-by Mode
Recovery time from off/sleep mode: 10 sec.
639
Warm-up time:
• MP 501: 24 sec.(NA/AP), 60 sec.(EU)
• MP 601: 25.4 sec.(NA/AP), 60 sec.(EU)
• SP 5300: 21 sec.
• SP 5310: 25.4 sec.
Recommendation
We recommend that the default settings should be kept.

• If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy
costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy
use.
• If it is necessary to change the settings, please try to make sure that the Auto Off timer is not too
long. Try with a shorter setting first, such as 30 min., then go to a longer one (such as 60 min.) if the
customer is not satisfied.
• If the timers are all set to the maximum value, the machine will not begin saving energy until 240
minutes has expired after the last job. This means that after the customer has finished using the
machine for the day, energy will be consumed that could otherwise be saved.
• If you change the settings, the energy consumed can be measured using SP8-941 (Machine
Status), as explained below.
Energy Save Effectiveness
SP 8-941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each mode.
• SP8-941-001: Operating mode
• SP 8-941-002: Standby mode
• SP 8-941-003: Panel off mode (Not used in this model)
• SP 8-941-004: Low power mode (Not used in this model)
• SP 8-941-005: Sleep mode
With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount
of energy that is used by the machine.
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are
measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
To get an exact measurement at the customers site, a watt meter must be used to measure the actual
energy consumed.
To use SP8-941 to calculate the energy consumed:
• At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8-941-001 to 005.
640
Energy Save
• At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8-941-001 to 005 again.
• Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the later
measurement).
• Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.
• Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)
Here is an example calculation.
Machine SP8-941: Time at Start Time at End Running Power Power

Condition Machine (min.) (min.) time (hour) consumptio consumptio
Status ( - )/ n Spec. (W) n (KWH)
60= ( × )/
1000=
Operating 001:
Operating
Time 21089.0 21386.0 4.95 898 4.45
002:
Stand by Standby
(Ready) Time 306163.0 308046.0 31.38 179 5.62
003:
Energy save Energy
(Panel off) Save Time 74000 75111.0 18.52 148.09 2.74
004: Low
Low power Power Time 148000 150333 38.88 111 4.32
005: Off
Sleep Mode Time 508776.0 520377.0 193.35 1.8 0.35
Total 17.47
641
MEMO
642
MEMO
643
MEMO
644 EN
MP 501/601
SP 5300/5310
Machine Code:
D255/D256/M281/M282
Appendices
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Specifications
General Specifications (MP 501/601)........................................................................................................... 5
Mainframe...................................................................................................................................................... 5
Copier Specifications..................................................................................................................................... 9
Printer Specifications....................................................................................................................................12
Scan Specifications......................................................................................................................................13
General Specifications (SP 5300/5310)..................................................................................................... 18
Mainframe....................................................................................................................................................18
Supported Paper Sizes.................................................................................................................................... 22
Paper Feed................................................................................................................................................... 22
Software Accessories.......................................................................................................................................24
Printer Drivers............................................................................................................................................... 24
Scanner and LAN Fax drivers.....................................................................................................................27
Optional Equipment......................................................................................................................................... 28
Paper Feed Unit PB1100............................................................................................................................ 28
2. Preventive Maintenance Tables
Maintenance Tables........................................................................................................................................ 29
Preventive Maintenance Items.................................................................................................................... 29
Mainframe........................................................................................................................................... 29
Paper Feed Unit PB1100................................................................................................................... 31
3. SP Mode Tables
Service Program Mode....................................................................................................................................33
Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode...................................................................................... 33
Entering SP Mode............................................................................................................................... 33
Exiting SP Mode.................................................................................................................................. 33
Types of SP Modes...................................................................................................................................... 33
SP Mode Button Summary..................................................................................................................34
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing (MP 501/601 Only)............... 35
Selecting the Program Number (MP 501/601 Only).................................................................... 36
Service Mode Lock/Unlock...............................................................................................................36
Remarks........................................................................................................................................................ 37
Display on the Operation Panel Screen............................................................................................37
Others...................................................................................................................................................38
1
Main SP Tables-1.............................................................................................................................................39
SP1-XXX (Feed)............................................................................................................................................ 39
Main SP Tables-2.............................................................................................................................................42
SP2-XXX (Drum)........................................................................................................................................... 42
Main SP Tables-3.............................................................................................................................................43
SP3-XXX (Process)........................................................................................................................................43
Main SP Tables-4.............................................................................................................................................45
SP4-XXX (Scanner)...................................................................................................................................... 45
Main SP Tables-5 (Engine)..............................................................................................................................50
SP5-XXX (Mode)..........................................................................................................................................50
Main SP Tables-5 (Controller)........................................................................................................................ 53
SP5-XXX (Mode)..........................................................................................................................................53
Main SP Tables-6 (MP 501/601 Only)....................................................................................................... 95
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)..................................................................................................................................95
Main SP Tables-7 (Engine)..............................................................................................................................96
SP7-XXX (Data Log).....................................................................................................................................96
Main SP Tables-7 (Controller)........................................................................................................................ 99
SP7-XXX (Data Log).....................................................................................................................................99
Main SP Tables-8.......................................................................................................................................... 123
SP8-XXX (Data Log2)................................................................................................................................123
Printer Service Mode.....................................................................................................................................175
Printer Service Mode.................................................................................................................................175
Scanner Service Mode (MP 501/601 Only)............................................................................................ 186
SP1-XXX......................................................................................................................................................186
SP2-XXX......................................................................................................................................................187
Input and Output Check................................................................................................................................189
Input Check Table (SP5-803).................................................................................................................. 189
Output Check Table (SP5-804)............................................................................................................... 189
4. Software Configuration
Printing Features.............................................................................................................................................191
Behavior of USB Printer Detection........................................................................................................... 191
Auto PDL Detection Function.....................................................................................................................191
Overview...........................................................................................................................................191
2
Conditions for detection of the PDL................................................................................................. 191
PDL detection by the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter.......................................192
PDL selection and switching............................................................................................................. 193
Triggers..............................................................................................................................................194
Some possible problems.................................................................................................................. 195
Printer Bit Switch description............................................................................................................ 196
Print Images Rotation.................................................................................................................................197
PJL USTATUS..............................................................................................................................................198
Scanner Features (MP 501/601 Only)......................................................................................................201
Display settings of recently used scan destination.................................................................................. 201
The Setting of SMTP authentication in Scan to Email............................................................................. 202
Typical example................................................................................................................................202
The Qualification Switching of Scan to Folder........................................................................................204
Management Features.................................................................................................................................. 206
How to Disable the Document Server Function...................................................................................... 206
Security Features............................................................................................................................................207
How to Restrict Access to the WIM Job Menu........................................................................................207
How to Restrict Web Image Monitor Access to the Document Server (MP 501/601 Only)............ 207
User Authentication for Specific MFP Applications................................................................................ 208
3
4
1. Specifications
General Specifications (MP 501/601)

Mainframe
Item Spec.
Configuration: Desktop
Color Supported: Black and White
Intel® AtomTM Processor BayTrail-I

CPU:
1.46 GHz
RAM: Standard: 2 GB
HDD: 320 GB
Scanning Element: One-dimensional solid scanning through CCD
Printing process: Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing
Development: Monocomponent jumping development system
Fusing System: Roller fusing system
A4 SEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B5 SEF, B6 SEF, 8.5" ×

14"(LG) SEF, 8.5" × 13"(Foolscap) SEF, 8.5" × 11"(LT) SEF,
8.25" × 14"(Government LG) SEF, 8.25" × 13"(Folio) SEF,
8" × 13"(F/GL) SEF, 8" × 10"(Eng Quatro) SEF, 7.25" ×
Recommended Tray 1 (Standard 10.5"(Executive) SEF, 5.5" × 8.5" (Half Letter) SEF, 16K
Paper Size: Tray): SEF, 8.5" × 13.4" SEF
<Custom Size Paper>
Width: 105.0 mm (4.14 inch) - 216.0 mm (8.50 inch)
Length: 148.0 mm (5.83 inch) - 356.0 mm (14.0 inch)
5
1. Specifications
Item Spec.
A4 SEF, A5 SEF, B5 SEF, B6 SEF, 8.5" × 14"(LG) SEF, 8.5"

× 13"(Foolscap) SEF, 8.5" × 11"(LT) SEF, 8.25" ×
14"(Government LG) SEF, 8.25" × 13"(Folio) SEF, 8" ×
13"(F/GL) SEF, 8" × 10"(Eng Quatro) SEF, 7.25" ×
Tray 2 to 5 10.5"(Executive) SEF, 5.5" × 8.5" (Half Letter) SEF, Com10
Recommended
(Optional Paper SEF, Monarch SEF, C5 SEF, C6 SEF, DL Env SEF, 16K SEF,
Paper Size:
Feed Tray): 8.5" × 13.4" SEF
<Custom Size Paper>

10.5"(Executive) SEF, 5.5" × 8.5" (Half Letter) SEF, Com10
Recommended
Bypass Tray: SEF, Monarch SEF, C5 SEF, C6 SEF, DL Env SEF, 16K SEF,
Paper Size:
8.5" × 13.4" SEF
<Custom Size Paper>
Paper Feeding Standard: 600 sheets (500 sheets + 100 sheets/ bypass)
Capacity
(LT/A4: Option: Paper Feed Unit: 500 sheets
80gsm paper): Max: 2,600 sheets (500 sheets × 5 trays + 100 sheets/bypass)
Paper Output Max: 500 sheets

Capacity
(LT/A4:
80gsm paper):
6
Item Spec.
Paper Type Tray 1 (Standard Paper Type:

Capacity: Tray): Plain Paper (Not Displayed as Paper Type), Recycle Paper,
Color Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Bond Paper
Thickness:
Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick, Thick Paper 1
Tray 2 to 5 Paper Type:

(Optional Paper Plain Paper (Not Displayed as Paper Type), Recycle Paper,
Feed Tray): Color Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Bond Paper,
Envelope
Thickness:
Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick, Thick Paper 1,
Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3
Bypass Tray: Paper Type:

Plain Paper (Not Displayed as Paper Type), Recycle Paper,
Color Paper, Special Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper,
Bond Paper, OHP, Label, Envelope
Thickness:
Thin Paper, Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick,
Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3
Paper Weight: Tray 1 (Standard 64 - 120 g/m2 (17 - 44 lb. Bond)

Tray):
Tray 2-5 (Optional 64 - 120 g/m2 (17 - 44 lb. Bond)

paper feed tray): * Envelope: 64 - 220 g/m2 (17 - 80 lb. Bond)
Bypass Tray: 60 - 220 g/m2 (16 - 80 lb. Bond)
Max. Imageable Area: 216 × 356 mm (8.5 × 14.0 inches)
First Copy Time (LT/A4 SEF, Tray 1): 7 seconds
First Print Time 6 seconds
7
1. Specifications
Item Spec.
NA/AP:
MP 501: 24 seconds
MP 601: 25.4 seconds
Warm-up Time: EU:
60 seconds
* The warm-up time may differ depending on the conditions
and environment of the machine.
NA: 120 - 127 V, 11 A, 60 Hz

Power Source:
EU/AP: 220 - 240 V, 6 A, 50/60 Hz
1.5 kW or less
Max Power Consumption
(The complete system consists of the main unit, four optional
(Complete System):
paper feed units, and wireless LAN board)
MP 501:
Stand-by: 30.4 dB (A)
Printing: 73.3 dB (A)
Noise emission (Sound Power Level) MP 601:
(Complete System): Stand-by: 30.3 dB (A)
paper feed units, and caster table)
MP 501: 5.0K
Target Monthly ACV:
MP 601: 6.5K
Max Monthly CV 15K

(5 years):
PM Cycle: ARDF: 200K, Optics: 500K, Mainframe: 500K

Reliability:
MCBC (Mean 0.15 or less
Copy Between
Calls):
Dimensions (W x D x H): 475 × 504 × 645 mm (18.8 × 19.9 × 25.4 inches)
Weight: Less than 28 kg (62 lb.)
8
Copier Specifications
Item Spec.
CPM: MP 501: 50 cpm (A4 SEF), 52 cpm (LT SEF)

MP 601: 60 cpm (A4 SEF), 62 cpm (LT SEF)
Copy Resolution: 600 dpi/bit
Maximum Continuous Copy Run: 999 sheets
Reproduction NA: 155%, 129%, 100%, 93%, 78%, 65%

Ratio:
EU/AP: 200%, 141%, 100%, 93%, 71%, 50%
Zoom: From 25% to 400% in 1% step
Number of Copy Reservations: 8 jobs
Image Density: Auto Density Selection

Manual: 9 levels
Copy Mode: Text

Text/Photo
Photo
Pale
Generation Copy
(Default: Text)
Paper Selection: Tray 1

Tray 2 (optional paper feed tray)
Bypass Tray
(Default: Tray 1)
Auto Tray Switch: Yes
Duplex: 1 sided to 2 sided, 2sided to 2 sided, Book to 2 sided, Front

and Back to 2 sided
9
1. Specifications
Item Spec.
Book: Booklet: Yes
Magazine:
Layout & Booklet:
Series: Book to simplex: Yes
2 sided original to
simplex:
Combine (Layout): The following combinations are supported:

2 into 1 simplex
4 into 1 simplex
8 into 1 simplex
1 duplex into 1 simplex
4 into 1 duplex
8 into 1 duplex
16 into 1 duplex
2 duplex into 1 duplex
Shift/Erase/ Centering: Yes

Margin
Cornering: No
Adjustment:
Margin Adjustment: 1mm step (0-30mm) (Default: 0mm)
Scan Position No
Adjustment:
Creep Adjustment: No
Erase Center: 1mm step (2-99mm) (Default:10mm)
Erase Border: 1mm step (2-99mm) (Default: 10mm)
10
Item Spec.
Cover Sheet Front Cover: Copy or Blank (Default: Copy)

Chapter
Front and Back
Slip Sheets: Cover:
Chapter: Yes (Up to 20 chapters)
Slip Sheets: Yes
Image Rotation: No
Electronic Without Shift Sort: Yes

Sort:
Rotate Sort: No
Shift Sort: No
Electronic Stack: No
Stapling: No
Image Repeat: Yes

Creation:
Double Copy: No
Mirror: No
Positive/Negative: No
Erase Inside: No
Erase Outside: No
Stamp/ Preset Stamp: Yes (8 Stamps / 2 sizes) * Not from the By-pass tray
Numbering:
User Stamp: Yes (4 Stamps / 1 sizes) * Not from the By-pass tray
Date Stamp: Yes (5 Stamps) * Not from the By-pass tray
Page Number: Yes (6 Stamps) * Not from the By-pass tray
Bates Numbering: Yes * Not from the By-pass tray
Printing copy Yes

prevention pattern:
Sharp/Soft: 7 levels
11
1. Specifications
Item Spec.
Contrast: 9 levels
Background Density Adjustment: 9 levels
Job Programs: Mode: 25 Program

Default: 1 Program
User Code: 8 digits / 1000 user codes
Interrupt Copy: Yes
Auto Start: Yes
Job Preset: Yes (8 jobs)
Sample Copy: Yes
Printer Specifications
Item Spec.
Standard:
RPCS, PCL 5e/6, PostScript 3, PDF, MediaPrint (JPEG, TIFF)
Printer Language:
Option:
IPDS, XPS
Print Resolution: 1200 × 1200 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi
PCL: Scalable 45 fonts + Bitmapped: 6 fonts + International 13

Font: fonts
PS3: 136 Roman fonts
Standard:
Ethernet (1000BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX/ 10BASE-T), SD card slot,
USB2.0 Host
Host Interfaces: Option:
IEEE 1284 parallel interface, IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN
interface, Extended USB board, USB device server, Bluetooth
interface
Network Protocol: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6)
12
Item Spec.
USB interface: Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server

Supported operating system 2003/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2, OS X 10.8 or later
Scan Specifications
Item Spec.
Color Scan: Standard
Scanning BW: 60 pages/minute (A4/LT SEF, 300dpi)

Speed: Color: 40 pages/minute (A4/LT SEF, 300dpi)
Scanning Resolution: 100 / 200 (default) / 300 / 400 / 600 dpi
Original sizes that can be Length: 10 - 216 mm (0.4 - 8.5 inches)

scanned: Width: 10 - 356 mm (0.4 - 14.0 inches)
Main: 216 mm (8.5 inches)

Scan Area
Sub: 356 mm (14.0 inches)
sRGB Supported: Yes
Standard: Ethernet interface (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/

Network Interface: 10BASE-T)
Option: IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
Network: TCP/IP
Sending E-mail: SMTP
Protocol:
Scan to Folder: SMB, FTP
Web Services on Devices for Scanning
Compression Type: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, JBIG2), JPEG
BW: Text, Text / Line Art, Text / Photo, Photo, Grey Scale
Scan Mode:
Color: Text / Photo, Glossy Photo, Auto Color Select
Auto Density Selection

Image Density:
Manual: 7 levels
13
1. Specifications
Item Spec.
Image Rotation: Yes
SADF/Batch Mode: Yes
Mixed Size Mode: Mixed LT/LG Size only.
Reduce and Enlarge: Yes
Split scan from Booklet type Yes

Original:
Digital Signature for PDF: Yes
On BW 1bit / (MH, MR or MMR)

Single Page TIFF:
Off BW 1bit, BW Grayscale or Full Color
On BW 1bit /(MH, MR or MMR)

Multi Page TIFF:
On BW Grayscale or Full Color / (JPEG)

Single Page JPEG:
Off -
On BW 1bit / (MH, MR, MMR or JBIG2), BW Grayscale / (JPEG),

Single Page PDF: Full Color / (JPEG)
On BW 1bit / (MH, MR, MMR or JBIG2), BW Grayscale / (JPEG),

Multi Page PDF: Full Color / (JPEG)
On BW Grayscale / (JPEG or JPEG2000), Full Color / (JPEG or

Single Page High JPEG2000)
Compression PDF:
Off -
On BW Grayscale / (JPEG or JPEG2000), Full Color / (JPEG or

Multi Page High JPEG2000)
Compression PDF:
Off -
14
Scan to Email
Item Spec.
Requirement (Mail Protocol, SMTP (Mail Server) Gateway and TCP/IP

Transmission Protocol, Protocol):
Authorization Function: SMTP authentication, POP before SMTP authentication
Resolution: 100, 200 (Default), 300, 400, 600
Max Email Address in HDD: 2,000
Register Group Address in HDD: Max. 100 Group (Max. 500 addresses in one group address)
Input of Destination E-mail Possible, Max. 100 destinations per job

Address via Soft Key:
Search methods of Email By name and E-mail address

Address in HDD:
LDAP Search: Yes
Max Address Numbers Per Max. 500 addresses per send

Send:
Attention: To, cc, bcc
With Restriction: 128 – 102,400 KB

Email Size:
Without Restriction: -
Manual: Max. 128 Characters via soft key

Input Subject:
User Pre-register: Max. 20 Characters via soft key
Manual: Max. 80 Characters via soft key

User Pre-register: Max. 400 Characters via soft key (80
Input Main body text:
characters × 5 lines)
Preset: -
Input File Name: Yes
File Type: Single Page: TIFF/JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF, Secure
PDF, Digital Signature PDF, PDF/A
Multi Page: TIFF, PDF, High Compression PDF, Secure PDF, Digital
Signature PDF, PDF/OCR*
*Option required
15
1. Specifications
Item Spec.
Program User Settings: Up to 25 programs
Divide and send Email (If the file Yes (By page or size) / No (Default: Yes (By size)*)
size exceed the max size.): *If the sent file size exceeded the maximum E-mail size, it would
be divided to multiple sending. In addition, the sent files might not
be accepted by the receiving side due to the limitation in the
receiving capacity at the receiver SMTP server or E-mail software
setting.
Resend: Yes / No (Default: Yes)
Scan to Folder
Item Spec.
Protocol Support: SMB, FTP
Security: Client folder log-in (log-in name and password), Encryption of

log-in name and password during transmission
Resolution: 100 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi (Default: 200 dpi)
Register client folder address in Max. 2,000 folders

HDD:
Maintain client folder address in Direct input on operation panel, Web Image Monitor, Smart
HDD: Device Monitor
Direct addressing of destination Yes

client folder via soft key: SMB: Network path -> Client folder -> Password
FTP: Server -> Network path -> User account -> Password
Search client folder: SMB: Browsing directly to the designated folders

FTP: By client folder name
Max. client folder numbers per Max. 50 client folders / PCs per send
send:
Simultaneous Transmission: Max. 550
Group address: Max group:100

Max member per group:500
Input File Name: Yes
16
Item Spec.
Scan to File size 2,000 MB per file
File Size when combined Scan 128 - 102, 400 KB

to Folder & Scan to E-mail: Default = 2,048 KB (With restriction), 725MB (Without
restriction), (Scan to E-mail file size applied).
File Type: Single Page: TIFF/JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF, Secure
PDF, Digital Signature PDF
Multi Page: TIFF, PDF, High Compression PDF, Secure PDF, Digital
Signature PDF
Program User Settings: Up to 25 programs
Resend: Yes / No (Default: Yes)
Network TWAIN Driver

Item Spec.
OS: Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server

2003/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
(Operates in 32-bit compatibility mode on 64-bit operating
systems)
Resolution: BW: 100 – 1200 dpi (Black and White / Grayscale)
Color: 100 – 1200 dpi (Black and White / Grayscale)
Scan Mode: Standard / Photo / OCR / Filing
Image Adjustment: Brightness / Contrast / Threshold /Gamma Adjustment /

Halftone Pattern
Endorser: Supported
Stamp: Date / Page Number / Text
17
1. Specifications
General Specifications (SP 5300/5310)

Mainframe
Item Spec.
Configuration: Desktop
Color Supported: Black and White
Intel® AtomTM Processor BayTrail-I

CPU:
1.46 GHz
RAM: Standard: 2 GB
Printing process: Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing
Development: Monocomponent jumping development system
Fusing System: Roller fusing system
Standard:
PCL 5e/6, PostScript 3, PDF
Printer Language:
Option:
XPS, IPDS
Print Resolution: 1200 × 1200 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi
PCL: Scalable 45 fonts + Bitmapped: 6 fonts + International

Font: 13 fonts
PS3: 136 Roman fonts
Standard:
Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
Host Interfaces: Option:
IEEE 1284 parallel interface, IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless
LAN interface, USB device server, Extended USB board
Network Protocol: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6)
Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server

Network/Operating System: 2003/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2, OS X 10.8 or
later
18
Item Spec.

Recommended Tray 1 (Standard 10.5"(Executive) SEF, 5.5" × 8.5" (Half Letter) SEF, 16K SEF,
Paper Size: Tray): 8.5" × 13.4" SEF
<Custom Size Paper>
A4 SEF, A5 SEF, B5 SEF, B6 SEF, 8.5" × 14"(LG) SEF, 8.5" ×

13"(Foolscap) SEF, 8.5" × 11"(LT) SEF, 8.25" ×
14"(Government LG) SEF, 8.25" × 13"(Folio) SEF, 8" ×
13"(F/GL) SEF, 8" × 10"(Eng Quatro) SEF, 7.25" ×
Tray 2 to 5 10.5"(Executive) SEF, 5.5" × 8.5" (Half Letter) SEF, Com10
Recommended
(Optional Paper SEF, Monarch SEF, C5 SEF, C6 SEF, DL Env SEF, 16K SEF,
Paper Size:
Feed Tray): 8.5" × 13.4" SEF
<Custom Size Paper>

10.5"(Executive) SEF, 5.5" × 8.5" (Half Letter) SEF, Com10
Recommended
Bypass Tray: SEF, Monarch SEF, C5 SEF, C6 SEF, DL Env SEF, 16K SEF,
Paper Size:
8.5" × 13.4" SEF
<Custom Size Paper>
Paper Feeding Standard: 600 sheets (500 sheets + 100 sheets/ bypass)
Capacity
Option: Paper Feed Unit: 500 sheets
(LT/A4: 80gsm
paper): Max: 2,600 sheets (500 sheets × 5 trays + 100 sheets/bypass)
19
1. Specifications
Item Spec.
Paper Output
Capacity
Max: 500 sheets
(LT/A4: 80gsm
paper):
Plain Paper, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick Paper, Thick Paper

Tray 1 (Standard 1, Recycled Paper, Color Paper, Special Paper 1, Special
Tray): Paper 2, Special Paper 3, Letterhead Paper, Preprinted
Paper, Bond Paper
Plain Paper, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick Paper, Thick Paper

Tray 2 to 5
1, Recycled Paper, Color Paper, Special Paper 1, Special
Paper Type (Optional Paper
Paper 2, Special Paper 3, Letterhead Paper, Preprinted
Capacity: Feed Tray):
Paper, Bond Paper, Envelope
Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick Paper,

Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3, Recycled Paper,
Bypass Tray: Color Paper, Special Paper 1, Special Paper 2, Special
Paper 3, Letterhead Paper, Preprinted Paper, Bond Paper,
OHP, Label Paper, Envelope
Tray 1 (Standard
64 - 135 g/m2 (17 - 36 lb. Bond)
Tray):
Paper Weight: Tray 2-5 (Optional

64 - 220 g/m2 (17 - 80 lb. Bond)
paper feed tray):
Bypass Tray: 60 - 220 g/m2 (16 - 80 lb. Bond)
First Print Time 6 seconds
SP 5300: 21 seconds
SP 5310: 25 seconds
Warm-up Time:
* The warm-up time may differ depending on the conditions
and environment of the machine.
NA: 120 - 127 V, 11 A, 60 Hz

Power Source:
EU/AP: 220 - 240 V, 6 A, 50/60 Hz
1.4 kW or less
Max Power Consumption
(Complete System):
paper feed units, and wireless LAN board)
20
Item Spec.
SP 5300:
Stand-by: 30.7 dB (A)
Noise emission (Sound Power Level) SP 5310:
(Complete System): Stand-by: 29.9 dB (A)
paper feed units, and caster table)
SP 5300: 4.0K
Target Monthly ACV:
SP 5310: 5.5K
Max Monthly CV
15K
(5 years):
PM Cycle: 500K
Reliability:
MCBC (Mean
Copy Between 0.15 or less
Calls):
Dimensions (W x D x H): 420 × 410 × 345 mm (16.6 × 16.2 × 13.6 inches)
Weight: Less than 18 kg (40 lb.)
21
1. Specifications
Supported Paper Sizes

Paper Feed
Remarks:
C Supported: Select the paper size using the paper size dial on the tray.
Supported: Set the paper size dial on the tray to "Asterisk", and select the paper size with
D
the control panel.
E Supported: Select the paper size using the control panel.
- Not supported.
* The duplex function cannot be used with envelopes.
Tray 2 to 5
Tray 1
Paper Size (Optional Bypass Tray
(Main Paper Feed
Paper Feed
Tray)
Tray)
A4 SEF 210 × 297 mm C C E
A5 SEF 148 × 210 mm C C E
A5 LEF 210 × 148 mm D - E
A6 SEF 105 × 148 mm C - E
B5 SEF 182 × 257 mm D D E
B6 SEF 128 × 182 mm D D E
Legal SEF 8.5 × 14 inch C C E
Foolscap SEF 8.5 × 13 inch D D E
Letter SEF 8.5 × 11 inch C C E
GovernmentLG SEF 8.25 × 14 inch D D E
Folio SEF 8.25 × 13 inch D D E
F/GL SEF 8 × 13 inch D D E
22
Supported Paper Sizes
Tray 2 to 5
Tray 1
Paper Size (Optional Bypass Tray
(Main Paper Feed
Paper Feed
Tray)
Tray)
Eng Quatro SEF 8 × 10 inch D D E
Executive SEF 7.25 × 10.5 inch D D E
Half Letter SEF 5.5 × 8.5 inch C C E
Com10 Env. SEF 4.125 × 9.5 inch - D E*
Monarch Env. SEF 3.875 × 7.5 inch - D E*
C5 Env. SEF 162 × 229 mm - D E*
C6 Env. SEF 114 × 162 mm - D E*
DL Env. SEF 110 × 220 mm - D E*
16K SEF 195 × 267 mm D D E
8 1/2 × 13 2/5 SEF 8.5 × 13.4 inch D D E
Custom:
Tray 2 to 5
Tray 1 (Main Tray) Bypass Tray
(Optional Paper Feed Tray)
105.0 - 216.0 mm 92.0 - 216.0 mm 70.0 - 216.0 mm

Width
4.14 - 8.50 inch 3.63 - 8.50 inch 2.76 - 8.50 inch
148.0 - 356.0 mm 162.0 - 356.0 mm 148.0 - 356.0 mm

Length
5.83 - 14.0 inch 6.38 - 14.0 inch 5.83 - 14.0 inch
23
1. Specifications
Software Accessories
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows you to
select which components to install.
Printer Drivers
Windows
OS Type PCL5c PCL6 PS3 XPS
Starter - - - -
Home Basic *3 *3 *1
Home Premium *3 *3 *1
Windows Vista
Business *3 *3 *1
Ultimate *3 *3 *1
Enterprise *3 *3 *1
Starter - - - -
Home Basic - - - -
Home Premium
Windows 7
Professional
Ultimate
Enterprise
Windows 8
Windows 8.1
Windows 8/8.1 Pro
Enterprise
RT - - - -
24
OS Type PCL5c PCL6 PS3 XPS
Home
Mobile - - - -
Pro
Windows 10 Enterprise
Education
Mobile Enterprise - - - -
loT Core - - - -
Standard Edition *2 *2 *2 -
Enterprise Edition *2 *2 *2 -
Windows Server
2003/ R2 Datacenter Edition - - - -
Web Edition - - - -
Standard Edition
Enterprise Edition
Windows Server Standard without Hyper-V

2008/R2 Enterprise without Hyper-V
Datacenter Edition - - - -
Web Edition - - - -
Foundation
Windows Server Essentials

2012/R2 Standard
Datacenter - - - -
: Supported
-: Not supported
* RPCS driver has been discontinued.
*1: SP1 or later is recommended
25
1. Specifications
*2: SP2 or later is Recommended

*3: SP1 or later is recommended
Mac OS Environment
OS PS3 Printer Utility for Mac
Mac OS 8.6 or later, Mac OS X classic - -
Mac OS X Native: v.10.8 or later -
: Supported
-: Not supported
UNIX Environment
UNIX Platforms Version
Sun Solaris 9, 10
HP-UX 11.x, 11i v2, 11i v3
Red Hat Linux Enterprise V4, V5, V6
SCO OpenServer 5.0.7, 6.0
IBM AIX V 5L, V5.3, V6.1, V7.1
SAP R/3 Environment (Device Type / Barcode & OCR Package)

Device Type will be provided from SAP itself in SAP Printer Vendor Program.
For the detailed specification, please refer to another announcement to be issued in the future.
Code 128, Code 39, Code 93, Codabar, 2 of 5

Supported Barcode & Barcode Fonts
interleaved/Industrial/Matrix, MSI, USPS, UPC/EAN
OCR Fonts
OCR Fonts OCR A, OCR B
• The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows 2000, which uses Microsoft
PS.
• A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the driver.
26
Scanner and LAN Fax drivers
Operating system for TWAIN driver:

Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012
R2
(TWAIN scanner runs in 32-bit compatible mode on a 64-bit operating system, so TWAIN scanner
is not compatible with 64-bit applications. Use it with 32-bit applications.)
Operating system for WIA driver:
Windows Vista (SP1 or later)/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
(WIA scanner can function under both 32- and 64-bit operating systems.)
Operating system for LAN FAX driver:
Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012
R2
• The LAN Fax driver lets you fax documents directly from your PC. Address Book Editor and Cover
Sheet Editor are to be installed as well.
• The Network TWAIN driver operates in 32-bit compatibility mode on 64-bit operating systems
• The Network TWAIN driver is provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM.
27
1. Specifications
Optional Equipment
Paper Feed Unit PB1100
Item Spec.
Paper Size: Half Letter SEF – A4 SEF
Paper Weight: 64 – 120 g/m2 (17 – 44 lb.)
Paper Capacity: 500 sheets (500 sheets × 1 tray with 80 g/m2 paper)
Power Consumption: Less than 13 W (Average)
Dimension (W × D × H): 380 × 410 × 121 mm (15.0 × 16.2 × 4.8 inches)
Weight: 4.0 kg (8.9 lb.)
28
Maintenance Tables
• The amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints.
Preventive Maintenance Items
Chart: A4 (LT)/6%
Mode: 3 prints/job
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect
• Yield Parts: The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print
volume made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine's targeted lifetime if
the machine is used under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, and P/J). So, these parts
are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts). The parts with "(R)" in this table are
yield parts.
Mainframe
Item 200K EM Life Note
ARDF pickup roller (R) - 200K
ARDF paper feed roller (R) - 200K
ARDF friction pad (R) - 200K
Optics (MP 501/601 Only)
29
Wipe with a soft cloth

Exposure glass - C - infiltrated with alcohol or
neutral detergent.
Exposure glass (for ARDF) - C - Wipe with a dry cloth.
Mainframe
Transfer roller (R) - -
Drum unit (R) - -
Development Unit (R) - -
Fusing Unit (R) - -

Paper feed roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.

Pickup roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.

Separation roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.

Bypass paper feed roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.

infiltrated with alcohol or
MP 501/601: Registration sensor
C C - water.
SP 5300/5310: Registration sensor 1
Refer to the FSM for the
cleaning procedure.
Registration roller - C - Wipe with a soft dry cloth.
Vent - C - Wipe with a soft dry cloth.
30
Maintenance Tables
Paper Feed Unit PB1100

Paper feed roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.

Pickup roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.

Separation roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.
31
32
3. SP Mode Tables
• Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates
that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to process the
data.
Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode
• The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only. If this mode is used by
anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be deleted or settings might
be changed. In such case, product quality cannot be guaranteed any more.
Entering SP Mode
For details, ask your supervisor.
Exiting SP Mode
• MP 501/601: Press [Exit] on the operation panel twice to return to the copy window.
• SP 5300/5310: Select [End] from the service mode main menu, and then press [OK].
Types of SP Modes
Select one of the Service Program modes from the diagram below after you access the SP mode.
MP 501/601
• System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions
• Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions
• Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions
• Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions
• This section explains the functions of the System/Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the Fax
service manual for the Fax SP modes.
33
3. SP Mode Tables
SP 5300/5310
• Service SP: SP modes related to the controller/printer functions
• Engine SP: SP modes related to the engine functions
SP Mode Button Summary

MP 501/601
Select one of the Service Program modes (Service, or Engine) from the touch panel.
Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
No. Description
1 Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
34
No. Description
2 Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
3 Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode
(highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen.
4 Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then
press [#]. The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing [#]. If
not, just press the required SP Mode number.
5 Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume
normal operation.
6 Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
7 Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
8 Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen
display (page).
9 Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
10 Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
SP 5300/5310
Select one of the Service Program modes (Service, or Engine) with [ / ] keys, and then press the
[OK] key.
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing (MP 501/601 Only)
1. In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press [Copy Window].
2. Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.)
for the test print.
3. Press [Start] to start the test print.
4. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1.
35
3. SP Mode Tables
Selecting the Program Number (MP 501/601 Only)
Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you
want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP number that
you want to open. Then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you
want to set and press it. The small entry box on the right activates and shows the below
default or the current settings.
• Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.

5. Do this procedure to enter a setting:
• Press to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter the appropriate
number. The number you enter writes over the previous setting.
• Press [#] to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a number that is out of
range.)
• Press [Yes] when you are prompted to complete the selection.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press [Copy Window] to open the copy window and
select the settings for the test print. Press [Start], and then press SP Mode (highlighted) in
the copy window to return to the SP mode display.
7. Press [Exit] two times to return to the copy window when you are finished.
Service Mode Lock/Unlock
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the service representative cannot operate the
machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on the
machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in as the machine
administrator, and then set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF:
MP 501/601: User Tools -> Machine Features -> System Settings -> Administrator Tools -> Service
Mode Lock -> OFF
SP 5300/5310: Security Options -> Service Mode Lock -> Off
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The service representative can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not
necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
36
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP5-169-001 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5-169-001 from "1" to "0".
• Turn the main power off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing the
machine.
• The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
Remarks
Display on the Operation Panel Screen
The maximum number of characters which can show on the operation panel screen is limited. For this
reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated. The following are
abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.
Item Description
Thin Paper: 60-63 g/m2, 16lb.

Plain Paper 1: 64-74 g/m2, 17-20lb.
Plain Paper 2: 75-90 g/m2, 20-24lb.
Paper Weight Middle Thick: 91-105 g/m2, 24-28lb.
Thick Paper 1: 106-135 g/m2, 28-36lb.
Thick Paper 2: 136-170 g/m2, 36-63lb.
Thick Paper 3: 171-220 g/m2, 63-80lb.
N: Normal paper
Paper Type MTH: Middle thick paper
TH: Thick paper
P: Paper tray
Paper Feed Station
B: By-pass table
S: Simplex
Print Mode
D: Duplex
Notes on the LCD
37
3. SP Mode Tables
Since the MP 501/601 (touch panel model) and SP 5300/5310 (4-line panel model) have different
types of operation panel, characters are displayed differently. In this manual, characters are shown as
they appear on the MP 501/601 (touch panel model).
Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.

• The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the
following way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric
• If "Alphanumeric" is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of the SP mode
shows on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only numbers. However, the settings
in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.
• An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is stored in
the NVRAM and EEPROM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the default value.
"ENG" and "CTL" show which NVRAM contains the data.
• ENG: EEPROM on the BiCU
• CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
• A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main power must be
turned OFF and ON to effect the setting change.
• FA: Factory setting
Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting sheets
enclosed.
38
Main SP Tables-1
Main SP Tables-1
SP1-XXX (Feed)
1001 [Reistration Correct]
1-001-001 Main ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
1-001-002 Option Tray 1 ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
1-001-006 By-Pass Tray ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
1-001-007 Duplex ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
1002 [Reistration Correct]
1-002-001 Main ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
1-002-006 By-Pass Tray ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
1-002-007 Duplex ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
1885 [Tray1 narrow width paper mode]
1-885-002 ON/OFF ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1890 [Archive mode]
1-890-001 ON/OFF ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
39
3. SP Mode Tables
1891 [Scattering Control]
1-891-001 Main ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1-891-002 Option Tray 1 ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1-891-006 By-Pass Tray ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1901 [Fuser Type Setting]
1-901-001 - ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1998 [Reserve SP]
1-998-001 reserve01 ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
40
Main SP Tables-1
41
3. SP Mode Tables
Main SP Tables-2
SP2-XXX (Drum)
2102 [Magnification Adjust]
2-102-001 Main Mag. ENG* [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1% / step]
2103 [Erase Margin Adjust]
2-103-001 Left Edge Width ENG* [0 to 9.9 / 4 / 0.1 mm / step]
2-103-002 Right Edge Width ENG* [0 to 9.9 / 4 / 0.1 mm / step]
2-103-003 Lead Edge Width ENG* [0 to 9.9 / 4 / 0.1 mm / step]
2-103-004 Trail Edge Width ENG* [0 to 9.9 / 4 / 0.1 mm / step]
2107 [Image Parameter]
2-107-001 Image Gamma Flag ENG* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
2107 [Vsync Timing]
2-107-130 Normal ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
2-107-131 Thick ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
2109 [Test Pattern]
2-109-003 Pattern Selection ENG [0 to 24 / 0 / 1 / step]
2-109-006 Density ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 / step]
42
Main SP Tables-3
Main SP Tables-3
SP3-XXX (Process)
3900 [Drum Refresh]
3-900-001 On ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
3-900-002 Off ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
3901 [Drum Refresh]

(UP) • MP 501/601: [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Maintenance] -> [Drum
Refresh]
• SP 5300/5310: [Menu] -> [Maintenance] -> [Quality Maintenance] -> [Drum
Refresh]
3-901-001 - ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
3902 [Auto Drum Refresh]

(UP) • MP 501/601: [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Maintenance] -> [Auto
Drum Refresh]
• SP 5300/5310: [Menu] -> [Maintenance] -> [Quality Maintenance] -> [Auto
Drum Refresh]
3-902-001 - ENG [0 to 3 / 2 / 1 / step]
3903 [Altitude Adjust]

(UP) • MP 501/601: [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Maintenance] -> [Altitude
Adjustment]
• SP 5300/5310: [Menu] -> [Maintenance] -> [Quality Maintenance] -> [Altitude
Adjustment]
3-903-001 - ENG* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
43
3. SP Mode Tables
3904 [MainCharger Output]

(UP) • MP 501/601: [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Maintenance] -> [Charger
Output]
• SP 5300/5310: [Menu] -> [Maintenance] -> [Quality Maintenance] ->
[Charger Output]
3-904-001 - ENG* [1 to 5 / 3 / 1 / step]
44
Main SP Tables-4
Main SP Tables-4
SP4-XXX (Scanner)
4011
(MP [S-to-S Regist Adjustment]
501/601
only)
4-011-001 - ENG* [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4012
(MP [Scanner Erase Margin: Scale]
501/601
only)
4-012-001 Book: Leading Edge ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-012-002 Book: Trailing Edge ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-012-003 Book: Left ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-012-004 Book: Right ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4013
(MP [Scanner Free run]
501/601
only)
4-013-002 Book mode :Lamp On ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
4020
(MP [DF Dust Check]
501/601
only)
4-020-001 Dust Detect:On/Off ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
4-020-002 Dust Detect:Lvl ENG [0 to 8 / 4 / 1 / step]
4-020-003 Dust Reject:Lvl ENG [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 / step]
45
3. SP Mode Tables
4108
(MP [Sub Scan Speed.Adjustment]
501/601
only)
4-108-001 - ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 % / step]
4110
(MP [L-Edge Timing Adjustment]
501/601
only)
4-110-001 - ENG [-45 to 45 / 0 / 1 pulse / step]
4400
(MP [Scanner Erase Margin]
501/601
only)
4-400-001 Book: Leading Edge ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-400-002 Book: Trailing Edge ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-400-003 Book: Left ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-400-004 Book: Right ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-400-005 ADF:Trailing Edge ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-400-007 ADF:Left ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-400-008 ADF:Right ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4417 [IPU Test Pattern]
4-417-001 Test Pattern ENG [0 to 8 / 0 / 1 / step]
4609
(MP [Gray Balance Set]
501/601
only)
4-609-001 R: Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
46
Main SP Tables-4
4-609-002 R: DF Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4610
501/601
only)
4-610-001 G: Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4-610-002 G: DF Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4-610-003 BW: Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4-610-004 BW: Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4611
501/601
only)
4-611-001 B: Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4-611-002 B: DF Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4646
(MP [Scan Adjust Error]
501/601
only)
4-646-001 White level ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 / step]
4-646-002 Black level ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 / step]
4647
(MP [Scanner Hard Error]
501/601
only)
4-647-001 Power-ON ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 / step]
47
3. SP Mode Tables
4688
(MP [ADF Adjustment Density]
501/601
only)
4-688-001 - ENG* [50 to 150 / 103 / 1 % / step]
4699
(MP [SBU Test Pattern Change]
501/601
only)
4-699-001 - ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
4903
(MP [Filter Setting]
501/601
only)
4-903-001 Ind Dot Erase: Text ENG* [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 / step]
4-903-002 Ind Dot Erase: ENG* [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 / step]

Generation Copy
4905
(MP [Select Gradation Level]
501/601
only)
4-905-001 - ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
4938
(MP [ACS:Edge Mask]
501/601
only)
4-938-005 Scan:Sub LEdge ENG* [0 to 31 / 15 / 1 / step]
4-938-006 Scan:Sub TEdge ENG* [0 to 31 / 15 / 1 / step]
4-938-007 Scan:Main LEdge ENG* [0 to 31 / 15 / 1 / step]
48
Main SP Tables-4
4-938-008 Scan:Main TEdge ENG* [0 to 31 / 15 / 1 / step]
4939
(MP [ACS:Color Range]
501/601
only)
4-939-001 - ENG* [-2 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
4954
(MP [Restore Test Chart]
501/601
only)
4-954-005 Chromaticity Rank ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
4994
(MP [Adj Txt/Photo Recog Level]
501/601
only)
4-994-001 High Compression PDF ENG* [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 / step]
4996
(MP [White Paper Detection Level]
501/601
only)
4-996-001 - ENG [0 to 6 / 3 / 1 / step]
49
3. SP Mode Tables
Main SP Tables-5 (Engine)

SP5-XXX (Mode)
5186 [RK4: Setting]
5-186-001 - ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5801 [Memory Clear]
5-801-002 Engine ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5802 [All Data Initialize]
5-802-001 Result ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5803 [INPUT Check]
5-803-001 Exit Full Sensor ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-803-016 Key Card Set ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-803-017 Key Counter Set ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-803-018 IPU Version ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5804 [OUTPUT Check]
5-804-001 CTLFAN Motor ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-804-101 FAN:LSU/DLP/CENTER/REAR ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-804-102 FAN:LVU ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-804-103 Toner Motor ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-804-202 Scanner Lamp ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5805 [Drum Heater]
5-805-002 - ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
50
5810 [SC Reset]
5-810-001 Fusing SC Reset ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5811 [MachineSerial]
5-811-002 Display ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5811 [MachineSerial Set]
5-811-004 IPU ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5811 [Machine Serial Update Date]
5-811-021 Latest ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-811-022 Previous ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-811-023 Previous ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5811 [Machine Serial Update Date]
5-811-024 Latest(IPU) ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-811-025 Previous(IPU) ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-811-026 Previous(IPU) ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5894 [ExternalCountSet]
5-894-001 SW Charge Mode ENG* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5900 [Engine Log Upload]
5-900-001 Pattern ENG* [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-900-002 Trigger ENG* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 / step]
51
3. SP Mode Tables
5901 [All Data Initialize]
5-901-005 China ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-901-006 EU(230V) ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-901-007 NA(120V) ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-901-008 Asia ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-901-009 Oceania ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5930 [Meter Charge]
5-930-001 Setting ENG* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5931 [Life Alert Disp.]
5-931-001 Mentenance Kit ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
52
Main SP Tables-5 (Controller)

RTB 58
Explanations added for some SPs
in this section
SP5-XXX (Mode)
5001
(SP [All Indicators On]
5300/5310
only)
5-001-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 0 / step]
5009
(MP [Add display language]
501/601
only)
5-009-201 1-8 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-009-202 9-16
5-009-203 17-24
5-009-204 25-32
5-009-205 33-40 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-009-206 41-48
5-009-207 49-56
5024 [mm/inch Display selection]
5-024-001 0:mm 1:inch CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5045
(MP [Accounting Counter]
501/601
only)
5-045-001 Counter Method CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
53
3. SP Mode Tables
5051
(MP [TonerRefillDetectionDisplay]
501/601
only)
5-051-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5055 [Display IP address]
5-055-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5071
(MP [Set Bypass Paper Size Display]
501/601
only)
5-071-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5074
(MP [Home Key Customization]
501/601
only)
5-074-002 Login Setting CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-074-050 Show Home Edit Menu CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-074-091 Function Setting CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-074-092 Product ID CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 / step]
5-074-093 Application Screen ID CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5076
(MP [Copy:LT/LG Mixed Sizes Setting]
501/601
only)
5-076-001 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
54
5081
(MP [ServiceSP Entry Code Setting]
501/601
only)
5-081-001 - CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5083 [LED Light Switch Setting]
5-083-001 Toner Near End CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-083-002 Waste Toner Near End CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5113
(MP [Optional Counter Type]
501/601
only)
5-113-001 Default Optional CTL* [0 to 12 / 0 / 1 / step]

Counter Type
5-113-002 External Optional CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 / step]

Counter Type
5114
(MP [Optional Counter I/F]
501/601
only)
5-114-001 MF Key Card Extension CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5118
(MP [Disable Copying]
501/601
only)
5-118-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5120 [Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal] (MP 501/601 only)
5-120-001 0:Yes 1:StandBy 2:No CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
55
3. SP Mode Tables
5121
(MP [Counter Up Timing]
501/601
only)
5-121-001 0:Feed 1:Exit CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5127
(MP [APS OFF Mode]
501/601
only)
5-127-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5150 [Length Setting]
5-150-001 Bypass(0:OFF 1:Long) CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5162
(MP [App. Switch Method]
501/601
only)
5-162-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5167
(MP [Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off]
501/601
only)
5-167-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5169 [CE Login]
5-169-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
56
5188
(MP [Copy Nv Version]
501/601
only)
5-188-001 - CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5191 [Mode Set]
5-191-001 Power Str Set CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5195 [Limitless SW]
5-195-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
5212
(MP [Page Numbering]
501/601
only)
5-212-003 Duplex Printout Left/ CTL* [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 mm / step]

Right Position of Left/
Right Facing
5-212-004 Duplex Printout Top/ CTL* [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 mm / step]

Bottom Position of Left/
Right Facing
5-212-018 Duplex Printout Left/ CTL* [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 mm / step]

Right Position of Top/
Bottom Facing
5-212-019 Duplex Printout Top/ CTL* [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 mm / step]

Bottom Position of
Top/Bottom Facing
5227
(MP [Page Numbering]
501/601
only)
5-227-201 Allow Page No. Entry CTL* [2 to 9 / 9 / 1 / step]
57
3. SP Mode Tables
5-227-202 Zero Surplus Setting CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5302 [Set Time]
5-302-002 Time Difference CTL* [-1440 to 1440 / 540 / 1 / step]
5305 [Auto Off Set]
5-305-101 Auto Off Limit Set CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5307 [Daylight Saving Time]
5-307-001 Setting CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-307-003 Rule Set(Start) CTL* [0x00 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 / step]
5-307-004 Rule Set(End) CTL* [0x00 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 / step]
5401 [Access Control]
5-401-103 Default Document ACL CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-401-104 Authentication Time CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 sec / step]
5-401-162 Extend Certification CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1 / step]

Detail
5-401-200 SDK1 UniqueID CTL* [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 / 1 / step]
5-401-201 SDK1 Certification CTL* [0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 / step]

Method

Method

Method
5-401-230 SDK Certification CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1 / step]

Device
58
5-401-240 Detail Option CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1 / step]
5-402-101 SDKJ1 Limit Setting CTL* [0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 / step]
5-402-102 SDKJ2 Limit Setting CTL*
59
3. SP Mode Tables
5-402-116 SDKJ16 Limit Setting CTL* [0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 / step]
5-402-141 SDKJ1 ProductID CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 / step]
5-402-142 SDKJ2 ProductID CTL*
60
5-402-149 SDKJ9 ProductID CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 / step]
5404 [User Code Count Clear]
5-404-001 User Code Count CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Clear
61
3. SP Mode Tables
5-404-101 User Code Count CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Clear Permit Setting
5411 [LDAP-Certification]
5-411-004 Simplified CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Authentication
5-411-005 Password Null Not CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Permit
5412 [Krb-Certification]
5-412-100 Encrypt Mode CTL* [0 to 0xFF / 0x1F / 1 / step]
5413 [Lockout Setting]
5-413-001 Lockout On/Off CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-413-002 Lockout Threshold CTL* [1 to 10 / 5 / 1 / step]
5-413-003 Cancel On/Off CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-413-004 Cancel Time CTL* [1 to 9999 / 60 / 1 min / step]
5414 [Access Mitigation]
5-414-001 Mitigation On/Off CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-414-002 Mitigation Time CTL* [0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min / step]
5415 [Password Attack]
5-415-001 Permissible Number CTL* [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 / step]
5-415-002 Detect Time CTL* [1 to 10 / 5 / 1 / step]
5416 [Access Information]
5-416-001 Access User Max Num CTL* [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 / step]
62
5-416-002 Access Password Max CTL* [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 / step]

Num
5-416-003 Monitor Interval CTL* [1 to 10 / 3 / 1 / step]
5417 [Access Attack]
5-417-001 Access Permissible CTL* [0 to 500 / 100 / 1 / step]

Number
5-417-002 Attack DetectTime CTL* [10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec / step]
5-417-003 Productivity Fall Waite CTL* [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec / step]
5-417-004 Attack Max Num CTL* [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 / step]
5420 [User Authentication]
5-420-001 Copy CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-420-011 DocumentServer CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-420-021 Fax CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-420-031 Scanner CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-420-041 Printer CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-420-051 SDK1 CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-420-061 SDK2 CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-420-071 SDK3 CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-420-081 Browser CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
63
3. SP Mode Tables
5430
(MP [Auth Dialog Message Change]
501/601
only)
5-430-001 Message Change CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

On/Off
5-430-002 Message Text CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Download
5-430-003 Message Text ID CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5431
(MP [External Auth User Preset]
501/601
only)
5-431-010 Tag CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-011 Entry CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-012 Group CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-020 Mail CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-030 Fax CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-031 FaxSub CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-032 Folder CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-033 ProtectCode CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-034 SmtpAuth CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-035 LdapAuth CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-036 Smb Ftp Fldr Auth CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-037 AcntAcl CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-038 DocumentAcl CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-040 CertCrypt CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-431-050 UserLimitCount CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
64
5481 [Authentication Error Code]
5-481-001 System Log Disp CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-481-002 Panel Disp CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5490
(MP [MF KeyCard]
501/601
only)
5-490-001 Job Permit Setting CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5491
(MP [Optional Counter]
501/601
only)
5501 [PM Alarm]
5-501-001 PM Alarm Level CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-501-002 Original Count Alarm CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5504 [Jam Alarm]
5-504-001 Level Setting CTL* [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-504-002 Threshold CTL* [1 to 99 / 10 / 1 / step]
5505 [Error Alarm]
5-505-001 Level Setting CTL* [0 to 255 / 19 / 1 / step]
5-505-002 Threshold CTL* [1 to 99 / 5 / 1 / step]
5507 [Supply/CC Alarm]
65
3. SP Mode Tables
5-507-001 Paper Supply Alarm CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-507-003 Toner Supply Alarm CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-507-006 WasteTonerBottle CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Supply Alarm
5-507-080 Toner Call Timing CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-507-081 Toner Call Threshold CTL* [10 to 90 / 10 / 10 % / step]
5-507-128 Interval: Others CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
5-507-133 Interval: A4 CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
5-507-134 Interval: A5 CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
5-507-142 Interval: B5 CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
5-507-164 Interval: LG CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
5-507-166 Interval: LT CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
5-507-172 Interval: HLT CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
5508
(MP [CC Call]
501/601
only)
5-508-001 Jam Remains CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-508-002 Continuous Jams CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-508-003 Continuous Door Open CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-508-011 Jam Detection: Time CTL* [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 / step]

Length
5-508-012 Jam Detection: CTL* [2 to 10 / 5 / 1 / step]

Continuous Count
5-508-013 Door Open: Time CTL* [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 / step]

Length
5515 [SC/Alarm Setting]
66
5-515-001 SC Call CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-515-002 Service Parts Near End CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Call
5-515-003 Service Parts End Call CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-515-004 User Call CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-515-006 Communication Test CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Call
5-515-007 Machine Information CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Notice
5-515-008 Alarm Notice CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-515-009 Non Genuine Tonner CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Ararm
5-515-010 Supply Automatic CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Ordering Call
5-515-011 Supply Management CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Report Call
5-515-012 Jam/Door Open Call CTL* [1 to 255 / 5 / 1 / step]
5-515-050 Timeout:Manual Call CTL* [1 to 255 / 10 / 1 min / step]
5-515-051 Timeout:Other Call CTL* [1 to 255 / 10 / 1 min / step]
5517 [Get Machine Information]
5-517-031 Get SMC Info: Retry CTL* [0 to 255 / 10 / 1 min / step]

Interval
5728 [Network Setting]
5-728-001 NAT Machine Port1 CTL* [1 to 65535 / 49101 / 1 / step]
5-728-002 NAT UI Port1 CTL* [1 to 65535 / 55101 / 1 / step]
67
3. SP Mode Tables
5730
(MP [Extended Function Setting]
501/601
only)
5-730-001 JavaTM Platform CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

setting
5-730-010 Expiration Prior Alarm CTL* [0 to 999 / 20 / 1 days / step]

Set
5731 [Counter Effect]
5-731-001 Change Mk1 Cnt(Paper- CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

>Combine)
68
5734
(MP [PDF Setting]
501/601
only)
5-734-001 PDF/A Fixed CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5741
(MP [Node Authentication Timuout]
501/601
only)
5-741-001 - CTL* [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 sec / step]
5745 [DeemedPowerConsumption]
5-745-211 Controller Standby CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-212 STR CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-213 Main Power Off CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-214 Scanning and Printing CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-215 Printing CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-216 Scanning CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-217 Engine Standby CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-218 Low Power CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]

Consumption
5-745-219 Silent condition CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-220 Heater Off CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5748
(MP [OpePanel Setting]
501/601
only)
5-748-101 Op Type Action Setting CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
69
3. SP Mode Tables
5-748-201 Cheetah Panel CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Connect Setting
5749 [Import/Export]
5-749-001 Export CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-749-101 Import CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5751
(MP [Key Event Encryption Setting]
501/601
only)
5-751-001 Password CTL* [0 to 255/ 0 / 1 / step]
5752
(MP [Copy:WebAPI Setting]
501/601
only)
5-752-001 Copy:FlairAPI Setting CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5755
(MP [Display Setting]
501/601
only)
5-755-001 Disp Administrator CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Password Change Scrn
5-755-002 Hide Administrator CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Password Change Scrn
5758
(MP [RemoteUI Setting]
501/601
only)
5-758-001 Authentication CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
70
RTB 38 5759
Not used
(MP [Machine Limit Count]
501/601
only)
5-759-001 Machine Limit Count CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Setting
5-759-051 Limit Count CTL* [0x00 to 0xff / 0x00 / 1 / step]
5761
(MP [SmartOperationPanel Setting]
501/601
only)
5-761-001 Restore the default CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

Home screen
5801 [Memory Clear]
5-801-001 All Clear CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-003 SCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-004 IMH Memory Clr CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-005 MCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-006 Copier application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-801-007 Fax Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-801-008 Printer Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-009 Scanner Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-801-010 Web Service CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-011 NCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
71
3. SP Mode Tables
5-801-012 R-FAX CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-801-014 Clear DCS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-015 Clear UCS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-016 MIRS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-017 CCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-018 SRM Memory Clr CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-019 LCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-020 Web Uapli CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-801-021 ECS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-023 AICS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-801-025 websys CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-026 PLN CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-027 SAS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-028 Rest WebService CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5812 [Service Tel. No. Setting]
5-812-001 Service CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-812-002 Facsimile CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-812-003 Supply CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-812-004 Operation CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-812-101 Disp Inquiry CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
72
5816 [NRS Function]
5-816-001 I/F Setting CTL* [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 / step]
5-816-002 CE Call CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-003 Function Flag CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-007 SSL Disable CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-008 RCG Connect Timeout CTL* [1 to 90 / 30 / 1 sec / step]
5-816-009 RCG Write Timeout CTL* [0 to 100 / 60 / 1 sec / step]
5-816-010 RCG Read Timeout CTL* [0 to 100 / 60 / 1 sec / step]
5-816-011 Port 80 Enable CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5816 [Remote Service]
5-816-013 RFU Timing CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-816-014 RCG Error Cause CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-021 RCG-C Registed CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-023 Connect Type(N/M) CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-061 Cert Expire Timing CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-062 Use Proxy CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-063 Proxy Host CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-064 Proxy PortNumber CTL* [0 to 0xffff / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-065 Proxy User Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-066 Proxy Password CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-067 CERT:Up State CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-068 CERT:Error CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-069 CERT:Up ID CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-083 Firm Up Status CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-085 Firm Up User Check CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
73
3. SP Mode Tables
5-816-086 Firmware Size CTL* [0x00 to 0xffff / 0x00 / 1 / step]
5-816-087 CERT:Macro Ver. CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-088 CERT:PAC Ver. CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-089 CERT:ID2Code CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-090 CERT:Subject CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-091 CERT:Serial No. CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-092 CERT:Issuer CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-093 CERT:Valid Start CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-094 CERT:Valid End CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-102 CERT:Encrypt Level CTL* [1 to 2 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-816-103 Client Communication CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 / step]

Method
5-816-104 Client Communication CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Limit
5-816-115 Network Information CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Waiting timer
5-816-200 Manual Polling CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-201 Regist Status CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-202 Letter Number CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-203 Confirm Execute CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-204 Confirm Result CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-205 Confirm Place CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-206 Register Execute CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-207 Register Result CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-208 Error Code CTL [-2147483647 to 2147483647 / 0 /

0 / step]
5-816-209 Instl Clear CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
74
5-816-240 CommErrorTime CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-241 CommErrorCode 1 CTL* [0x00 to 0xffff / 0x00 / 1 / step]
5-816-244 CommErrorState 1 CTL* [0 to 0xffff / 0x0000 / 1 / step]
5-816-247 SSL Error Count CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-248 Other Err Count CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-250 CommLog Print CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5821 [Remote Service RCG Setting]
5-821-002 RCG IPv4 Address CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 / step]
5-821-003 RCG Port CTL* [0 to 65535 / 443 / 1 / step]
5-821-004 RCG IPv4 URL Path CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-821-005 RCG IPv6 Address CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-821-006 RCG IPv6 URL Path CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-821-007 RCG Host Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-821-008 RCG Host URL Path CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5824 [NV-RAM Data Upload]
5-824-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5825 [NV-RAM Data Download]
5-825-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5828 [Network Setting]
75
3. SP Mode Tables
5-828-050 1284 Compatiblity CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

(Centro)
5-828-052 ECP (Centro) CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-828-065 Job Spooling CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-828-066 Job Spooling Clear: CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Start Time
5-828-069 Job Spooling CTL* [0x00 to 0xff / 0x7f / 0 / step]

(Protocol)
5-828-087 Protocol usage CTL* [0x00 to 0xffff / 0x00 / 1 / step]
5-828-090 TELNET(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL* [0x00 to 0xffff / 0x00 / 1 / step]
5-828-091 Web(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-828-145 Active IPv6 Link Local CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Address
5-828-147 Active IPv6 Stateless CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Address 1

Address 2

Address 3

Address 4

Address 5
5-828-156 IPv6 Manual Address CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-828-158 IPv6 Gateway CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Address
5-828-161 IPv6 Stateless Auto CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Setting
5-828-219 IPsec Aggressive CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Mode Setting
76
5-828-236 Web Item visible CTL* [0x0000 to 0xffff / 0xffff / 1 / step]
5-828-237 Web shopping link CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

visible
5-828-238 Web Supplies Link CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

visible
5-828-239 Web Link1 Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-828-240 Web Link1 URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-828-241 Web Link1 visible CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-828-242 Web Link2 Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-828-243 Web Link2 URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-828-244 Web Link2 visible CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-828-249 DHCPv6 DUID CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5832 [HDD]
5-832-001 HDD Formatting (ALL) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-832-002 HDD Formatting (IMH) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-832-003 HDD Formatting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(Thumbnail/OCR) (MP 501/601 only)
5-832-004 HDD Formatting (Job CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Log) (MP 501/601 only)

(Printer Fonts) (MP 501/601 only)
5-832-006 HDD Formatting (User CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Info) (MP 501/601 only)
5-832-007 Mail RX Data CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
77
3. SP Mode Tables
5-832-008 Mail TX Data CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-832-009 HDD Formatting (Data CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

for a Design) (MP 501/601 only)
5-832-010 HDD Formatting (Log) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-832-011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

I/F) (MP 501/601 only)

(Thumbnail) (MP 501/601 only)
5836
(MP [Capture Setting]
501/601
only)
5-836-001 Capture Function CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(0:Off 1:On)
5-836-011 Capture Setting: Copy CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-836-012 Capture Setting: Doc. CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Svr.
5-836-013 Capture Setting: Fax CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

RX Printer
5-836-014 Capture Setting: Fax TX CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-836-015 Capture Setting: Printer CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-836-016 Capture Setting: CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Scanner
5-836-017 Capture Setting: SDK CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-836-061 Captured File Resend CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

(0:Off 1:On)
5-836-072 Reduction for Copy CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 / step]

B&W Text
78
5-836-073 Reduction for Copy CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 / step]

B&W Other
5-836-075 Reduction for Printer CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 / step]

B&W
5-836-082 Format for Copy B&W CTL* [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 / step]

Text
5-836-083 Format for Copy B&W CTL* [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 / step]

Other
5-836-085 Format for Printer B&W CTL* [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-836-091 Default for JPEG CTL* [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 / step]
5-836-101 Primary srv IP address CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / 0 / step]
5-836-102 Primary srv scheme CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-836-103 Primary srv port CTL* CTL*

number
5-836-104 Primary srv URL path CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-836-111 Secondary srv IP CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / 0 / step]

address
5-836-112 Secondary srv scheme CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-836-113 Secondary srv port CTL* [1 to 65535 / 80 / 1 / step]

number
5-836-114 Secondary srv URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

path
5-836-120 Default Reso Rate CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Switch
5-836-122 Reso: Copy(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-836-124 Reso: Print(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-836-125 Reso: Fax(Color) CTL* [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 / step]
5-836-126 Reso: Fax(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-836-127 Reso: Scan(Color) CTL* [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 / step]
79
3. SP Mode Tables
5-836-128 Reso: Scan(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-836-129 Reso: SDK(Color) CTL* [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 / step]
5-836-130 Reso: SDK(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-836-141 All Addr Info Switch CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-836-142 Stand-by Doc Max CTL* [10 to 10000 / 2000 / 1 / step]

Number
5-836-143 ClearLightPDF Switch CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5840 [IEEE 802.11]
5-840-006 Channel MAX CTL* [1 to 14 / 14 / 1 / step]
5-840-007 Channel MIN CTL* [1 to 14 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-840-011 WEP Key Select CTL* [0x00 to 0x11 / 0x00 / 1 / step]
5-840-045 WPA Debug Lvl CTL* [1 to 3 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-840-046 11w CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-840-047 PSK Set Type CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5841
(MP [Supply Name Setting]
501/601
only)
5-841-001 Toner Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Setting:Black
5842 [GWWS Analysis]
5-842-001 Setting 1 CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 / step]
5-842-002 Setting 2 CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 / step]
5844 [USB]
5-844-001 Transfer Rate CTL* [1 to 4 / 4 / 0 / step]
80
5-844-002 Vendor ID CTL* [0x0000 to 0xffff / 0x05ca / 0 / step]
5-844-003 Product ID CTL* [0x0000 to 0xffff / 0x0403 / 0 / step]
5-844-004 Device Release CTL* [0 to 9999 / 100 / 1 / step]

Number
5-844-005 Fixed USB Port CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-844-006 PnP Model Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-844-007 PnP Serial Number CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-844-008 Mac Supply Level CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-844-100 Notify Unsupport CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5845 [Delivery Server Setting]
5-845-001 FTP Port No. CTL* [1 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-845-002 IP Address (Primary) CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-845-003 Retry Interval CTL* [60 to 900 / 300 / 1 sec / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-845-004 No. of Retries CTL* [0 to 99 / 3 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-845-006 Delivery Error Display CTL* [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 / 1 sec / step]

Time (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-008 IP Address (Secondary) CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-845-009 Delivery Server Model CTL* [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-845-010 Delivery Svr. Capability CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
81
3. SP Mode Tables
5-845-011 Delivery Svr. Capability CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

(Ext) (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-013 Server Scheme(Primary) CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-845-014 Server Port CTL* [1 to 65535 / 80 / 1 / step]

Number(Primary) (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-015 Server URL Path(Primary) CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-845-016 Server CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]

Scheme(Secondary) (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-017 Server Port CTL* [1 to 65535 / 80 / 1 / step]

Number(Secondary) (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-018 Server URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]

Path(Secondary) (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-022 Rapid Sending Control CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5846 [UCS Setting]
5-846-001 Machine ID (for Delivery CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Server) (MP 501/601 only)
5-846-002 Machine ID Clear (for CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]

Delivery Server) (MP 501/601 only)
5-846-003 Maximum Entries CTL* [2000 to 20000 / 2000 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-846-006 Delivery Server Retry Timer CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-846-007 Delivery Server Retry Times CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-846-008 Delivery Server Maximum CTL* [2000 to 20000 / 2000 / 1 / step]

Entries (MP 501/601 only)
82
5-846-010 LDAP Search Timeout CTL* [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 / step]
5-846-020 WSD Maximum Entries CTL* [50 to 250 / 250 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-846-021 Folder Auth Change CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-846-040 Addr Book Migration(USB- CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

>HDD) (MP 501/601 only)
5-846-041 Fill Addr Acl Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-846-043 Addr Book Media CTL* [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-846-047 Initialize Local Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-846-048 Initialize Delivery Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-846-049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-846-050 Initialize All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-846-051 Backup All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-846-052 Restore All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-846-053 Clear Backup Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-846-060 Search option CTL* [0x00 to 0xff / 0x0f / 1 / step]
5-846-062 Complexity option 1 CTL* [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-846-091 FTP Auth Port Setting CTL* [0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-846-094 Encryption Stat CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
83
3. SP Mode Tables
5847
(MP [Rep Resolution Reduction]
501/601
only)
5-847-002 Rate for Copy B&W CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 / step]

Text
5-847-003 Rate for Copy B&W CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 / step]

Other
5-847-005 Rate for Printer B&W CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-847-007 Rate for Printer B&W CTL* [0 to 6 / 1 / 1 / step]

1200dpi
5-847-021 Network Quality CTL* [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 / step]

Default for JPEG
5848 [Web Service]
5-848-002 Access Ctrl: CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x02 / 0 / step]

Repository(onlyLower4bits) (MP 501/601 only)
5-848-003 Access Ctrl: Doc.Svr.Print (Lower CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
4bits) (MP 501/601 only)
5-848-004 Access Ctrl: udirectory (Lower CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
4bits)
5-848-007 Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax(Lower CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
4bits) (MP 501/601 only)
5-848-009 Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 4bits) CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
5-848-011 Access Ctrl: CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]

Devicemanagement(Lower 4bits)
5-848-021 Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4bits) CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
5-848-022 Access Ctrl: uadministration (Lower CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
4bits)
84
5-848-024 Access Ctrl: Log Service (Lower CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
4bits)
5-848-025 Access Ctrl: Rest WebService CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
(Lower 4bits)
5-848-099 Repository: Download Image CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]

Setting (MP 501/601 only)
5-848-100 Repository: Download Image Max. CTL* [1 to 2048 / 2048 / 0 / step]

Size (MP 501/601 only)
5-848-150 Log Operation Mode CTL* [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 / step]
5848 [LogTrans]
5-848-217 Setting: Timing CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5849 [Installation Date]
5-849-001 Display CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-849-002 Switch to Print CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-849-003 Total Counter CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5851 [Bluetooth]
5-851-001 Mode CTL* [0x00 to 0x01/ 0x00 / 1 / step]
5853
(MP [Stamp Data Download]
501/601
only)
5-853-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5856 [Remote ROM Update]
5-856-002 Local Port CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5858 [Save Machine Info]
85
3. SP Mode Tables
5-858-001 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-858-002 Target(0:HDD 1:SD) CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-003 Make LogTrace Dir CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-101 Start Date CTL* [0 to 20371212 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-102 Days of Tracing CTL* [1 to 180 / 2 / 1 day / step]
5-858-103 Acquire Fax Address(0:OFF CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

1:ON)
5-858-111 Acquire All Info & Logs CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-121 Acquire Configuration Page CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-122 Acquire Font Page CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-123 Acquire Print Setting List CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-124 Acquire Error Log CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-131 Acquire Fax Info CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-141 Acquire All Debug Logs CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-142 Acquire Only Controller Debug CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Logs
5-858-143 Acquire Only Engine Debug Logs CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-144 Acquire Only Opepanel Debug CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Logs
5-858-145 Acquire Only FCU Debug Logs CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4]
5-860-002 SMTP Srvr Port No CTL* [1 to 65535 / 25 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-003 SMTP Authentication CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-006 SMTP Auth. Encryption CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
86
5-860-007 POP before SMTP CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-008 POPtoSMTP Waiting CTL* [0 to 10000 / 300 / 1ms / step]

Time (SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-009 Mail Receive Protocol CTL* [1 to 3 / 1 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-013 POP3/IMAP4 Auth. CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]

Encryption (SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-014 POP3 Srvr Port No CTL* [1 to 65535 / 110 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-015 IMAP4 Srvr Port No CTL* [1 to 65535 / 143 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-016 SMTP Rx Port No CTL* [1 to 65535 / 25 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-017 Mail Rx Interval CTL* [2 to 1440 / 3 / 1min / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-019 Mail Keep Setting CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-020 Partial Mail Receive CTL* [1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour / step]

Timeout
5-860-021 MDN Response CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

RFC2298 Compliance
5-860-022 SMTP Auth. From Field CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Replacement
5-860-025 SMTP Auth. Direct CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0x0 / 8 / step]

Setting
5-860-026 S/MIME:MIME CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]

Header Setting
5-860-028 S/MIME: CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Authentication Check (MP 501/601 only)
87
3. SP Mode Tables
5866 [E-Mail Report]
5-866-001 Report Validity CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-866-005 Add Date Field CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-866-110 CounterE-Mail:Validity CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-866-111 CounterE-Mail:Destination CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Registration (MP 501/601 only)
5-866-112 CounterE-Mail:Send Test CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-866-113 CounterE-Mail:Next Send Date CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-866-114 CounterE-Mail:Send Date Setting CTL* [0 to 31 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-866-115 CounterE-Mail:Send Time Setting CTL* [0 to 2359 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-866-121 CounterE-Mail:Destination1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)

(MP 501/601 only)

(MP 501/601 only)
5869
(SP [RAM Disk Setting]
5300/5310
only)
5-869-001 Mail Function CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
88
5870 [Common KeyInfo Writing]
5-870-001 Writing CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-870-003 Initialize CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-870-004 Writing: 2048bit CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5873 [SDCardAppliMove]
5-873-001 MoveExec CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-873-002 UndoExec CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]
5875 [SC Auto Reboot]
5-875-001 Reboot Setting CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-875-002 Reboot Type CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5878 [Option Setup]
5-878-001 Data Overwrite CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Security
5-878-002 HDD Encryption CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-878-004 OCR Dictionary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5881
(MP [Fixed Phrase Block Erasing]
501/601
only)
5-881-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5885
(MP [Set WIM Function]
501/601
only)
5-885-020 DocSvr Acc Ctrl CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
89
3. SP Mode Tables
5-885-050 DocSvr Format CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-885-051 DocSvr Trans CTL* [5 to 20 / 10 / 1 / step]
5-885-100 Set Signature CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-885-101 Set Encrypsion CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-885-200 Detect Mem Leak CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
5886
(MP [Farm Update Setting]
501/601
only)
5-886-100 Skip Version Check CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-886-101 Skip LR Check CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-886-111 Auto Update Setting CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-886-112 Auto Update Prohibit CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Term Setting
5-886-113 Auto Update Prohibit CTL* [0 to 23 / 9 / 1 hour / step]

Start hour
5-886-114 Auto Update Prohibit CTL* [0 to 23 / 17 / 1 hour / step]

End hour
5-886-115 SFU Auto Download CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 0 / step]

Setting
5-886-116 Auto Update Next CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Date
5-886-117 Auto Update Retry CTL* [1 to 24 / 1 / 1 hour / step]

Interval Hour
5-886-119 Auto Update @Remote CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 0 / step]

Using Setting
5-886-120 Auto Update Prohibit CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

Day of Week Setting
5-886-150 Cheetah Firm Exclusion CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
90
5-886-201 Restore Date CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-886-202 Save Old Version List CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5887 [SD Get Counter]
5-887-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5888 [Personal Information Protect]
5-888-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5893 [SDK Application Counter]
5-893-001 SDK-1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-002 SDK-2 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-003 SDK-3 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-004 SDK-4 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-005 SDK-5 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-006 SDK-6 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-007 SDK-7 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-008 SDK-8 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-009 SDK-9 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-010 SDK-10 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-011 SDK-11 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-012 SDK-12 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name]
5-907-001 - CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
91
3. SP Mode Tables
5913
(MP [Switchover Permission Time]
501/601
only)
5-913-002 Print Application Timer CTL* [0 to 30 / 3 / 1 / step]
5967
(MP [Copy Server : Set Function]
501/601
only)
5-967-001 (0:ON 1:OFF) CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5973
(MP [User Stamp Registration]
501/601
only)
5-973-101 Frame deletion setting CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 / step]
5985
(MP [Device Setting]
501/601
only)
5-985-001 On Board NIC CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-985-002 On Board USB CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5990 [SP Print Mode]
5-990-001 All (Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-002 SP (Mode Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-003 User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-990-004 Logging Data CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-005 Diagnostic Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
92
5-990-006 Non-Default CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-007 NIB Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-008 Capture Log CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-990-022 Scanner SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-990-023 Scanner User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-990-024 SDK/J Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-025 SDK/J Application Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-026 Printer SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-027 SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-990-028 SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5990
(MP [SMC Print]
501/601
only)
5-990-021 Copier User Program CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5992 [SP Text Mode]
5-992-001 All (Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-002 SP (Mode Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-003 User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-992-004 Logging Data CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-005 Diagnostic Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
93
3. SP Mode Tables
5-992-006 Non-Default CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-007 NIB Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-008 Capture Log CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-992-021 Copier User Program CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-992-022 Scanner SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-992-023 Scanner User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-992-024 SDK/J Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-025 SDK/J Application Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-026 Printer SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-027 SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-992-028 SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
94
Main SP Tables-6 (MP 501/601 Only)
Main SP Tables-6 (MP 501/601 Only)

SP6-XXX (Peripherals)
6006 [ADF Adjustment]
6-006-001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front ENG* [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
6-006-002 Side-to-Side Regist: Rear ENG* [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
6026 [ADF Timing Adjustment]
6-026-001 Leading Edge Start Timing: ENG [-32 to 32 / 0 / 1 pulse / step]

Front
6-026-002 Leading Edge Start Timing: ENG [-32 to 32 / 0 / 1 pulse / step]

Rear
6-026-003 Leading Edge End Timing: ENG [-32 to 32 / 0 / 1 pulse / step]

Front
6-026-004 Leading Edge End Timing: ENG [-32 to 32 / 0 / 1 pulse / step]

Rear
6027 [ADF Adjustment Scan Speed]
6-027-001 Simplex Mode ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 % / step]
6-027-002 Duplex Mode: Front ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 % / step]
6-027-003 Duplex Mode: Rear ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 % / step]
95
3. SP Mode Tables

SP7-XXX (Data Log)
7621 [PM Counter Disp:Pages]
7-621-002 PM Parts ENG* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page / step]
7801 [ROM Info Display]
7-801-002 P/#: Engine ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-009 P/#: PFU1 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-015 P/#: IPU ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-019 P/#: PFU2 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-040 P/#: PFU3 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-041 P/#: PFU4 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-102 Version: Engine ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-109 Version:PFU1 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-115 Version: IPU ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7804 [Reset-PM Count]
7-804-002 Engine ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
7852 [DF Glass Dust Check]
7-852-001 Dust Detection: Counter ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 / step]
7-852-002 Dust Detection: Clear ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 / step]

Counter
96
7935 [Toner Bottle Log]
7-935-001 SerialNo. ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
7979 [ENG Reset Log]
7-979-001 Data1 ENG* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 1 / step]
7-979-002 Data2 ENG* [0x0000 to 0xFFFF / 0x0000 / 1 /

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]
97
3. SP Mode Tables

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]
98

SP7-XXX (Data Log)
7401 [Total SC]
7-401-001 SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-401-002 Total SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7403 [SC History]
7-403-001 Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-403-002 Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7404 [Software Error History]
99
3. SP Mode Tables
7502 [Total Paper Jam]
7-502-001 Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-502-002 Total Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7503
(MP [Total Original Jam Counter]
501/601
only)
7-503-001 - CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7503
(MP [Total Original Jam]
501/601
only)
7-503-002 Total Original Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7504 [Paper Jam Location]
7-504-001 At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-504-010 Process Not Ready CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-504-011 Transport Not Ready CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-504-012 Driving Detection CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
No Duplex Feed
7-504-013 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Notification from CTL
7-504-014 Fusing Not Ready CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-504-015 Printing Error Jam 1 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
100
Exceed Duplex
7-504-027 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Interleaf Limit
7-504-028 Tray 1: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-504-029 Duplex: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-504-030 Bypass Tray: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-504-031 Tray 1 Double-Feed CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-504-036 Duplex Double-Feed CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Bypass Tray Double-

7-504-037 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed
Feed2 Sensor: ON
7-504-038 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
101
3. SP Mode Tables
Feed2 Sensor: ON
7-504-039 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: ON
7-504-040 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: OFF

7-504-041 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: OFF

7-504-042 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: OFF

7-504-043 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: ON
7-504-044 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: ON
7-504-045 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: OFF

7-504-046 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: OFF

7-504-047 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed4 Sensor: ON
7-504-048 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed4 Sensor: OFF

7-504-049 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Registration Sensor:
7-504-050 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass2 Feed)
7-504-051 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass3 Feed)
7-504-052 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass4 Feed)
7-504-053 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass5 Feed)
7-504-054 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass2 Feed)
102
7-504-055 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass3 Feed)
7-504-056 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass4 Feed)
7-504-057 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass5 Feed)
Registration Exit
7-504-058 Sensor: ON (Cass1 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-504-063 Sensor: ON (Duplex CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-504-064 Sensor: ON (MFP CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-504-065 Sensor: OFF (Cass1 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
103
3. SP Mode Tables
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-504-070 Sensor: OFF (Duplex CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-504-071 Sensor: OFF (MFP CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-504-072 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass1 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-504-073 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass2 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-504-074 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-504-075 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-504-076 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-504-077 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Duplex Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON (MFP

7-504-078 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-504-079 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass1 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-504-080 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass2 Feed)
104
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-504-081 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-504-082 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-504-083 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-504-084 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Duplex Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF (MFP

7-504-085 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Duplex Trans. Sensor1:

7-504-086 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass1 Feed)

7-504-087 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass2 Feed)

7-504-088 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass3 Feed)

7-504-089 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass4 Feed)

7-504-090 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass5 Feed)

7-504-091 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (MFP Feed)

7-504-092 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass1 Feed)

7-504-093 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass2 Feed)

7-504-094 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass3 Feed)

7-504-095 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass4 Feed)

7-504-096 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass5 Feed)
105
3. SP Mode Tables

7-504-097 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (MFP Feed)

7-504-098 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Duplex Feed)
7505
(MP [Original Jam Detection]
501/601
only)
7-505-002 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON
7-505-003 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF
7506 [Jam Count by Paper Size]
7-506-006 A5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-044 HLT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-133 A4 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-134 A5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-142 B5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-164 LG SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-166 LT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-172 HLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-255 Others CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
106
7507 [Plotter Jam History]
7508
(MP [Original Jam History]
501/601
only)
7514 [Paper Jam Count by Location]
107
3. SP Mode Tables
7-514-010 Process Not Ready CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-514-011 Transport Not Ready CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-514-012 Driving Detection CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
No Duplex Feed
7-514-013 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Notification from CTL
7-514-014 Fusing Not Ready CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Exceed Duplex
7-514-027 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Interleaf Limit
7-514-029 Duplex: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-514-030 Bypass Tray: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
108
7-514-036 Duplex Double-Feed CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Bypass Tray Double-

7-514-037 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed
Feed2 Sensor: ON
7-514-038 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: ON
7-514-039 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: ON
7-514-040 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: OFF

7-514-041 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: OFF

7-514-042 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: OFF

7-514-043 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: ON
7-514-044 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: ON
7-514-045 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: OFF

7-514-046 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: OFF

7-514-047 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed4 Sensor: ON
7-514-048 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed4 Sensor: OFF

7-514-049 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
109
3. SP Mode Tables
7-514-050 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass2 Feed)
7-514-051 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass3 Feed)
7-514-052 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass4 Feed)
7-514-053 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass5 Feed)
7-514-054 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass2 Feed)
7-514-055 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass3 Feed)
7-514-056 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass4 Feed)
7-514-057 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass5 Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-514-063 Sensor: ON (Duplex CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
110
Registration Exit
7-514-064 Sensor: ON (MFP CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-514-065 Sensor: OFF (Cass1 CTL [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-514-067 Sensor: OFF (Cass3 CTL [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-514-070 Sensor: OFF (Duplex CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-514-071 Sensor: OFF (MFP CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-514-072 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass1 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-514-073 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass2 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-514-074 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-514-075 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-514-076 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
111
3. SP Mode Tables
Exit Sensor: ON
7-514-077 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Duplex Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON (MFP

7-514-078 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-514-079 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass1 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-514-080 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass2 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-514-081 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-514-082 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-514-083 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-514-084 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Duplex Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF (MFP

7-514-085 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)

7-514-086 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass1 Feed)

7-514-087 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass2 Feed)

7-514-088 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass3 Feed)

7-514-089 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass4 Feed)

7-514-090 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass5 Feed)

7-504-091 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (MFP Feed)

7-514-092 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass1 Feed)
112

7-514-093 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass2 Feed)

7-514-094 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass3 Feed)

7-514-095 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass4 Feed)

7-514-096 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass5 Feed)

7-514-097 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (MFP Feed)

7-514-098 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Duplex Feed)
7515
(MP [Original Jam Count by Detection]
501/601
only)
7-515-002 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON
7-515-003 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF
7516 [Paper Size Jam Count]
7-516-006 A5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-044 HLT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-133 A4 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
113
3. SP Mode Tables
7-516-134 A5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-142 B5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-164 LG SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-166 LT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-172 HLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-255 Others CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7520 [Update Log]
7-520-001 ErrorRecord1 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-520-011 Auto:StartDate1 CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
114
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-520-021 Auto:EndDate1 CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-520-031 Auto:Piecemark1 CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-520-041 Auto:Version1 CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
115
3. SP Mode Tables
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
7-520-051 Auto:Result1 CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
7801 [ROM No./ Firmware Version]
7-801-255 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7803 [PM Counter Display]
116
7-803-001 Paper CTL* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 0 / step]
7804 [PM Counter Reset]
7-804-001 Paper CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7807 [SC/Jam Counter Reset]
7-807-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7826
(MP [MF Error Counter]
501/601
only)
7-826-001 Error Total CTL* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-826-002 Error Staple CTL* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 0 / step]
7827
(MP [MF Error Couter Clear]
501/601
only)
7-827-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7832 [Self-Diagnose Result Display]
7-832-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7836 [Total Memory Size]
7-836-001 - CTL [0 to 0xffffffff/ 0 / 0 MB / step]
7840
(MP [Service SP Entry Code Chg Hist]
501/601
only)
7-840-001 Change Time :Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
117
3. SP Mode Tables
7-840-002 Change Time :Last1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-840-101 Initialize Time :Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-840-102 Initialize Time :Last1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7901 [Assert Info.]
7-901-001 File Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-901-002 Number of Lines CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-901-003 Location CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7910 [ROM No]
7-910-001 System/Copy CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-002 Engine CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-003 Lcdc CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-009 Bank CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-012 FCU CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-910-015 Engine(IPU) CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-018 NetworkSupport CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-019 Bank2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-022 BIOS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-023 HDD Format Option CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-040 Bank3 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-041 Bank4 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-150 RPCS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-151 PS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-158 PCL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-159 PCLXL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
118
7-910-162 PDF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-165 PJL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-166 IPDS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-167 MediaPrint:JPEG CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-910-168 MediaPrint:TIFF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-169 XPS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-180 FONT CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-181 FONT1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-182 FONT2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-183 FONT3 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-184 FONT4 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-185 FONT5 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-200 Factory CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-201 Copy CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-910-202 NetworkDocBox CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-203 Fax CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-910-204 Printer CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-205 Scanner CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-206 RFax CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-910-210 MIB CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-211 Websupport CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
119
3. SP Mode Tables
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-212 WebUapl CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-910-213 SDK1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-214 SDK2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-215 SDK3 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-250 Package
(MP 501/601 only)
7911 [Firmware Version]
7-911-001 System/Copy CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-002 Engine CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-003 Lcdc CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-009 Bank CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-012 FCU CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-911-015 Engine(IPU) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-018 NetworkSupport CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-019 Bank2 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-022 BIOS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-023 HDD Format Option CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-040 Bank3 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-041 Bank4 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-150 RPCS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-151 PS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-158 PCL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-159 PCLXL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-162 PDF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
120
7-911-165 PJL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-166 IPDS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-167 MediaPrint:JPEG CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-911-168 MediaPrint:TIFF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-169 XPS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-180 FONT CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-181 FONT1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-182 FONT2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-183 FONT3 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-184 FONT4 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-185 FONT5 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-200 Factory CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-201 Copy CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-911-202 NetworkDocBox CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-203 Fax CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-911-204 Printer CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-205 Scanner CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-206 RFax CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-911-210 MIB CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-211 Websupport CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-212 WebUapl CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
121
3. SP Mode Tables
7-911-213 SDK1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-214 SDK2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-215 SDK3 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-250 Package
(MP 501/601 only)
122
Main SP Tables-8
Main SP Tables-8
SP8-XXX (Data Log2)
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color
faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others,
can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server.
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server.
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

• How is the document server actually being used?
• What application is using the document server most frequently?
• What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of
operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that
you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F,
P, etc.).
C: Copy application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each application
when the job was not stored on the document server.
F: Fax application.
P: Print application.
S: Scan application.
123
3. SP Mode Tables
Prefixes What it means
L: Local storage (document Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L:
server) counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they
count jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can
be in document server mode (from the document server
window), or from another mode, such as from a printer
driver or by pressing the Store File button in the Copy
mode window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the document server.
Each counter will be discussed case by case.
O: Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this group in the
example) future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on the
small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and
refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations

Abbreviation What it means
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
124
Main SP Tables-8
DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to
store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
GPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count
up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number
that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up
11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border
removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor machines
remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
125
3. SP Mode Tables
Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print
jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and
allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different
formats.
PC Personal Computer
PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages
count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT
counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This
machine is under development and currently not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are
recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
126
Main SP Tables-8
• All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.
T:Total Jobs These SPs count the number of times each

*CTL
8001 application is used to do a job.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8002 C:Total Jobs *CTL
Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the
8003 F:Total Jobs *CTL other applications are used to send a job to the
document server, plus the number of times a file
8004 P:Total Jobs *CTL
already on the document server is used.
8005 S:Total Jobs *CTL
8006 L:Total Jobs *CTL
• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages processed.
• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer using
the SP modes are not counted.
• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is counted
at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
• A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
• When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does not (the
document server is not used).
• A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast are not
counted separately).
• A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If one
transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission has
been completed.
• A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
• The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
• When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a print
job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
• When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters both
increment.
• When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server, only
the L: counter increments.
127
3. SP Mode Tables
• When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server, only
the L: counter increments.
• When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
• When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter increments.
8011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the
document server by each application, to reveal
8012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL how local storage is being used for input.
8013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from
8014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL
within the document server mode screen at the
8015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL operation panel.
8016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL
8017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL
• When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you enter
document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
• When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
• When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.
• When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
• When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL These SPs reveal how files printed from the
document server were stored on the document
8022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL server originally.
8023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from
8024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL
8025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL operation panel.
8026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL
8027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C: counter
increments.
128
Main SP Tables-8
• When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document
server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both
increment.
• When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter
increments.
• When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the S:
counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then the L:
counter increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are
printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web Image
Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
• When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
8031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL These SPs reveal what applications were used to
output documents from the document server.
8032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed
from within the document server mode screen at the
8034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
operation panel.
8035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
• When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the application
that started the print job is incremented.
• When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image Monitor,
etc.) the L: counter increments.
129
3. SP Mode Tables
8041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that stored files on
the document server that were later accessed for
8042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL transmission over the telephone line or over a
8043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image
by I-Fax).
8044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
separately.
8046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs scanned
8047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL from within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
• When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as an e-
mail, the O: counter increments.
8051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL These SPs count the applications used to send files
from the document server over the telephone line or
8052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax
8053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL image by I-Fax). Jobs merged for sending are
counted separately.
8054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent from
8055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
8056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL operation panel.
8057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
• If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O:
counter increments.
8061 T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the application.
8062 C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
130
Main SP Tables-8
8063 F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
8064 P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
8065 S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
8066 L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified from the print window
within document server mode.
8067 O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application, over the
network. The finishing method is specified by the application.
Last three digits for SP8 061 to 067

806x-001 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy
job is set for Sort and then stored on the document server,
the L: counter increments. (See SP8 066 1)
806x-002 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
806x-003 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
806x-004 Booklet Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in

staple mode, the Staple counter also increments.
806x-005 Z-Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet
mode and set for folding (Z-fold).
806x-006 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set
for a print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)
131
3. SP Mode Tables
806x-007 Other Reserved. Not used.
806x-008 Inside-Fold Not used
806x-009 Three-IN-Fold Not used
806x-010 Three-OUT-Fold Not used
806x-011 Four-Fold Not used
806x-012 KANNON-Fold Not used
806x-013 Perfect-Bind Not used
806x-014 Ring-Bind Not used
806x-015 3rd Vendor
8071 T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job,
regardless of which application was used.
8072 C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number of
pages in the job.
8073 F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the number of
pages in the job.
8074 P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number of
pages in the job.
8075 S:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the number of
pages in the job.
8076 L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the document server
mode window at the operation panel, by the number of pages in the job.
132
Main SP Tables-8
8077 O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web Image
Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.

807x-001 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages
807x-002 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages
807x-003 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages
807x-004 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pages
807x-005 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages
807x-006 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
807x-007 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 More than 1001 Pages
• For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server mode,
the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
• Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the time the
error occurs.
• For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the
number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
• The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of pages of
the copy job (SP 8072).
• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is counted.
8111 T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax, either
directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
133
3. SP Mode Tables
8113 F: FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax directly on
a telephone line.
811x-001 B/W
811x-002 Color
• These counters count jobs, not pages.

• This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including documents
stored on the document server.
• If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job started.
• If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where both
are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x) also increments.
• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
8121 T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent, either directly or
using a file stored on the document server, as fax images using I-Fax.
8123 F: IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not stored on the
document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
812x-001 B/W
812x-002 Color

• The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this time.
• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
8131 T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and attached
to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not.
134
Main SP Tables-8
8135 S:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and attached to e-
mail, without storing the original on the document server.
813x-001 B/W
813x-002 Color
813x-003 ACS

• If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color or
black-and-white then counted.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be
sent, the job is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of
the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
• If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC, or if
one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For example, if the
same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for
Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC).
8141 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent to a
Scan Router server.
8145 S: Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in scanner mode
and sent to a Scan Router server.
814x-001 B/W
814x-002 Color
814x-003 ACS

• The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router server
cannot be confirmed.
• If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a "Color"
job.
135
3. SP Mode Tables
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be
delivered, the job is not counted.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
8151 T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent to a
folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.
8155 S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent with
Scan-to-PC.
815x-001 B/W
815x-002 Color
815x-003 ACS

• If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
8161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of PC Fax transmission
jobs. A job is counted from when it is registered for
8163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL sending, not when it is sent.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
Note: At the present time, these counters perform
identical counts.
• This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out to the
destination from the PC through the copier.
136
Main SP Tables-8
8171 T:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by WS.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8175 S:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL
001 B/W
002 Color
003 ACS
8181 T:Scan to Media Jobs *CTL These SPs count the scanned pages in a
media by the scanner application.
8185 S:Scan to Media Jobs *CTL
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
001 B/W
002 Color
003 ACS
8191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by
each application that uses the scanner to
8192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL scan images.
8193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL
8196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL
• SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical pages.
• These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color.
• Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
• A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
• Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File
button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
137
3. SP Mode Tables
8201 T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]

A3/DLT, Larger
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy
jobs. Large size paper scanned for fax transmission is not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.
8203 F: LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]

A3/DLT, Larger
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for fax
transmission.
8205 S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]

A3/DLT, Larger
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs only.
Large size paper scanned for fax transmission is not counted.
8211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned into
the document server
8212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
8215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
operation panel, and with the Store File button from
8216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL within the Copy mode screen.
• Reading user stamp data is not counted.

• If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
• If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4.
• If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6 and the
L: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
138
Main SP Tables-8
8221 ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back side
scanning.
001 Front
Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is the same as
the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is the same
as the number of pages fed for duplex front side scanning. (The front side is determined by
which side the user loads face up.)
002 Back
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is the same as the
number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is the same as the
number of pages fed for duplex rear-side scanning.
• When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting. Also,
the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
8231 Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the work
load on the ADF.
001 Large Volume Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in
the ADF at one time.
002 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the ADF.
003 Mixed Size Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the operation

panel.
004 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
005 Platen Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original
directly on the platen.
006 Mixed 1side/2side Simplex and Duplex mode.
139
3. SP Mode Tables
• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen
mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
• The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the original's
page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
• If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is enabled.
• In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with SADF,
the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
8241 T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs,
8242 C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.
8243 F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
8245 S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs.
8246 L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen

8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246
824x-001: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x-002: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x-003: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x-004: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes
824x-005: Map Yes Yes No No Yes
824x-006: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No
824x-007: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No
140
Main SP Tables-8
824x-008: Binary Yes No No Yes No
824x-009: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No
824x-010: Color Yes No No Yes No
824x-011: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen
mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
8251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit
features have been selected at the operation panel
8252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL for each application. Some examples of these
8255 S : Scan PGS/ImgEdr *CTL editing features are:
• Erase Border
8256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL
• Erase Center
8257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL • Image Repeat
• Centering
• Positive/Negative
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
Note: The count totals the number of times the edit
features have been used. A detailed breakdown of
exactly which features have been used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8261 T:Scn PGS/ ColCr *CTL -
8262 C:Scn PGS/ ColCr *CTL -
8265 S:Scn PGS/Color *CTL -
8266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL -
141
3. SP Mode Tables
Last three digits for SP8 261, 262, 265 and 266
826x-001 Color Conversion These SPs show how many times color creation
features have been selected at the operation panel.
826x-002 Color Erase
826x-003 Background
826x-004 Other
8281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned using
a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how the
8285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
Note: At the present time, these counters perform
identical counts.
8291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages stamped with
the stamp in the ADF unit.
8293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
operation panel, and with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen
8301 T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications. Use these
totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP
8-441].
8302 C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP
8-442].
8303 F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-443].
142
Main SP Tables-8
8305 S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-445].
8306 L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning)
and output page size [SP 8-446].

830x-001 A3 830x-007 LG
830x-002 A4 830x-008 LT
830x-003 A5 830x-009 HLT
830x-004 B4 830x-010 Full Bleed
830x-005 B5 830x-254 Other (Standard)
830x-006 DLT 830x-255 Other (Custom)
8311 T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications
that can specify resolution settings.
8315 S: Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications
that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, SP8-311 and SP8-315 perform identical counts.
Last three digits for SP8 311 and 315

831x-001 1200 dpi
831x-002 600 dpi to 1199 dpi
831x-003 400 dpi to 599 dpi
831x-004 200 dpi to 399 dpi
143
3. SP Mode Tables
831x-005 199 dpi or less
• Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

• The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for the
Fax application.
8321 T:Sacn Poster *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8322 C:Sacn Poster *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8326 L:Sacn Poster *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
832x-001 2 Sheet
832x-002 4 Sheet
832x-003 9 Sheet
8381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
printed by the customer. The counter for the
8382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL application used for storing the pages
8383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL increments.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of pages
8385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL stored from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel. Pages
8386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL stored with the Store File button from within
the Copy mode screen go to the C:
8387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL
counter.
• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored is counted for the
application that stored them.
• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following
pages are not counted as printed pages:
- Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
- Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
- Reports printed to confirm counts.
- All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
144
Main SP Tables-8
- Test prints for machine image adjustment.

- Error notification reports.
- Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
8391 LSize PrtPGS
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A4/LT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also
displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
001 A3/DLT, Larger *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
003 BannaerPaper *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages

printed from the document server. The
8402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL counter for the application used to print the
8403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL pages is incremented.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL stored from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel.
8405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count.
• Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count.
8411 Prints/Duplex *CTL This SP counts the amount of paper (front/

back counted as 1 page) used for duplex
printing. Last pages printed only on one
side are not counted.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8421 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
8422 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
processed for printing by the copier application.
145
3. SP Mode Tables
8423 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
processed for printing by the fax application.
8424 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
processed for printing by the printer application.
8425 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
processed for printing by the scanner application.
8426 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
processed for printing from within the document server mode window at the operation
panel.
8427 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
processed for printing by Other applications

842x-001 Simplex> Duplex -
842x-002 Duplex> Duplex -
842x-003 Book> Duplex -
842x-004 Simplex Combine -
842x-005 Duplex Combine -
842x-006 2in1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
146
Main SP Tables-8
842x-012 Booklet -
842x-013 Magazine -
842x-014 2in1 + Booklet -
842x-019 2in1 + Magazine -
• These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve their
compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
147
3. SP Mode Tables
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
8 4 8 4
8431 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below,
8432 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the
copy application.
8434 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the
print application.
8436 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server mode
window at the operation panel with the three features below.
8437 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with Other
applications.

843x-001 Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The count for a
cover printed on both sides counts 2.
843x-002 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) or printed as
a book with booklet right/left pagination.
843x-003 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were applied,
including page numbering and date stamping.
8441 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications.
148
Main SP Tables-8
8442 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy application.
8443 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax application.
8444 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer
application.
8445 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner
application.
8446 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel.
8447 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications.

844x-001 A3
844x-002 A4
844x-003 A5
844x-004 B4
844x-005 B5
844x-006 DLT
844x-007 LG
844x-008 LT
844x-009 HLT
844x-010 Full Bleed
844x-254 Other (Standard)
149
3. SP Mode Tables
844x-255 Other (Custom)
• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
8451 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
001 Bypass Tray Bypass Tray
002 Tray 1 Machine
003 Tray 2 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
006 Tray 5 Not used
007 Tray 6 Not used
008 Tray 7 Not used
009 Tray 8 Not used
010 Tray 9 Not used
011 Tray10 Not used
012 Tray11 Not used
013 Tray12 Not used
014 Tray13 Not used
015 Tray14 Not used
016 Tray15 Not used
150
Main SP Tables-8
8461 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
• These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is based on feed
timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers. However, these
counts are based on output timing.
• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
• During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page printed
on one side counts as 1.
8462 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application.
8463 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application.
8464 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application.
8466 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document server
mode window at the operation panel.

846x-001 Normal
846x-002 Recycled
846x-003 Special
846x-004 Thick
846x-005 Normal (Back)
846x-006 Thick (Back)
846x-007 OHP
846x-008 Other
151
3. SP Mode Tables
8471 PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
001 49% or less
002 50% to 99%
003 100%
004 101% to 200%
005 201% or more
• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification
adjustment as well.
• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also
counted.
• Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document
server are not counted.
• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are
counted.
• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a rate of
100%.
8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched
on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print application.
8491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
printed in the Color Mode by each
8492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL application.
8493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8497 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
152
Main SP Tables-8
Last three digits for SP8 491 to 493, 496 and 497
849x-001 B/W
849x-002 Single Color
849x-003 Two Color
849x-004 Full Color
849x-051 B/W(Banner)
849x-052 Single Color(Banner)
849x-053 Two Color(Banner)
849x-054 Full Color(Banner)
8501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
printed in the Color Mode by the print
8504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL application.
8507 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
Last three digits for SP8 501, 504 and 507

850x-001 B/W
850x-002 Mono Color
850x-003 Full Color
850x-004 Single Color
850x-005 Two Color
850x-051 B/W(Banner)
850x-052 Full Color(Banner)
850x-053 Single Color(Banner)
850x-054 Two Color(Banner)
8511 T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
153
3. SP Mode Tables
8514 P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
Last three digits for SP8 511 and 514

851x-001 RPCS -
851x-002 RPDL -
851x-003 PS3 -
851x-004 R98 -
851x-005 R16 -
851x-006 GL/GL2 -
851x-007 R55 -
851x-008 RTIFF -
851x-009 PDF -
851x-010 PCL5e/5c -
851x-011 PCL XL -
851x-012 IPDL-C -
851x-013 BM-Links Japan Only
851x-014 Other -
851x-015 IPDS -
851x-016 XPS -
• SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
8521 T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
154
Main SP Tables-8
8522 C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy
application.
8523 F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax
application.
Note: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
8524 P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print
application.
8525 S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner
application.
8526 L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.

852x-001 Sort 852x-009 Three-IN-Fold
852x-002 Stack 852x-010 Three-OUT-Fold
852x-003 Staple 852x-011 Four-Fold
852x-004 Booklet 852x-012 KANNON-Fold
852x-005 Z-Fold 852x-013 Perfect-Bind
852x-006 Punch 852x-014 Ring-Bind
852x-007 Other 852x-015 3rd Vendor
852x-008 Inside-Fold
• If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages are
still counted.
155
3. SP Mode Tables
• The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are
counted.
8531 Staple
This SP counts the amount of staples used (-001) or count stapled (-002) by the
machine.
001 Staples *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 Stapless *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8551 T:PrtBooks/FIN *CTL -
8552 C:PrtBooks/FIN *CTL -
8554 P:PrtBooks/FIN *CTL -
8556 L:PrtBooks/FIN *CTL -
855x-001 Perfect-Bind Not used
855x-002 Ring-Bind Not used
8561 T:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8562 C:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8563 F:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8564 P:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8566 L:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8567 O:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]

856x-001 Total: Over A3/DLT
856x-002 Total: Under A3/DLT
856x-003 Duplex: Over A3/DLT
856x-004 Duplex: Under A3/DLT
156
Main SP Tables-8
8581 T:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the
application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters
are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
001 Total
002 Total: Full Color
003 B&W/Single Color
004 Development: CMY
005 Development: K
006 Copy: Color
007 Copy: B/W
008 Print: Color
009 Print: B/W
010 Total: Color
011 Total: B/W
012 Full Color: A3
013 Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller
014 Full Color Print
015 Mono Color Print
016 Full Color GPC
017 Twin Color Mode Print
018 Full Color Print(Twin)
019 Mono Color Print(Twin)
020 Full Color Total(CV)
021 Mono Color Total(CV)
022 Full Color Print(CV)
157
3. SP Mode Tables
028 Development: CMY(A3)
029 Development: K(A3)
030 Total: Color(A3)
031 Total: B/W(A3)
032 Total: B/W(A3)
8582 C:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by color
output.
001 B/W
002 Single Color
003 Two Color
004 Full Color
8583 F:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color output.
001 B/W
002 Single Color
8584 P:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by color output.
001 B/W
002 Mono Color
003 Full Color
004 Single Color
005 Two Color
158
Main SP Tables-8
8586 L:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color output.
001 B/W
002 Single Color
003 Two Color
004 Full Color
8591 O:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages printed,
and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:) applications only.
001 A3/DLT
002 Duplex
005 Banner
8601 T:Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1%/step]
These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for
each printing mode.
001 B/W
002 Color
011 B/W Printing Pages
012 Color Printing Pages
021 Coverage Counter 1
031 Coverage Counter 1 (YMC)
159
3. SP Mode Tables
8602 C:Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1%/step]
each printing mode.
8603 F:Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1%/step]
each printing mode.
P:Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1%/step]

8604 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for
each printing mode.
L:Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1%/step]

8606 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for
each printing mode.

8 602 8 603 8 604 8 606
860x-001: B/W Yes Yes Yes Yes
860x-002: Single Color Yes Yes Yes Yes
860x-003: Two Color Yes No Yes Yes
860x-004: Full Color Yes No Yes Yes
8617 SDK Apli Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK applicaion.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
007 SDK-7
160
Main SP Tables-8
008 SDK-8
009 SDK-9
010 SDK-10
011 SDK-11
012 SDK-12
8621 Func Use Counter DFU
001 to 064 Function 001 to Function 064
8631 T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone
number.
8633 F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone
number.
863x-001 B/W
863x-002 Color
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as
B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633
are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for
each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
8641 T:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax images
using I-Fax.
161
3. SP Mode Tables
8643 F:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using
I-Fax.
864x-001 B/W
864x-002 Color
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as
B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643
are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for
each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
8651 T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for
both the Scan and document server applications.
8655 S:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for
the Scan application only.
865x-001 B/W
865x-002 Color
• The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If the job is
cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
• If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the pages
are sent to the same SMTP server together).
• If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the document is
sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
• Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to a
large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted separately. For example, if a
162
Main SP Tables-8
10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the
count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
8661 T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router
server by both Scan and LS applications.
8665 S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router
server by the Scan application.
866x-001 B/W
866x-002 Color
• The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router
server.
• If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are not done.
• The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server.
8671 T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC
(Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
8675 S: Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC with
the Scan application.
867x-001 B/W
867x-002 Color
8681 T:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax.
These SPs are provided for the Fax application only,
8683 F:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL so the counts for SP8 681 and SP8 683 are the same.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
• This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the copier to the
destination.
163
3. SP Mode Tables
• When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are only
counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The counter goes
up by 10, not 20.)
8691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent from the
document server. The counter for the application that
8692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL was used to store the pages is incremented.
8693 F:TX PGS/LS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
8694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL
8695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C:
8696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL counter.
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
• If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted for the
application that stored them.
• When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the number of
pages sent to each destination.
8701 TX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them.
For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4, the count for
ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
001 PSTN-1
002 PSTN-2
003 PSTN-3
004 ISDN (G3,G4)
005 Network
8711 T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8715 S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.
164
Main SP Tables-8
871x-001 JPEG/JPEG2000
871x-002 TIFF(Multi/Single)
871x-003 PDF
871x-004 Other
871x-005 PDF/Comp
871x-006 PDF/A
871x-007 PDF(OCR)
871x-008 PDF/Comp(OCR)
871x-009 PDF/A(OCR)
8721 T: Deliv PGS/WSD *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8725 S: Deliv PGS/WSD *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each scanner mode.
872x-001 B/W
872x-002 Color
8731 T:Scan PGS/Media *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8735 S:Scan PGS/Media *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by each scanner
mode.
873x-001 B/W
873x-002 Color
8741 RX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive
them.
001 PSTN-1
002 PSTN-2
165
3. SP Mode Tables
003 PSTN-3
004 ISDN (G3,G4)
005 Network
8771 Dev Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development rollers)
for black and other color toners.
001 Total
002 K
003 Y
004 M
005 C
8781 Toner_Botol_Info. *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.

Note: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in
SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.
001 BK The number of black-toner bottles
002 Y The number of yellow-toner bottles
003 M The number of magenta-toner bottles
004 C The number of cyan-toner bottles
8791 LS Memory Remain *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1/%]
This SP displays the percent of space available on the document server for storing
documents.
001 BK The number of black-toner bottles
166
Main SP Tables-8
8801 Toner Remain *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows the
user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is better
than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10%
steps).
001 K
002 Y
003 M
004 C
8811 Eco Counter
001 Eco Total *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the number of pages reduced by using the color, full color, duplex and
combine function.
004 Duplex *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the number of pages reduced by using the duplex function.
005 Combine *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the number of pages reduced by using the combine function.
008 Duplex(%) *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1/%]
Displays the utilization ratio of the duplex function.
009 Combine(%) *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1/%]
Displays the utilization ratio of the combine function.
010 Paper Cut(%) *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
Displays the paper reduction ratio.
051 Sync Eco Total *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
054 Sync Duplex *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
055 Sync Combine *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
167
3. SP Mode Tables
058 Sync Duplex(%) *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
059 Sync Combine(%) *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
060 Sync Paper Cut(%) *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
101 Eco Totalr:Last *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
104 Duplex:Last *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
105 Combine:Last *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
108 Duplex(%):Last *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
109 Combine(%):Last *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
110 Paper Cut(%):Last *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
151 Sync Eco Totalr:Last *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
154 Sync Duplex:Last *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
155 Sync Combine:Last *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
158 Sync Duplex(%):Last *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
159 Sync Combine(%):Last *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
160 Sync Paper Cut(%):Last *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
8851 CVr Cnt: 0-10% *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each
color is from 0% to 10%.
011 0 to 2%: BK 031 5 to 7%: BK
012 0 to 2%: Y 032 5 to 7%: Y
013 0 to 2%: M 033 5 to 7%: M
014 0 to 2%: C 034 5 to 7%: C
021 3 to 4%: BK 041 8 to 10%: BK
022 3 to 4%: Y 042 8 to 10%: Y
023 3 to 4%: M 043 8 to 10%: M
168
Main SP Tables-8
024 3 to 4%: C 044 8 to 10%: C
001 BK
002 Y
003 M
004 C
001 BK
002 Y
003 M
004 C
8881 CVr Cnt: 31%- *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1/step]
color is 31% or higher.
001 BK
002 Y
003 M
004 C
8891 Page/Toner Bottle *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each color.
001 BK
169
3. SP Mode Tables
002 Y
003 M
004 C
8901 Page/Toner_Prev1 *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each color.
001 BK
002 Y
003 M
004 C
8911 Page/Toner_Prev2 *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color.
001 BK
002 Y
003 M
004 C
8921 Cvr Cnt/Total *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1/%]
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Coverage(%):BK
002 Coverage (%) Y
003 Coverage (%) M
004 Coverage (%) C
8921 Cvr Cnt/Total *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
011 Coverage /P: BK
012 Coverage /P: Y
170
Main SP Tables-8
013 Coverage /P: M
014 Coverage /P: C
8941 Machine Status *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode.
These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for
improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
001 Operation Time Engine operation time. Does not include time while
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
002 Standby Time Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
003 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing
background printing.
004 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
005 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing

background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
006 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying.
007 PrtJam Total time when paper jams have been staying during
printing.
008 OrgJam Total time when original jams have been staying
during scanning.
009 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying.
8951 AddBook Register *CTL -
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration.
171
3. SP Mode Tables
001 User Code /User ID User code registrations. [0 to 99999/ 0 /

1/step]
002 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
003 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
004 Group Group destination registrations.
005 Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations

for relay TX.
006 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
007 Copy Program Copy application registrations [0 to 255 / 0 /

with the Program (job settings) 1/step]
feature.
008 Fax Program Fax application registrations with

the Program (job settings) feature.
009 Printer Program Printer application registrations

with the Program (job settings)
feature.
010 Scanner Program Scanner application registrations

with the Program (job settings)
feature.
8961 Electricity Status *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
001 Ctrl Standby Time
002 STR Time
003 Main Power Off Time
004 Reading and Printing Time
005 Printing Time
006 Reading Time
007 Eng Waiting Time
008 Low Pawer State Time
172
Main SP Tables-8
009 Silent State Time
010 Heater Off State Time
011 LCD on Time
101 Silent Print
8971 Unit Control *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
001 Engine Off Recovery Count
002 Power Off Count
003 Force Power Off Count
8999 Admin. Counter List
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Total *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
002 Copy: Full Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
003 Copy: BW *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
004 Copy: Single Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
005 Copy: Two Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
006 Printer Full Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
007 Printer BW *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
008 Printer Single Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
009 Printer Two Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
010 Fax Print: BW *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
011 Fax Print: Single Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
013 Duplex *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
022 Copy: Full Color(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
023 Copy: BW(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
173
3. SP Mode Tables
024 Copy: Single Color(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
025 Copy: Two Color(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
026 Printer: Full Color(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
027 Printer: BW(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
028 Printer: Single Color(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
029 Printer: Two Color(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
030 Fax Print: BW(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
031 Fax Print: Single Color(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
101 Transmission Total: Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
102 Transmission Total: BW *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
103 FAX Transmission *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
104 Scanner Transmission: *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

Color
105 Scanner Transmission: *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

BW
174
Printer Service Mode

1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 Responding with the hostname as the sysName Model Hostname

name
(PnP name)
This BitSwitch can change the value of the sysName.

• 0 (default): Model name (PnP name) such as "MP 501SPF"
• 1: Host name
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout Disabled Enabled
Enables/Disables MFP I/O Timeouts. If enabled, the MFP I/O Timeout setting will
have no affect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode Disabled Enabled
If this BitSwitch is enabled, print jobs will be saved to the GW SD slot and not output
to paper.
bit 5 [PS and PDF] Paper size error margin ±5pt ±10pt
When a PS job is printed by using a custom paper size, the job might not be printed
because of a paper size mismatch caused by a calculation error. By default, the
error margin for matching to a paper size is ±5 points. By enabling this bit switch, the
error margin for matching to a paper size can be extended to ±10 points.
bit 6 Not used - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border Disabled Enabled
Prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border around the printable area.
175
3. SP Mode Tables
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 Not used - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Not used - -
bit 3 [PCL5e/c.PS]: PDL Auto Switching Enabled Disabled
Enables/disable the MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job. Some host
systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL switching is
disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 Not used - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 Not used - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
to 1
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility Disabled Enabled
Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.

In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be
changed to "<ESC>*r1A".
bit 3
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
to 2
176
1001 Bit Switch
bit 3 IPDS print-side reversal Disabled Enabled
If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side because
of printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce printing speed.
bit 4 DFU - -
to 5
bit 6 Not used - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 Not used - -
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type mismatch Disabled Enabled

occurs (Single (Multiple
copy) copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a
single copy is output by default. Using this BitSwitch, the device can be configured to
print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit 2 Prevent SDK applications from altering the contents Disabled Enabled
of a job.
If this BitSwitch is enabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter print data. This
is achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a module called the
"GPS Filter".
Note: The main purpose of this BitSwitch is for troubleshooting the effects of SDK
applications on data.
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpereter to determine whether

a job is PS data or not. For details, refer to page 191 "Printing Features".
• Pattern3: The larger the pattern number, the greater the number of criterion
used.
• Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
177
3. SP Mode Tables
1001 Bit Switch
bit 4 Increase max. number of stored jobs. Disabled Enabled

(100)
Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD. The default
(disabled) is 100. If this is enabled, the max. will be raised to 750 or 1000
depending on the model.
bit 5 Not used - -
bit 6 Method for determining the image rotation for the Disabled Enabled
edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of
older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit 7 Letterhead mode printing Enabled

Disabled
(Duplex)
Routes all pages through the duplex unit.

If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last page of an odd-paged duplex job, are
not routed through the duplex unit. This could result in problems with letterhead/pre-
printed pages.
Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper.
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 Not used - -
bit 1 DFU - -
to 5
bit 6 Not used - -
bit 7 DFU - -
178
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 Not used - -
bit 1
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
to 2
bit 3 Not used - -
bit 4 DFU - -
to 5
bit 6 PCL, RPCS, PS: Forced BW print Enabled Disabled
Switches whether to ignore PDL color command.

(MP 501/601 Only)
bit 7 Not used - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted via Disabled Enabled
USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284). (Immediatel (10 seconds)
y)
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection does not

necessarily mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device whether
to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit 1 Not used - -
179
3. SP Mode Tables
1001 Bit Switch
bit 2 Job Cancel Disabled Enabled

(Not (Cancelled)
cancelld)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this BitSwitch is enabled, printing under the following conditions might result
in problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3 Not used - -
bit 4 Timing of the PJL Status ReadBack (JOB END) when Disabled Enabled
printing multiple collated copies.
This BitSwitch determines the timing of the PJL USTATUS JOB END sent when multiple
collated copies are being printed.
• 0 (default): JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the first copy has
completed printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented after the
first copy and then again at the end of the job.
• 1: JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the last copy has finished
printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented at the end of each job.
bit 5 Display UTF-8 text in the operation panel Enabled Disabled
• Enabled (=0): Text composed of UTF-8 characters can be displayed in the

operation panel.
• Disabled (=1): UTF-8 characters cannot be displayed in the operation panel.
For example, job names are sometimes stored in the MIB using UTF-8 encoded
characters. When these are displayed on the operation panel, they will be garbled
unless this BitSwitch is enabled (=0).
bit 6 Disable super option Disabled Enabled
Switches super option disable on / off. It this is On, multiple jobs are grouped at LPR
port. PJL settings are enabled even jobs that are specified queue names are sent.
180
1001 Bit Switch
bit 7 Enable/Disable Print from USB/SD's Preview

Enabled Disabled
function
Determines whether Print from USB/SD will have the Preview function. (MP
501/601 Only)
• Enabled (=0): Print from USB/SD will have the Preview function.
• Disabled (=1): Print from USB/SD will not have the Preview function.
1001 Bit Switch
010 Bit Switch A 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
to 4
bit 5 Store and Skip Errored Job locks the queue Queue is not Queue locked
locked after after SSEJ
SSEJ
If this is 1, then after a job is stored using Store and Skip Errored Job (SSEJ), new
jobs cannot be added to the queue until the stored job has been completely printed.
(MP 501/601 Only)
bit 6 Allow use of Store and Skip Errored Job if Does not Allows SSEJ
connected to an external charge device. allow SSEJ with ECD
with ECD
If this is 0, Store and Skip Errored Job (SSEJ) will be automatically disabled if an
external charge device is connected. (MP 501/601 Only)
Note: We do not officially support enabling this bit switch (1). Use it at your own
risk.
bit 7 Job cancels remaining pages when the paid-for

Job does not
pages have been printed on an external charge Job cancels
cancel
device
When setting 1 is enabled, after printing the paid-for pages on an external charge
device, the job that includes any remaining pages will be canceled.
This setting will prevent the next user from printing the unnecessary pages from the
previous user's print job. (MP 501/601 Only)
181
3. SP Mode Tables
1001 Bit Switch
011 Bit Switch B 0 1
bit 0 Show Menu List Hide Menu Show Menu

List List
If this is 0, the Menu List button will be removed from Printer Features. (MP 501/601
Only)
bit 1 Print job interruption Does not Allow

allow interruption
interruption
• 0 (default): Print jobs are not interrupted. If a job is promoted to the top of the
print queue, it will wait for the currently printing job to finish.
• 1: If a job is promoted to the top of the queue, it will interrupt the currently
printing job and start printing immediately.
bit 2 Switch for enabling or disabling Limitless Paper Enabled Disabled

Feeding for the Bypass Tray
When the Bypass Tray is the target of the Auto Tray Select and Any Size/Type is
configured for the Tray Setting Priority setting of the Bypass Tray, this BitSwitch can
switch the behavior whether or not Limitless Paper Feeding is applied to the Bypass
Tray.* The default is Enabled (=0).
*Limitless Paper Feeding will try a matching tray of the next highest priority if a job
specified to Auto Tray Select as the tray setting is submitted and the tray runs out of
paper.
• Enabled (=0: Default): Limitless Paper Feeding is applied to the Bypass Tray. If
a tray other than the Bypass Tray matches the job's paper size and type but has
run out of paper, printing will occur from the Bypass Tray.
• Disabled (=1): Limitless Paper Feeding is not applied to the Bypass Tray. If a
tray other than the Bypass Tray matches the job's paper size and type but has
run out of paper, printing will stop and an alert will appear on the LCD screen,
stating that the tray has run out of paper. This prevents unexpected use of the
Bypass Tray.
Limitations when this BitSwitch is set to "1":
- The "Paper Tray Priority: Printer" setting must be configured to a tray other than the
Bypass Tray.
- Jobs that contain more than one paper size cannot be printed.
bit 3 Not used - -
182
1001 Bit Switch
bit 4 Add "Apply Auto Paper Select" is the condition that Disabled Enabled
decides if the device's paper size or paper type
should be overwritten.
If this BitSwitch is set to "1" (enabled), the "Apply Auto Paper Select" setting will
decide if the paper size or paper type that is specified in the device settings should
be overwritten by the job's commands when "Tray Setting Priority" is set to "Driver/
Command" or "Any Type".
- Apply Auto Paper Select = OFF: Overwritten (priority is given to the job’s
commands)
- Apply Auto Paper Select = ON: Not overwritten (priority is given to the device
settings)
bit 5 DFU - -
Bit 6 The tray selection setting when a paper size or Disabled Enabled
paper type mismatch occurs.
If the tray selection setting is enabled, selecting the tray that the "Apply Auto Paper
Select" setting is configured to "Off" cannot be done when a paper size or paper
type mismatch occurs.
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
012 Bit Switch C 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
to 4
bit 5 Change the user ID type displayed on the operation Disabled Enabled
panel
As of 15S models, the Login User Name can be displayed on the operation panel.
The user ID type displayed on the operation panel can be changed by configuring
BitSwitch #12-5 as follows:
• 0 (default): Login User Name
• 1: User ID. If this is enabled, User ID will be displayed, which is equivalent to
the behavior exhibited in 14A and earlier models.
183
3. SP Mode Tables
1001 Bit Switch
bit 6 AirPrint Enabled Disabled
AirPrint can be disabled by changing this BitSwitch from 0 (default) to 1.
bit 7 DFU - -
1003 [Clear Setting]
1003-001 Initialize System Initializes settings in the System menu of the user
mode.
1003-003 Delete Program DFU
1004 [Print Summary]
1004-001 Service Summary Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all
the controller settings).
1004-002 Service Summary2
1005 [Display Version]
1005-001 Printer Version Displays the version of the controller firmware. (SP
5300/5310 only)
1005-002 Printer Version Displays the version of the controller firmware. (MP
501/601 only)
1006 [Sample / Locked Print]

(MP
501/601
only)
1006-001 0:Link with Doc. Srv 1:Enable -
1007 [Supply Display]

(SP
5300/5310
only)
184
1007-001 Development Enables or disables the display for information on

each consumable supply.
1007-002 PCU
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
1007-003 Transfer 0: OFF, 1: ON
1007-004 Int. Transfer
1007-005 Transfer Roller
1007-006 Fuser
1007-007 Fuser Oil
1110 [Media Print Device Setting]

(MP
Enable or disable the media print support function.
501/601
only)
1110-002 0:Disable 1:Enable [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1111 [All Job Delete Mode]

(MP
Selects whether to include an image processing job in jobs subject to full cancellation
501/601
from the SCS job list.
only)
1111-001 0:excluding New Job [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

1:including New Job
185
3. SP Mode Tables
Scanner Service Mode (MP 501/601 Only)

SP1-XXX
1005 [Erase Margin(Remote scan)]
1-005-001 Range from 0 to 5 mm CTL* [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 / step]
1009 [Remote scan disable]
1-009-001 0:Enable 1:Disable CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1010 [Non Display ClearLight PDF]
1-010-001 0:Display CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

1:Nondisplay
1011 [Org Count Disp]
1-011-001 0:ON 1:OFF CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1012 [UserInfo Release]
1-012-001 0:No 1:Yes CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
1013 [Scan to Media Device Setting]
1-013-002 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
1014 [Scan to Folder Pass Input Set]
1-014-001 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1040 [Scan:LT/LG Mixed Sizes Setting]
1-040-001 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1041 [Scan:FlairAPI Setting]
186
Scanner Service Mode (MP 501/601 Only)
1-014-001 0x00 - 0xff CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
SP2-XXX
2021 [Compression Level(Grayscale)]
2-021-001 Comp1:5-95 CTL* [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 / step]
2-021-002 Comp2:5-95 CTL* [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 / step]
2-021-003 Comp3:5-95 CTL* [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 / step]
2-021-004 Comp4:5-95 CTL* [5 to 95 / 80 / 1 / step]
2-021-005 Comp5:5-95 CTL* [5 to 95 / 95 / 1 / step]
2023 [ClearLightPDF:ACS Setting]
2-023-001 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
2024 [Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF]
2-024-001 Compression CTL* [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 / step]

Ratio(Normal)

Ratio(High)
2025 [Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF JPEG2000]

Ratio(Normal)
JPEG2000

Ratio(High) JPEG2000
2030 [OCR PDF DetectSens]
2-030-001 White Lumi Value: 0 - CTL* [0 to 255 / 250 / 1 / step]

255
187
3. SP Mode Tables
2-030-002 White Pix Ratio: 0 - CTL* [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 / step]

100
2-030-003 White Tile Ratio: 0 CTL* [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 / step]

-100
188
Input and Output Check
Input and Output Check

Input Check Table (SP5-803)
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to
a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Reading
SP Description
0 1
5-803-001 Exit Full Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5-803-016 Key Card Set Set Not set
5-803-017 Key Counter Set Set Not set
5-803-018 IPU Version - -
Output Check Table (SP5-804)
Activates the electrical components for functional check.

It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time.
SP Display
5-804-001 CTLFAN Motor
5-804-101 FAN:LSU/DLP/CENTER/REAR
5-804-102 FAN:LVU
5-804-103 Toner Motor
5-804-202 Scanner Lamp
189
3. SP Mode Tables
190
Printing Features
Behavior of USB Printer Detection
An MFP/LP connected via USB sends its product name and unique serial number. With the data, the
machine determines whether requires a printer driver for the USB device to be installed.
SP5-844-005 allows you to change how to determine the MFP/LP requires a printer driver installation:
• OFF
If SP5-844-005 is set to OFF, the unique serial number of the device is sent to the computer. As a
result, if the device is swapped out for a device of the same product, pop-up messages will
appear, because the serial numbers between the two are different.
• Level 1
If SP5-844-005 is set to Level 1, a common serial number for the product such as "MP 305+"
series is sent to the computer. As a result, if the device is swapped out for a device of the same
product, pop-up messages will not appear because the devices are recognized as having the
same serial number.
• Level 2
If SP5-844-005 is set to Level 2, a common serial number for all GW/GW+ models is sent to the
computer. As a result, if a GW/GW+ device is swapped out for a different GW/GW+ device,
pop-up messages will not appear because the devices are both recognized as being based on
GW/GW+.
Auto PDL Detection Function
Overview
The Auto PDL Detection function gives the MFP the ability to determine the PDL of a job or of specific
parts of a job. This can be especially useful in cases where the PDL is not specified or if the job contains
multiple PDLs. This is only possible if the job was not created using a driver.
Conditions for detection of the PDL
The MFP will only attempt to detect a job's PDL if all of the following conditions are met.
• No @PJL ENTER LANGUAGE command is contained in the job
191
• No submission protocol options (lpr, ftp, rcp, or rsh options) have been used to specify the PDL
• User Tools > Printer > System > Printer Language = Auto
• The printer is unable to detect PCL6 or RPCS. However these are almost always created using a
driver and therefore contain the PJL command specifying the PDL.
PDL detection by the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter
There are 3 components in the printer which can perform Auto PDL Detection:
1. Printer system:
Uses a set of triggers unique to PCL5, PS or PDF. Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be
searched for triggers.
2. PCL interpreter:
It can detect PS triggers in PCL data. If a PS trigger is detected, the PCL interpreter will abort
processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. Up to 256 bytes
from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.
3. PS interpreter:
It can detect PCL5 triggers in PS data. If a PCL trigger is detected, the PS interpreter will abort
processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. The entire page
(regardless of the number of bytes) is searched for triggers.
• 2. and 3. can be disabled using Printer Bit Switch 2-3=1.

• If the "Printer Language" is configured to anything other than Auto, all detection will be disabled.
• An interpreter submits a job page by page to the rasterizer. Therefore, when an interpreter detects
a trigger mid-job, the previous pages will have already been submitted and will be output using the
previously detected PDL.
• If the PDL cannot be detected by the printer system, then the PDL defaults to the one configured in
"Configuration > Printer Basic Settings > Default Printer Language".
192
Printing Features
The Printer Language setting and Default Printer Language setting in WIM:
PDL selection and switching
3 types of PDL selection/switching are performed:

1. PDL selection (PCL5 or PS (including PDF)) at the beginning of the job: performed by the printer
system
2. PDL switching from PCL5 to PS: performed by the PCL interpreter and the printer system
193
3. PDL switching from PS to PCL5: performed by the PS interpreter and the printer system
Triggers
Printer system
PCL5 triggers [ESC]E
[FF]
194
Printing Features
PS triggers %!PS-Adobe-3.1
"%!"
"dict begin"
"bind def"
"findfont"
"showpage"
"/statusdict"
"0 startjob"
[EOT]
"}" + space character + "def"
"userdict" (*)
PDF triggers %PDF-

%!PS-Adobe-M.nPDF- (*M, n=numeric)
* "userdict" is excluded by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1.
• Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be searched for triggers.
• "%%" can be added to the PS triggers by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1
• If a job is identified as PDF, it will be sent to the PS interpreter to be processed as a regular PS job.
PS interpreter
PCL5 trigger [ESC]E and 2 or more continuous PCL commands
• Up to 256 bytes from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.
Some possible problems

Garbled output:
If a string of characters (or binary data) is mistaken as a trigger and an incorrect PDL is applied, the
output will be garbled.
Incorrect printer settings:
Printer settings, for example the paper size, is incorrectly applied. This can happen when the printer
settings at the beginning of the job are initialized before a PDL switch occurred and no settings
were configured for the rest of the job.
195
Printer Bit Switch description
Bit Switch 2-3

This controls Auto PDL Detection by the PCL interpreter and PS interpreter.
BitSW 2-3=0 (default):
If PDL switching is applied to the job, all of the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter will
search for switching criteria (triggers).
BitSW 2-3=1:
Only the printer system will search for switching criteria (triggers). PCL/PS interpreters will not.
Bit Switch 5-3
This affects the PDL switching criteria (triggers) used by the printer system.
"%%" is not used as a printer system PS trigger. "%%" will not call the PS interpreter.
BitSW 5-3=1:
"%%" is used as a printer system PS trigger.
The reason that "%%" is not included as a trigger by default, is that a string of text in the body of the job
such as the below, could result in a false positive. This would trigger a switch and result garbled output.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
However some customers prefer that "%%" be included as a switching criteria. BitSW5-3=1 should be
used in such a case.
• A side effect of BitSW5-3=1 is that "userdict" will no longer be used as a PS trigger.

Bit Switch 9-0
These determine whether Auto PDL Detection for print jobs transmitted via USB/parallel will wait 10
seconds to make sure the first 2KB of the job has been sent.
The Printer system portion of the Auto PDL Detection function is only performed on the first 2KB of a job
and can wait up to 10 seconds for that first 2KB to arrive. As the printer is unable to detect the end of
jobs submitted over a USB/Parallel connection, it might be preferable to not wait 10 seconds if jobs of
less than 2KB are going to be printed. Enabling/disabling this waiting time is the purpose of BitSw 9-0.
BitSw 9-0=0 (default):
The printer system will not wait 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.
BitSw 9-0=1:
The printer system will wait up to 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.
196
Printing Features
Print Images Rotation
Bit Switch 5-6

This change the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will be applied to every page of every job. Pages will
always be rotated as if they were to be bound on that edge.
BitSW 5-6=1:
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will only be applied if the job is stapled, punched, or Z-
folded. Otherwise, the bound edge might differ from page to page.
Example:
A 3-page job. Page 1 has the PCL simplex command. Page 2 and 3 have the PCL duplex long-edge
bind commands.
No finishing options (staple, punch, z-fold) are used.
Bit Switch #5-6=0:
197
Bit Switch #5-6=1:
• Used in conjunction with Bit Switch #5-6, Orientation Auto Detect for PS/PDF jobs might cause
unexpected results.
PJL USTATUS
Bit Switch 9-4

These control the way PJL USTATUS returns page count totals in cases where multiple copies of a job are
being printed.
BitSw 9-4=0 (default):
This change the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
1. The page count for a single copy is returned after the first copy is printed.
2. The page count for the rest of the copies, excluding the first copy, is returned after all copies have
been printed.
3. This emulates an older HP PCL firmware spec. It is only needed for compatibility with legacy
software.
BitSw 9-4=1:
The page count for all copies is output after all copies have been printed.
This emulates more recent HP PCL firmware specs.
For example, consider 3 copies of a 3 page job:
9-4 = 0
@PJL USTATUS JOB
198
Printing Features
START
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS JOB
END
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=3
<comment> The page count of the first copy is returned.</comment>
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6
<comment> The page count of the remaining two copies is returned.</comment>
9-4 = 1
@PJL USTATUS JOB
START
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
199
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6@PJL USTATUS PAGE
7
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
8
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
9
@PJL USTATUS JOB
END
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=9
<comment> The page count of all three copies is returned.</comment>
200
Scanner Features (MP 501/601 Only)

Display settings of recently used scan destination
Configuring the scanner interface so that the most recently used scan destination is cleared.
Whether the MFP clears the most recently used scan destination, can be configured using Scanner SP
1-012-001.
By default, this is cleared to avoid subsequent users scanning to it by mistake.
Scanner SP 1-012-001
1 (default): Clear
0: Do not clear
This will cause all of the following to be cleared after the scanning is complete:
• Destination
• Sender
• Email subject
• Email message
• File name
Scanner SP 1-012-001=1 (default):
Exceptions:
• User Auth.:
If SP 1-012-001 = 0 and if User Auth. (excluding User Code authentication) is enabled, the most
recently used scan destination will only be retained until the user logs out.
• Scanner Auto Reset timer:
201
Even if SP 1-012-001 = 0 the most recently used scan destination can still be cleared by the
Scanner Auto Reset timer. If the Scanner Auto Reset timer is shorter than the System Auto Reset
timer, then the most recently used scan destination will be cleared when the Scanner Auto Reset
timer elapses.
RTB 49
The Setting of SMTP authentication in Scan to Email
This section
was corrected
Scan to Email fails with the error message "Transmission has failed ". The SMTP username and password
are correct. How can I make Scan to Email pass?
Change SP 5-860-022 "SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement" to On. By doing this, Scan to Email will
pass the SMTP authentication.
• Using this option to solve the above problem, the device email address will appear in the email's
"From" field. The email address of the user who sent the email will appear in the "Reply-to" field.
Explanation
This is an SMTP authentication issue that aborts transmission of an already started Scan to Email.
Currently this has only been reproduced using MS-Exchange server.
MS-Exchange requires that all of the following match:
1. The sender's address in the "MAIL FROM" field. This is also known as the "envelope sender" or
"MIME sender". It is an SMTP command sent at the beginning of the email transmission process.
2. The sender's address in the mail header "From:" field. This appears as "From" in email clients. It is a
part of the email itself.
3. The email address corresponding to the SMTP username used to login into the SMTP server.
When the MFP logins into the SMTP server, the email address of the username 3) will be compared to
1) and 2). If these comparisons fail, authentication will also fail. Exchange server will stop the
transmission procedure, and the "Transmission has failed" message will be returned to the sender.
Typical example
NG case:
SP5-860-022 is Off:
1. The "MAIL FROM" field = device (Fig.1 )
2. The mail header "From:" field = user (Fig.2 )
3. The SMTP username = device (Fig.1 )
When the SMTP server compares 2) and 3) the Exchange Server will stop the transmission procedure.
OK case:
SP5-860 can be used to make the values in the above example, match.
202
In this example, if SP5-860-022 is On, the user's email address in the mail header '2)' will be replaced
by the Administrator's email address. (see Fig.3 )
To solve the problem, the Administrator's address must be the same as the device's address.
If this is done:
1. The "Mail From: field = device (Fig.1 )
2. The mail header "From:" field = administrator (Fig.3 )
3. The SMTP username = device (Fig.1 )
1,2 and 3 must match and the authentication should be successful.
• The user's email address will still be inserted into the reply-to field.
Fig.1 Default device SMTP username, password and email address
Fig.2 A user's email address in the Address Book
203
Fig.3 Administrator's email address
The Qualification Switching of Scan to Folder
Determining which account Scan to Folder uses to access a scan destination and the effects of System SP
5-846-021.
This method depends on how the destination is accessed, whether authentication is being used, and SP
5-846-021.
Cases:
Case Destination selection User auth. Account used to access the folder
Either enabled or
A Manual entry The user's account *
disabled
The recipient's account

B disabled (as configured in the Address Book's
Folder Authentication setting)
If SP 5-846-021 =
Destination list 0 (default): The authenticated user's
account
C enabled
1: The recipient's account
(as configured in the Address Book's
Folder Authentication setting)
* The "user's account" will be either the one entered during scanning (see the Manual Entry screen
capture) or if User Auth. is enabled, the account configured in the user's Folder Authentication setting will
be used.
The destination's access logs:
204
Case A or Case C with SP=0: The access logs can be used to determine which user sent the scan.
Case B or Case C with SP=1: All access will be logged as the same user.
205
Management Features
How to Disable the Document Server Function
1. Enter 'Copy' SP mode.

2. Change SP5-967-001 to 1. (0:ON 1:OFF)
3. Reboot the machine.
• When the above SP mode (SP5-967-001) is OFF (=1), both the Document Server and
Locked Print functions will be disabled.
How to Use Locked Print When the Document Server Is Disabled
1. Enter 'Printer' SP mode.

2. Set SP1-006-001 to 1.
0: Link with Doc. Srv (default)
Locked print will only be enabled if the document server is enabled.
1: Enable
Enable Locked
Print will be enabled no matter the status of the document server.
3. Turn OFF then ON the main power.
206
Security Features
Security Features
How to Restrict Access to the WIM Job Menu
1. Enter 'Printer' SP mode.

2. Set SP5-888-001
0: (default): "Job" menu is enabled.
1: "Job" menu is disabled.
• This setting takes effect only if user authentication (other than User Code auth.) is disabled.
How to Restrict Web Image Monitor Access to the Document Server (MP
501/601 Only)
System (Copier) SP 5-885-020 bit 0, 1 and 7 restrict Web Image Monitor access to the DS. It disables
the following WIM settings:
• The entire Document Server menu (shown in blue in fig1)
• Job > Document Server (shown in red in fig1)
See the following for details:
Bit 0:
Bit 0 = 0 (default): Allows anyone (guests, users, admins) access to the DS via WIM.
Bit 0 = 1: Prevents everyone from accessing the DS via WIM.
Bit 1:
Bit 1 = 1: Only administrators can access the DS via WIM.
207
• Without admin privileges, even authenticated users will be unable to access the DS via WIM.
Bit 7:
Bit 7 = 1: Only administrators and authenticated users can access the DS via WIM.
The most restrictive result of combining these three configurations will take priority. So for example:
Bit 0 = 0
Bit 1 = 1
Bit 7 = 1
As Bit 1 = 1 is the most restrictive of the three, it will take presedence over the other two and only
administrators will be able to access the DS via WIM.
• In order for SP5-885-020 to have any effect, the Document Server must be enabled
(SP5-967-001=0). For information about SP5-967-001, refer to Disabling the Document Server
using System SP5-967-001 and Printer SP1-006-001.
• Access to the entire "Job" menu can be restricted using SP 5-888-001. For details, refer to Use of
SP 5-888-001 to restrict access to the "Job" menu on WIM.
User Authentication for Specific MFP Applications
The SP5-420 settings enable/disable User Authentication for specific MFP applications.
208
Security Features
SP 5-420 User Authentication Value (Default: 0)
SP5-420-001 Copy
SP5-420-011 Document Server
SP5-420-021 Fax 0 (ON) 1 (OFF)
SP5-420-031 Scanner
SP5-420-041 Printer
1. Enable User Authentication for the device as a whole:

User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > User Authentication Management
2. Use the SP5-420 settings to specify the applications to which User authentication is to
apply.
209
MEMO
210
MEMO
211
MEMO
212 EN

Ricoh 5310

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ricoh 5310

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ricoh 5310

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety precautions should be followed when servicing the machine?

What safety precautions should be followed when servicing the machine?

How can the document server and locked print functions be disabled/enabled?

How can the document server and locked print functions be disabled/enabled?

MP 501/601

Switches and Symbols

Prevention of Physical Injury

Health Safety Conditions

1. For the machines installed with the ozone filters:

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

Handling the development unit cooling system

For the machines installed the development cooling system:

WARNING FOR LASER UNIT

Safety Instructions for the Color Controller

Flat Flexible Cable

SEF Short Edge Feed [A]

LEF Long Edge Feed [B]

Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

No. Item Machine Code

No. Item Machine Code MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310

2 Caster Table Type M24 D3C7-01 Yes Yes

XPS Direct Print Option Type

No. Item Machine Code MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310

- Extended USB Board Type M19 D3BS-01 Yes Yes

IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type

IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type

- Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D D566-01 Yes No

- File Format Converter Type M19 D3BR-04 Yes No

Enhanced Security HDD Option

- Hard Disk Drive Option Type P8 M500-05 No Yes

- NFC Card Reader Type M24 D3CP-08 Yes No

DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type

Optional Counter Interface Unit

*1 You can attach up to four paper feed units.

Optimum Environmental Conditions

• White area: permissible range

• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

Minimum Space Requirements

1. Rear: Over 300 mm (11.9")

• [A]: 475 mm (18.8")

• [A]: 420 mm (16.6")

Main Machine Installation

Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.

5 Telephone cable with ferrite core 1 - -

9 Manual: Read This First 1 1 -

10 Sheet: Quick Installation Guide 1 1 -

11 Manual: Initial Guide for FAX 1 1 -

13 Manual: Start Guide 1 - 1

14 Caution Sheet: Operation panel 1 1 1

15 Caution Sheet: NFC tag 2 2 2

17 Sheet: EULA (End User License Agreement) 1 1 1

19 Sheet: Safety Information - - 1

20 Sheet: User Registration 1 - -

21 Sheet: Help Desk Card 1 - -

Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.

1 Decal: Paper grade 1 - - -

2 Sheet: Safety Information - 1 - -